MEIDEN

AC SPEED CONTROL EQUIPMENT

THYFREC-VT230SE
200V System 0.4 to 90kW
400V System 0.4 to 370kW

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

———————— NOTICE ————————

1. Read this manual thoroughly before using the VT230SE, and store in a safe
place for reference.
2. Make sure that this manual is delivered to the final user.

MEIDENSHA CORPORATION

ST-3425B Sep. 2005

 Contents

Preface ..................................................................................................................................... iii

PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY ................................................................................................ iv
<Names of each part> ............................................................................................................. viii

Chapter 1 Delivery Inspection and Storage ...................................................................... 1-1

1-1 Delivery inspection and storage .................................................................................. 1-1
1-2 Details of rating nameplate and type display method ................................................. 1-1

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring ....................................................................................... 2-1

2-1 Installation environment .............................................................................................. 2-1
2-2 Installation and wiring method ..................................................................................... 2-2
2-3 Precautions for power supply and motor wiring .......................................................... 2-3
2-4 Precautions for wiring to the control signal ................................................................. 2-13

Chapter 3 Test Operation and Adjustment ........................................................................ 3-1

3-1 Control selection .......................................................................................................... 3-2
3-2 Selection of operation mode ....................................................................................... 3-2
3-3 Flow of test operation .................................................................................................. 3-3
3-4 Preparation for operation ............................................................................................ 3-4
3-5 Settings of data before operation ................................................................................ 3-4
3-6 Automatic tuning .......................................................................................................... 3-4
3-7 Test operation with operation panel ............................................................................ 3-19

Chapter 4 Operation Panel .................................................................................................. 4-1

4-1 Details of operation panel ........................................................................................... 4-1
4-2 Modes and parameters ............................................................................................... 4-3
4-3 Changing modes ......................................................................................................... 4-12
4-4 Reading parameters in monitor mode ....................................................................... 4-13
4-5 Reading and adjusting block-A, B & C parameters .................................................... 4-14
4-6 Reading the changed parameters (Non-default value parameter list) ....................... 4-16
4-7 Customizing block-B, C parameter ............................................................................ 4-18
4-8 Reading fault history ..................................................................................................... 4-20

Chapter 5 Control Input/Output .......................................................................................... 5-1

5-1 Input/output terminal function ..................................................................................... 5-1
5-2 Control input/output circuit ......................................................................................... 5-2
5-3 Programmable sequence input function (PSI) ....................................................... 5-3
5-4 Programmable sequence output function (PSO) ................................................... 5-7
5-5 Sequence input logic ................................................................................................... 5-8
5-6 Changing of terminal functions .................................................................................... 5-9
5-7 Programmable analog input function (PAI) ................................................................. 5-11
5-8 Programmable analog output function (PAO) ............................................................. 5-13
5-9 Selecting the setting data ............................................................................................ 5-14

Chapter 6 Control Functions and Parameter Settings ..................................................... 6-1

6-1 Monitor parameters ..................................................................................................... 6-1
6-2 Block-A parameters ..................................................................................................... 6-6
6-3 Block-B parameters ..................................................................................................... 6-8
6-4 Block-C parameters ..................................................................................................... 6-27
6-5 Block-U parameters ..................................................................................................... 6-40
6-6 Function explanation ................................................................................................... 6-41

i
 6-7 Application to square low variable torque load ････････････････････････････ 6-98
6-8 Adjusting the IM vector control speed control related parameters ･･･････････ 6-102
6-9 Adjusting the PM motor control system parameters ･･････････････････････ 6-107
6-10 Operating the auxiliary drive motor ･････････････････････････････････････ 6-112

Chapter 7 Options ................................................................................................................ 7-1

7-1 Outline of options ........................................................................................................ 7-1
7-2 Built-in PCB option ................................................................................................. 7-4
7-3 Dynamic braking (DBR) option .................................................................................... 7-5
7-4 ACL and DCL .............................................................................................................. 7-10

Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspection ............................................................................. 8-1

8-1 Inspection items .......................................................................................................... 8-1
8-2 Measuring devices ...................................................................................................... 8-2
8-3 Protective functions ..................................................................................................... 8-3
8-4 Troubleshooting with fault display ............................................................................... 8-4
8-5 Troubleshooting with no fault display .......................................................................... 8-10

Chapter 9 EMC Instruction .................................................................................................. 9-1

9-1 Preface ........................................................................................................................ 9-1
9-2 Installation environment .............................................................................................. 9-1
9-3 Input filters and their connections ............................................................................... 9-2
9-4 Choosing and Installing power cables ........................................................................ 9-2
9-5 Choosing and connecting control leads ...................................................................... 9-3
9-6 Earthing method .......................................................................................................... 9-4
9-7 EMI and EMS .............................................................................................................. 9-4
9-8 Consideration to measuring devices ........................................................................... 9-4
9-9 Installation into a metal cabinet ................................................................................... 9-5
9-10 Selecting and fitting of filters and ferrite cores for the installation ............................... 9-6

Chapter 10 UL Instruction ................................................................................................... 10-1

10-1 Registration format .................................................................................................... 10-1
10-2 Indication ................................................................................................................... 10-1
10-3 Matters to observe ..................................................................................................... 10-1

Appendix 1 Type Description System ............................................................................... A-1

2 Outline Dimension Drawings ......................................................................... A-10
3 Fault Codes ...................................................................................................... A-14
4 7-segment LED Display .................................................................................. A-16

ii
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the “Meiden AC Speed Control Equipment HYFREC-VT230SE”.
THYFREC-VT230SE is a highly functional inverter that is easy to use.
Please read this manual thoroughly before use, and keep the manual at hand for later
reference. Also make sure that this manual is delivered to the final users.

WARNING
ALWAYS READ THIS MANUAL THOROUGHLY BEFORE USING THE VT230SE.

THIS INVERTER CONTAINS HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUITS THAT MAY BE FATAL TO HUMANS. USE
EXTREME CAUTION DURING INSTALLATION. MAINTENANCE MUST BE PERFORMED BY
QUALIFIED TECHNICIANS, AND ALL POWER SOURCES MUST BE DISCONNECTED BEFORE ANY
MAINTENANCE. SUFFICIENT NOTICE MUST BE GIVEN TO THE GENERAL OPERATORS AND
WORKERS BEFORE STARTING.

• ELECTRIC SHOCK MAY OCCUR IF THE FOLLOWING POINTS ARE NOT OBSERVED.
(1) DO NOT OPEN THE FRONT COVER WHILE THE POWER IS ON.
(2) A CHARGE STILL REMAINS IN THE INVERTER WHILE THE INDICATOR IS LIT EVEN IF THE
POWER HAS BEEN TURNED OFF. DO NOT OPEN THE FRONT COVER IN THIS CASE. WAIT
AT LEAST 20 MINUTES AFTER THE INDICATOR GOES OUT.
(3) DO NOT CONTACT THE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT WHILE THE "CHARGE" LED ON THE UNIT IS
LIT. PERFORM SERVICING, ETC., AFTER WAITING AT LEAST 20 MINUTES AFTER THE
LAMP GOES OUT.
(4) ALWAYS GROUND THE INVERTER CASE. THE GROUNDING METHOD MUST COMPLY WITH
THE LAWS OF THE COUNTRY WHERE THE INVERTER IS BEING INSTALLED.

• THE INVERTER MAY BE DESTROYED BEYOND REPAIR IF THE FOLLOWING POINTS ARE NOT
OBSERVED.
(1) OBSERVE THE INVERTER SPECIFICATIONS.
(2) CONNECT ADEQUATE CABLES TO THE INPUT/OUTPUT TERMINALS.
(3) ALWAYS KEEP THE INVERTER INTAKE/OUTTAKE PORTS CLEAN, AND PROVIDE ENOUGH
VENTILATION.
(4) ALWAYS OBSERVE THE CAUTIONS LISTED IN THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

• THERE MAY BE SOURCES OF NOISE AROUND THIS INVERTER AND MOTOR DRIVEN BY
THIS INVERTER. CONSIDER THE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM, INSTALLATION PLACE AND
WIRING METHOD BEFORE INSTALLATION.
INSTALL THIS INVERTER AWAY FROM DEVICES THAT HANDLE MINUTE SIGNALS, SUCH AS
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT IN PARTICULAR. ALSO SEPARATE THE DEVICES ELECTRICALLY,
AND TAKE SUFFICIENT NOISE MEASURES.

• TAKE SUFFICIENT SAFETY MEASURES WHEN USING THIS INVERTER FOR PASSENGER
TRANSPORTATION, SUCH AS IN LIFTS (ELEVATORS).

• LONGEVITY MIGHT BECOME REMARKABLY SHORT BY THE TEMPERATURE CHANGE’S

BY THE CURRENT OF THE REPETITION ALWAYS JOINING IN THE POWER DEVICE WHEN
USED BY THE USAGE WITH HIGH REPETITION FREQUENCY OF DRIVING AND THE STOP
(ELEVATOR AND CRANE,ETC.).
WHEN USED BY SUCH A USAGE, DIRATING (FRAME RAISING OF THE INVERTER,CURRENT
DECREASE WHEN STARTING AND STOPPING, AND DECREASE OF THE CAREER FREQUENCY)
IS NEEDED.
PLEASE INQUIRE SEPARATELY ABOUT DETAILS.

iii
 PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY

Items to be observed to prevent physical damage or property damage and to ensure safe use of this product
are noted on the product and in this instruction manual.

● Please read this instruction manual and enclosed documents before starting operation to ensure correct
usage. Thoroughly understand the device, safety information and precautions before starting operation.
After reading, always store this manual where it can be accessed easily.

● The safety precautions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION" in this instruction manual.

: When a dangerous situation may occur if handling is mistaken leading

! DANGER to fatal or major injuries.

: When a dangerous situation may occur if handling is mistaken leading

CAUTION to medium or minor injuries, or physical damage.

Note that some items described as CAUTION may lead to major results depending on the
situation. In any case, important information that must be observed is described.

● This instruction manual is written on the premise that the user has an understanding of the inverter.
Installation, operation, maintenance and inspection of this product must be done by a qualified person.
Even qualified persons must undergo periodic training.

Qualified refers to satisfying the following conditions.

○ The person has thoroughly read and understood this instruction manual.
○ The person is well versed in the installation, operation, maintenance and inspection of this product, and
understands the possible dangers.
○ The person is informed on matters related to starting, stopping, installation, locks and tag displays, and
has been trained in the operation and remedies.
○ The person has been trained on the maintenance, inspection and repairs of this product.
○ The person has been trained on protective tools used to ensure safety.

iv
1. Transportation and installation

CAUTION
• Always transport the product with an appropriate amount according to the products weight.
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries.
• Install the inverter, dynamic braking unit and resistor, and other peripheral devices on
non-combustible material such as metal.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.
• Do not place the product near inflammable items.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.
• Do not hold the front cover while transporting the product.
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries from dropping.
• Do not let conductive materials such as screws or metal pieces and inflammable materials such as oil
enter the product.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.
• Install the product in a place that can withstand the weight of the product, and follow the instruction
manual.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries from dropping.
• Do not install and operate an inverter that is damaged or that is missing parts.
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries.
• Always observe the conditions described in the instruction manual for the installation environment.
Failure to observe this could lead to faults.

2. Wiring

! DANGER

• Always turn the device's input power OFF before starting wiring.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks or fires.
• Carry out grounding that complies with the standards of the country where the inverter is being
installed.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks or fires.
• When using the PM motor, even if the inverter is stopped, the voltage will be generated at the output
terminal (U, V, W) during rotation. Always carry out wiring while the motor is stopped.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks or injuries.
• Wiring must always be done by a qualified electrician.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks or fires.
• Always install the device before starting wiring.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks or injuries.
• Prepare a breaker such as an MCCB or fuses that matches the capacity for the inverter's power supply
side.
Failure to do so could lead to fires.

CAUTION
• Do not connect an AC power supply to the output terminals (U, V, W).
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries or fires.
• Confirm that the product's rated voltage and frequency match the power supply voltage and frequency.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries or fires.
• Install an overheating protection device on the dynamic braking resistor, and shut off the power with
this fault signal.
Failure to do so could lead to fires in the event of abnormal overheating.
• Do not directly connect a resistor to the DC terminals (between L+1, L+2, and L–).
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.
• Tighten the terminal screws with the designated tightening torque.
Failure to do so could lead to fires.
• Correct connect the output side (U, V, W).
Failure to do so could cause the motor to rotate in reverse and the machine to be damaged.
• Always correctly connect when using the encoder.
The signal polarity specifications differ according to the encoder. If the specifications differ from the
VT230SE standard specifications (refer to section 6-9-1), adjust the signal polarity with the signal
setting (C50, C51).
Failure to observe this could lead to reverse rotation or abnormal acceleration of the motor, and to
injuries or machine damage.

v
3. Operation

! DANGER

• Always install the front cover before turning the input power ON. Never remove the cover while the
power is ON. There are sections in the front PCB that are charged with high voltages.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
• Never touch the switches with wet hands.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
• Never touch the inverter’s terminals while the inverter power is ON even if the operation is stopped.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
• Selection of the retry function could lead to unexpected restarting when a fault occurs. The machine
may start suddenly if the power is turned ON when the automatic start function is selected. Do not
go near the machine.
(Design the machine so that physical safety can be ensured even if the machine restarts.)
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.
• The machine may not stop when a stop command is issued if the deceleration stop function is
selected and the overvoltage/overcurrent limit function is activated. Prepare a separate emergency
stop switch.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.
• The unit will not suddenly restart even if the alarm is reset with the operation signal input, however,
in order to prevent unexpected operation, ensure that the operation signal is no longer being input,
and reset the alarm.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.

CAUTION
• The heat sink and dynamic braking resistor are heated to high temperatures, so never touch them.
Failure to observe this could lead to burns.
• Do not block the inverter’s ventilation holes.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.
• The inverter operation can easily be set from low speeds to high speeds, so confirm that the
operation is within the tolerable range for the motor or machine before making settings.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.
• Prepare holding brakes when necessary. Holding is not possible with the inverter’s brake functions.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.
• Confirm the operation of the motor as a single unit before operating the machine.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries or machine damage due to unforeseen movements.
Always prepare a safety backup device so that the machine is not placed in a hazardous situation
when an error occurs in the inverter.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries or machine damage or fires.
• Please do not detach the operation panel while the inverter power is ON. Please detach the
operation panel in the state of power supply OFF. When the operation panel is installed while the
inverter power is ON , the microcomputer of the inverter is occasionally reset.

vi
4. Maintenance, inspection and part replacement

! DANGER

• Always wait at least 20 minutes after turning the input power OFF before starting inspections.
Wait at least 20 minutes after turning the input power OFF before starting work. Make sure that the
displays on the operation panel have gone out before removing the front cover.
Remove the front cover, and confirm that the "CHARGE" LED on the unit has gone out. Also check
that the voltage between terminals L+1 or L+2 and L– is 15V or less before starting the inspections.
(Check with the "CHARGE" LED if the unit is not provided with the L– terminal.)
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
• Maintenance, inspections and part replacement must be done by a designated person.
(Remove all metal accessories such as watches, bracelets, etc., before starting the work.)
(Always use an insulation measure tool.)
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks and injuries.
• Always turn the power OFF before inspecting the motor or machine. A potential is applied on the motor
terminal even when the motor is stopped.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks and injuries.
• Do not use parts other than those designated for the replacement parts.
Contact your inverter dealer for replacement parts.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.

CAUTION
• Vacuum the inverter with a vacuum cleaner to clean it. Do not use water or organic solvents.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires or damage.

5. Others

! DANGER

• Never modify the product.

Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks or injuries.

CAUTION

• Dispose of this product as industrial waste.

vii
<Names of each part>

Cooling fan installation case

Cooling fan
Cooling fan connection
Heat sink connector
"CHARGE" LED (011H to 018H, 011L, 015L)

Control circuit terminal block

Rating nameplate, left side Main body case
"CHARGE" LED (0P4L/H to 7P5H/L) Operation panel
connection connector

Front cover

Main circuit terminal block

Main circuit cable lead-in hole
Control circuit cable lead-in hole
PL label
Operation panel

For 015L, 018H and smaller

The presence and quantity of cooling fans will differ according to the capacity.

"CHARGE" LED (037H, 045H, 030L, 037L)

Heat sink
Operation panel
connection connector
Control circuit
terminal block
Rating nameplate,
left side
"CHARGE" LED (022H, 030H, 018L, 022L)
Front cover

Main circuit
terminal block
Cooling fan

Cooling fan
connection
connector
Operation panel
PL label

For 018L ~ 037L, 022H ~ 045H

viii
 Heat sink Suspension hole

Operation panel
connection connector

Control circuit
terminal block "CHARGE" LED
(045L, 055H∼090H)

"CHARGE" LED
Front cover (055L∼, 110H∼)

Main
circuit
terminal
block
Cooling fan

Operation panel

PL label

For 045L and larger, 055H and larger

ix
 1. Delivery Inspection and Storage

Chapter 1 Delivery Inspection and Storage

1-1 Delivery inspection and storage
(1) Remove the inverter from the packaging, and check the details on the rating nameplate to confirm
that the inverter is as ordered. The rating nameplate is on the left side of the unit.
(2) Confirm that the product has not been damaged.
(3) If the inverter is not to be used for a while after purchasing, store it in a place with no humidity or
vibration in the packaged state.
(4) Always inspect the inverter before using after storing for a long period. (Refer to 8-1.)

1-2 Details of rating nameplate and type display method

(1) The following details are listed on the rating nameplate.

-2P2HBVR0X000
380-480
CT: 5.4A /VT: 8.6A
380-480
CT: 5.5A /VT: 8.6A
0A1234A 1

(Note 1) Refer to Chapter 10 for details on UL Instruction.

(2) Using the above type as an example, the type is displayed as follows:

VT230SE 2P2H A VR0 X000

Input voltage and capacity Meidensha control No.

(Refer to Appendix 1)

Indicates the control PCB option.

(Refer to Table 7-1.)

Indicates main circuit options

A : Standard (no options)
B : With dynamic braking
resistor
(Applied only ~ 7P5H/L)
(Option. Refer to 7-3.)

1–1
 2. Installation and Wiring

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

CAUTION
• Always transport the product with an appropriate amount according to the products weight.
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries.
• Install the inverter, dynamic braking unit and resistor, and other peripheral devices on
non-combustible material such as metal.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.
• Do not place the product near inflammable items.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.
• Do not hold the front cover while transporting the product.
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries from dropping.
• Do not let conductive materials such as screws or metal pieces and inflammable materials such as oil
enter the product.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.
• Install the product in a place that can withstand the weight of the product, and follow the instruction
manual.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries from dropping.
• Do not install and operate an inverter that is damaged or that is missing parts.
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries.
• Always observe the conditions described in the instruction manual for the installation environment.
Failure to observe this could lead to faults.

2-1 Installation environment

Observe the following points when installing the inverter.
(1) Install the inverter vertically so that the cable lead-in
holes face downward.
(2) Make sure that the ambient temperature is
–10°C to 50°C. (Refer to Appendix 1.)
(3) Avoid installation in the following environment.
• Places subject to direct sunlight
• Places with oil mist, dust or cotton lint, or subject
to salty winds
• Places with corrosive gas, explosive gas or high
humidity levels
• Places near vibration sources such as dollies or
press machines Flammable
• Places made of flammable materials such as gas

wood, or places that are not heat resistant

(4) Ensure ventilation space around the inverter. (Refer
to Fig. 2-1.)
200mm

200mm

VT230SE VT230SE
50mm 50mm 50mm 50mm
150mm

200mm

For 015L, 018H and smaller For 018L, 022H and larger
Fig. 2-1
2–1
 2. Installation and Wiring

2-2 Installation and wiring method

Installation and wiring for the 015L and 018H and
below, and the wiring for the 018L and 022H and
above are carried out with the front cover removed.
Before removing the front cover, always remove the
operation panel from the unit. If the front cover is
removed without removing the operation panel, the
unit could drop off the operation panel and be
damaged. To remove the operation panel, press in Latches
the left and right latches inward and pull off the
panel as shown on the right. When completed with
the installation and wiring work, install the front
cover, and then install the operation panel. At that
time, make sure that the latches on the left and
right of the operation panel are securely caught.

(1) 015L, 018H and smaller (Fig. 2-2) (2) 018L, 022H and larger (Fig. 2-3)
Fix the VT230SE at four places when Fix the VT230SE at four places when
install-ing. The lower two installation install-ing. The VT230SE mass is more than
sections are notched. 25kg, so installation by two workers is
Remove the front cover, and wire to the recommended.
main circuit and control terminal block. Wire in the same manner as step (1).

VT230SE installation bolt

VT230SE installation bolt (total 4 bolts)
(total 4 bolts)

Fig. 2-2 Fig. 2-3

2–2
 2. Installation and Wiring

2-3 Precautions for power supply and motor wiring

! DANGER

• Always turn the device's input power OFF before starting wiring.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks or fires.
• Carry out grounding that complies with the standards of the country where the inverter is being
installed.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks or fires.
• When using the PM motor, even if the inverter is stopped, the voltage will be generated at the output
terminal (U, V, W) during rotation. Always carry out wiring while the motor is stopped.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks or injuries.
• Wiring must always be done by a qualified electrician.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks or fires.
• Always install the device before starting wiring.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks or injuries.
• Prepare a breaker such as an MCCB or fuses that matches the capacity for the inverter's power supply
side.
Failure to do so could lead to fires.

CAUTION
• Do not connect an AC power supply to the output terminals (U, V, W).
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries or fires.
• Confirm that the product's rated voltage and frequency match the power supply voltage and frequency.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries or fires.
• Install an overheating protection device on the dynamic braking resistor, and shut off the power with an
error signal.
Failure to do so could lead to fires in the event of abnormal overheating.
• Do not directly connect a resistor to the DC terminals (between L+1, L+2 and L–).
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.
• Tighten the terminal screws with the designated tightening torque.
Failure to do so could lead to fires.
• Correct connect the output side (U, V, W).
Failure to do so could cause the motor to rotate in reverse and the machine to be damaged.
• Always correctly connect when using the encoder.
The signal polarity specifications differ according to the encoder. If the specifications differ from the
VT230SE standard specifications (refer to section 6-9-1), adjust the signal polarity with the signal
setting (C50, C51).
Failure to observe this could lead to reverse rotation or abnormal acceleration of the motor, and to
injuries or machine damage.

Refer to Fig. 2-4 and wire the main circuits for the power supply and motor, etc.
Always observe the following precautions for wiring.

CAUTION

There is a risk of electric shocks.

The VT230SE has a built-in electrolytic capacitor, so a charge will remain even when the inverter
power is turned OFF. Always observe the following times before carrying out wiring work.
• Wait at least 20 minutes after turning the power OFF before starting work. Make sure that the
displays on the operation panel have gone out before removing the cover.
• After removing the cover, confirm that the "CHARGE" LED in the unit has gone out. Also check that
the voltage between terminals L+1 or L+2 and L– is 15V or less before starting the inspections.
(Check with the "CHARGE" LED if the unit is not provided with the L– terminal.)
2–3
 2. Installation and Wiring

(a) 7P5L, 7P5H and smaller

(Note 13) (Note 12)
DCL 76D DB resistor

(Note 11)
(Note 5) MCCB MC ACL Noise filter L+1 L+2 B
Power supply (Note 3) (Note 6) (Note 7)
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 8) (Note 10)
(Note 6) 1 4 L1 VT230SE U
2 5 L2 V M
(Note 2)
3 6 L3 W (Note 9)
E E
(Note 9)
(Note 7)

(b) 011L ~ 075L, 011H ~ 045H

(Note 12)

DCL DB resistor

(Note 11) P DB (Note 13)

(Note 5)
N
MCCB
Power supply MC ACL Noise filter DB unit
(Note 7) L+1 L+2 L−
(Note 3) (Note 6)
(Note 6) (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 8) (Note 10)
1 4 L1 U
2 5 L2
VT230SE V M
3 6 L3 W (Note 9)
E E
(Note 9)
(Note 7)

(c) 055H ~ 315H

(Note 12)
DCL DB resistor

(Note 11) P DB (Note 13)

(Note 5)
N
MCCB
Power supply MC ACL Noise filter DB unit
(Note 7) L+1 L+2 L−
(Note 3) (Note 6)
(Note 6) (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 8) (Note 10)
1 4 L1 U
2 5 L2 VT230SE V M
3 6 L3 W (Note 9)
E E
(Note 9)
415 ∼ 480V 1 (Note 7)
380 ∼ 400V 2
(Note 4) 3
4 TBA

Fig. 2-4 Example of main circuit wiring

2–4
 2. Installation and Wiring

(d) 370H ~ 660H

This capacity is supplied to the standard conversion unit, reverse conversion units A and B, and
the output interphase reactor using a dedicated cable. Wiring (Note 15) between each unit should
be performed by the customer.

Standard
Conversion
unit
Control wiring1 (Note 15)

Power supply ACL Noise filter

(Note 5) MC (Note 7) TBDA L+1A L+2A
MCCB (Note 3) (Note 6) TBDC
DCL
(Note 17)
(Note 6) (Note 1)
1 4 L1 L+ L+A UA
(Note 11) (Note 8)
2 5 L2 (Note 1) VT230SE VA
L- L-A Reverse
3 6 L3 WA
conversion
E E A unit
(Note 9) (Note 4)
1 (Note 7) Output
415∼480V
2 interphase
380∼400V O1
3 reactor
DB resistor 4 TBAA TBCA O
O1
(Note 10)

Control wiring 2
P DB
(Note 12)
N O2 O
(Note 13) Ｍ
DB unit (Note 15) O1

O2 O (Note 9)
(Note 16) L+1B L+2B TBCB
DB resistor
(Note 1)
L+B UB (Note 8)
P DB VT230SE VB O2
(Note 12) L-B Reverse
N WB
(Note 13) conversion
DB unit
B unit

1 (Note 7)
415∼480V
2
380∼400V
3
(Note 4)
4 TBAB

Fig. 2-4 Example of main circuit wiring (continued)

(Note 1) Inverter input/output terminals

The inverter input terminals are L1, L2 and L3. The output terminals to the motor are U, V
and W. Do not connect the power supply to the U, V, W terminals. Incorrect wiring will lead
to inverter damage or fires.
(Note 2) Wire size
Use wires having the wire size or larger shown in Table 2-1 for the main circuit wiring
shown in Fig. 2-5. The applicable wire size range, applicable ring terminal and tightening
torque for the main circuit terminal block are shown in Table 2-1.
The applicable wire in Table 2-1 indicates use with the constant torque. When using with a
variable torque, select the wire given in the column for the inverter type that is one capacity
higher. Note that for the 045H variable torque, the 030L column applies, and for the 037L
variable torque, the 037L column applies.
If 370H or over, refer to the single wiring shown in Table 2-1 for Note 8 and Note 17 wiring.
Refer to the parallel wiring for wiring other than Notes 8 and 17.

2–5
 2. Installation and Wiring

Table 2-1 Applicable wire sizes and terminals

a) Power supply and motor wiring (L1, L2, L3, U, V, W, L+1, L+2, L−)
200V 018L
Inverter type ~2P2L 4P0L 5P5L 7P5L 011L 015L 030L 037L
Series 022L
VT230SE-† 400V 5P5H 037H
~4P0H 011H 015H 018H 022H 030H
Series 7P5H 045H
2
mm 2 3.5 5.5 8 14 22 38 60 100
Applicable wire
AWG 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 1/0 4/0
Max. ring terminal
(mm)
d1 8.5 9.5 12 16.5 22 28.5
d2

d1
d2 4.3 5.3 6.4 8.4 10.5

Terminal screw M4 M5 M6 M8 M10

Tightening torque [N•m] 1.2 2 4.5 9 18

055L
200V Series 045L
Inverter type 075L
VT230SE-† 055H 090H 132H 250H 370H 550H, 660H
400V Series 200H Parallel Single Parallel Single
075H 110H 160H 315H wiring wiring wiring wiring
2
mm 100 150 100×2p 150×2p 200×2p 200×3p 150×2p 200×4p 200×2p
Applicable wire 300
AWG or kcmil 4/0 4/0 300×2p 400×2p 400×3p 300×2p 400×4p 400×2p
(Note 2)
Max. ring terminal
(mm)
d1 28.5 36 28.5 36 44 36 44
d2

d1
d2 10.5 17

Terminal screw M10 M16

Tightening torque [N•m] 28.9 125

(Note 1) 2p refers to two parallel connections.

(Note 2) kcmil unit

b) DB wiring (7P5L, 7P5H and smaller L+2, B) (011L, 011H and larger L+2, L−)
200V 018L
Inverter type ~2P2L 4P0L 5P5L 7P5L 011L 015L 030L 037L
Series 022L
VT230SE-† 400V 5P5H 037H
~4P0H 011H 015H 018H 022H 030H
Series 7P5H 045H
2
mm 2 3.5 5.5 14
Applicable wire
AWG 14 12 10 6

Max. ring terminal

(mm) d1 8.5 9.5 12 15 16
d2

d1
d2 4.3 5.3 6.4 8.4 10.5

Terminal screw M4 M5 M6 M8 M10

Tightening torque [N•m] 1.2 2 4.5 9 18

2–6
 2. Installation and Wiring

b) DB wiring (continued)
200V 055L
045L
Inverter type Series 075L
VT230SE-† 400V 055H 090H 132H 250H
200H
Series 075H 110H 160H 315H
2
mm 14 22
Applicable wire
AWG 6 4

Max. ring terminal

(mm) d1 16 30
d2

d1
d2 10.5 17

Terminal screw M10 M16

Tightening torque [N•m] 28.9 125

(Note 3) Breaker for wiring

Install an MCCB or Fuse and MC on the power supply side of the inverter. Refer to Table
7-2 and select the MCCB or Fuses.
Use a fuse to create a UL compatible unit for 400V Series. (Except 055H and larger)
(Note 4) Rated voltage for auxiliary equipment power supply
For the 400V Series (055H and larger), replace the short bar for the auxiliary equipment
power supply terminal (TBA) according to the rated voltage of the power supply being
used.
For 380 to 400V, short circuit across 2-3 (factory setting state)
For 415 to 480V, short circuit across 1-2

(Note 5) Refer to the appendix 1 for the power supply voltage and frequency, and prepare a power
supply suitable for the unit.

(Note 6) Power supply capacity

Make sure that capacity of the transformer used as the inverter's power supply is within the
following range. (For 4% impedance transformer)
a) Constant torque (045H and smaller) 500kVA or less
b) Constant torque (055H and larger)
Variable torque Capacity that is 10-times or less inverter
capacity
If the above values are exceeded, install an ACL on the inverter's input side.
(Refer to Table 7-2.)
(Note 7) Noise measures
The inverter will generate high harmonic electromagnetic noise, so using the following
noise measures is recommended.
a) Insert a noise filter on the input side of the inverter. Refer to Table 7-2 and select the
noise filter.
b) Keep the wiring length between the noise filter and inverter to 30cm or less for the 0P4L
to 022L, 0P4H to 030H, and 50cm or less for the 030L and larger, 037H and larger.
c) Use a shield cable for the inverter and motor wiring, and connect the screen to the
inverter's terminal and motor grounding terminal.
Furthermore, refer to the single wiring in Table 2-1 for details of the wire size.
d) When using the control circuit wiring explained in Section 2-4 and the main circuit wiring
in this section in parallel, separate the wiring by 30cm or more, or pass each of the
wiring through metal conduits. If the control circuit wiring and main circuit wiring
intersect, make sure that they intersect at a right angle.

2–7
 2. Installation and Wiring

(Note 8) Inverter output

a) Do not insert a power factor improvement capacitor on the output side of the inverter.
b) When inserting a magnetic contactor on the output side of the inverter, prepare a
sequence control circuit so that the magnetic contactor will not open and close when the
inverter runs.
c) Directly connect only the motor to the inverter load, and do not relay through a
transformer, etc.
(Note 9) Grounding
Always ground the inverter unit grounding terminal and the ground. Ground according to
the regulations of the country where the inverter is being used.
(Note 10) Inverter output surge voltage (For 400V series)
As the inverter output cable is lengthened, the surge voltage applied on the motor also
increases. If the wiring between the inverter and motor exceeds 20m, connect a surge
absorber dedicated for the inverter output.
(Note 11) DCL
Always short circuit across L+1 and L+2 when not using the DCL. (Factory setting state)
When connecting the optional DCL, connect it to L+1 and L+2.
Twist the wiring to the DCL, and keep the wiring length to 5m or less.
(Note 12) DB unit
When connecting the optional DB unit, follow Fig. 2-4 (b) (c) and connect the L+2 and L–
for 011L, 011H and larger.
The DB unit and inverter unit will both be damaged if the connection is incorrect.
Twist the wiring to the DB unit, and keep the wiring length to 3m or less.
Refer to Section 7-2 for details.
(Note 13) DBR protection
When using the optional DB unit, use the DB unit's overload detection relay or thermal
relay (76D) to protect the DB resistor and inverter. Refer to section 7-3 for details.
(Note 14) Installation of surge absorber
Install a surge absorber on the magnetic contactor and relay coils installed near the
inverter.
(Note 15) Wiring between control units for parallel units (370H and over).

Control wiring 1 (Between A unit and the standard conversion unit)

Reverse Standard Signal
Remarks
conversion A unit conversion unit name
Terminal block Terminal block
CFLT
TBDA-1 TBDC-1
Twisted pair wiring (prepared by customer)
Terminal block Terminal block
RY0V
TBDA-2 TBDC-2
Terminal block Terminal block
FAN
TBDA-3 TBDC-3
Twisted pair wiring (prepared by customer)
Terminal block Terminal block
RY0V
TBDA-4 TBDC-4

2–8
 2. Installation and Wiring

Control wiring 2 (Between A unit and B unit)

Reverse Standard Signal
Remarks
conversion A unit conversion unit name
Terminal block Terminal block
TMO
TBCA-1 TBCB-1
Twisted pair wiring (prepared by customer)
Terminal block Terminal block
RY0V
TBCA-2 TBCB-2
Terminal block Terminal block
MC
TBCA-3 TBCB-3
Twisted pair wiring (prepared by customer)
Terminal block Terminal block
RY0V
TBCA-4 TBCB-4
Terminal block Terminal block
FAN
TBCA-5 TBCB-5
Twisted pair wiring (prepared by customer)
Terminal block Terminal block
RY0V
TBCA-6 TBCB-6
Terminal block Terminal block
MCB1
TBCA-7 TBCB-7
Twisted pair wiring (prepared by customer)
Terminal block Terminal block
MCB2
TBCA-8 TBCB-8
N71P30171-3435 (accessories, flat cable with
Parallel control P Drive P board shield)
–
board CN16 CN17 Connect the shield terminal to parallel P board
terminal block TB7.
Parallel control P
HCTUB –
board CN8 N71P48442 (accessories, 4 core cable with
Parallel control P shield)
HCTVB – Connect the shield to P board terminal block
board CN9
Parallel control P TB2-5.
HCTWB –
board CN10
Parallel control P board : N62P20996=1† NPTF-CPB6-1† （†：It depends on the inverter capacity.）
Driver P board : N62P20910=30 NPTF-GC64-30

(Note 16) In order to achieve 100% control torque, align 3 DB units in parallel for 550H and 660H. For
370H, align 2 units in parallel as shown in the diagram. Refer to table 7-2 for further details.
(Note 17) Inverter input
Perform the input wiring from the standard conversion unit to reverse conversion units A
and B. Furthermore, refer to the single wiring in Table 2-1 for details of the wire size.

2–9
 2. Installation and Wiring

(a) 0P4L ~ 4P0L (b) 5P5L, 7P5L

0P4H ~ 4P0H 5P5H, 7P5H

DCL DCL
DBR
DBR
Power Power
supply supply
(input) Motor (input) Motor
(output) (output)

(c) 011L, 015L (d) 022H

011H ~ 018H

DCL
DBR Power
supply Motor
DCL (input)
DBR Power (output)
supply
(input) Motor
(output)

(e) 018L ~ 030L (f) 037L

030H ~ 045H

DCL DCL
DBR Power DBR
Power
supply Motor Supply
(input) (output) Motor
（Input）
（Output）

Fig. 2-5 Terminal block layout

2 – 10
 2. Installation and Wiring

(g)
045L 055L
055H 075H Aux. terminal for changeover
(400V Series only)
090H 110H
Main circuit terminal

DCL
DBR

Power supply (Yellow) Motor (White)

(Input) (Output)

TBA 1 2 3 4
(h) Aux. terminal for changeover
(400V Series only)
075L
L1 U L2 V L3 W L– L+1 L+2
132H 160H Main circuit terminal

DCL
DBR
Power supply (Yellow) Motor (White)
(Input) (Output)

Aux. terminal for changeover

Side face (400V Series only)

(i)
Main circuit terminal
200H
Side face

DCL
DBR

Power supply (Yellow) Motor (White)

(Input) (Output)

Fig. 2-5 Terminal block layout (continued)

2 – 11
 2. Installation and Wiring

(j)
TBA 1 2 3 4
250H 315H Aux. terminal for changeover
Side face (400V Series only)

Main circuit terminal

L1 U L2 V L3 W L– L+1 L+2

Side face

DCL
DBR
Power supply (Yellow) Motor (White)
(Input) (Output)

(k)
370H
Common to units A and B
Aux.terminal
Refer to the outline Side face for changeover
diagram in Appendix 11
for details of the standard
conversion unit terminal L-
arrangement. Main circuit
terminal
Side face

DCL

DBR
Power supply(W hite) Motor(W hite)
(Input) （Output）

(l)
550H 660H
Common to units A and B Aux.terminal
for changeover
Refer to the outline Side face

diagram in Appendix 11
for details of the standard
conversion unit terminal Side face
arrangement. Main circuit
terminal

DCL

DBR
Power supply(White) Motor(White)
(Input) (Output)

Fig. 2-5 Terminal block layout (continued)

2 – 12
 2. Installation and Wiring

2-4 Precautions for wiring to the control signal

(1) When wiring (control circuit wiring) to the control terminal block, separate the main circuit wiring
(terminals L1, L2, L3, L+1, L+2, L–, B, U, V, W) and the other drive wires and power wires.
(2) Use a 0.13 to 0.8mm² wire for wiring to the control circuit. The tightening torque must be 0.6N.m.
(3) Use a twisted pair wire or twisted pair shield wire for wiring to the analog signal circuit such as the
setters and meter. (Refer to Fig. 2-6.) Connect the shield wire to the TB2 COM terminal of the
VT230SE.
The wire length must be 30m or less.
(4) The analog output is dedicated for the indicators such as the speedometer and ammeter.
It cannot be used for control signals such as the feedback control.
(5) The length of the sequence input/output contact wire must be 50m or less.
(6) The sequence input can be changed between sink logic and source logic by changing the short
pin (W1). Refer to Table 5-2.
(7) Observe the precautions listed in "Table 5-2 Control input/output circuit".
(8) An example of the control circuit wiring is given in Fig. 2-6.
(9) The layout of the control circuit terminal block is shown in Fig. 2-7, and the functions in Table 5-1.
Terminals with the same terminal symbol are connected internally.
(10) After wiring, always check the mutual wiring.
At this time do not carry out a megger check or buzzer check on the control circuit.
• Are there any wire scraps or foreign matter left around the terminals?
• Are any screws loose?
• Is the wiring correct?
• Is any terminal contacting any other terminal?

P10 750Ω VT230SE

Frequency +15V
3
setting (voltage)
2kΩ /2W FSV AM
Current meter
20kΩ
Analogue Frequency A
setting (current) FSI 0V COM Voltage
input Note 1 0V
Max. DC21mA output
244Ω (0~10V)
AUX
Aux. setting 0V Frequency FM (Load
Max. ±10.5V 85kΩ meter current
F Max. 1mA)
COM
Common 0V Note 1 COM
Note 1 0V
RY24
RY24V
RESET
RA
RY24V Contact output Max. 1A
EMS RY
RC 250VAC or 30VDC
To comply
with UL/CE,
RUN FA use at 30
VAC/DC or
4.7kΩ Standard setting Max. 0.4A 125VAC lower.
PSI1 or 1A 30VDC
(R•RUN) RY FB

Sequence input PSI2 FC

(About 5mA DC per signal) (F•JOG)

PSI3 PSO1
(R•JOG)
Open collector
PSI4 PSOE Max. 30VDC 50mA

PSI5 PSO2

RY0
RY0V Note 2 PSO3

Standard serial CN2 CN4 Operation panel

Fig. 2-6
(Notes)
1. Three COM terminals are internally connected.
2. No connection shall be made between RY0 and COM since this section is insulated.
3. This diagram is an example of the sink logic connection. (Refer to Table 5-2.)

2 – 13
 2. Installation and Wiring

• Control terminal (The terminal block is laid out in two rows.)

Terminal screw size is M3.
TB1 TB2 CN2

RY24 RESET PSI1 PSI2 PSI4 PSO1 PSOE PI0 COM AUX AM FM RC FA

1 1
RUN EMS RYO PSI3 PSI5 PSO2 PSO3 FSV FSI COM COM RA FC FB
2 2
8 1 W4
W1
Fig.2-7
・ Standard serial transmission CN2 （model：RJ-45）
Terminal Terminal
signal signal
No. No.
1 RXD+ 5 0VOP
2 RXD- 6 TXD-
3 TXD+ 7 5VOP
4 0VOP 8 5VOP

(Note) A signal level is based RS-485.The terminus resistance (120Ω) between the terminal No. 1
and 2 can set up on/off in W4.The direction of a signal is based on VT230SE.

・Method of connecting cable (CN2)

１．It works a screw loose.

２．The screw is detached.

４．The cable is connected with CN2. ３．The operation panel stand is inclined.

Please work in the reverse order, and fix the operation panel stand
after connecting the cable.
2 – 14
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

Chapter 3 Test Operation and Adjustment

! DANGER

• Always install the front cover before turning the input power ON. Never remove the cover while the
power is ON. There are sections in the front PCB that are charged with high voltages.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
• Never touch the switches with wet hands.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
• Never touch the inverter’s terminals while the inverter power is ON even if the operation is stopped.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
• Selection of the retry function could lead to unexpected restarting when a fault occurs. The machine
may start suddenly if the power is turned ON when the automatic start function is selected. Do not
go near the machine.
(Design the machine so that physical safety can be ensured even if the machine restarts.)
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.
• The machine may not stop when a stop command is issued if the deceleration stop function is
selected and the overvoltage/overcurrent limit function is activated. Prepare a separate emergency
stop switch.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.
• The unit will not suddenly restart even if the alarm is reset with the operation signal input, however,
in order to prevent unexpected operation, ensure that the operation signal is no longer being input,
and reset the alarm.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.

CAUTION

• The heat sink and resistor are heated to high temperatures, so never touch them.
Failure to observe this could lead to burns.
• Do not block the inverter’s ventilation holes.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.
• The inverter operation can easily be set from low speeds to high speeds, so confirm that the
operation is within the tolerable range for the motor or machine before making settings.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.
• Prepare holding brakes when necessary. Holding is not possible with the inverter’s brake functions.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.
• Confirm the operation of the motor as a single unit before operating the machine.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries or machine damage due to unforeseen movements.
Always prepare a safety backup device so that the machine is not placed in a hazardous situation
when an error occurs in the inverter.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries or machine damage or fires.

3–1
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

The VT230SE has various setting items. Some of these include settings that must be made according to
the power supply and motor before actually starting operation.
The method for confirming the VT230SE basic operation is explained in this section.

3-1 Control selection

Five control modes can be selected for the VT230SE with the Parameter setting C control selection
(C30-0).
Refer to Appendix 1 Control Specifications Table for details.

(1) V/f control (constant torque) (C30-0 = 1) : (Note 1)

V/f control (voltage – frequency rate constant control) is carried out.

(2) V/f control (variable torque) (C30-0 = 2) : (Note 1)

V/f control in respect to a variable torque load, such as a fan or pump, is carried out.

(3) IM speed sensor-less vector control (C30-0 = 3)

Vector control of the IM is carried out without a sensor.
Speed control or torque control can be carried out.

(4) IM speed control with speed sensor (C30-0 = 4) : (Note 2)

Vector control of the IM is carried out with a sensor.
This is used when a high-speed response or torque response is required.

(5) PM motor control (C30-0 = 5) : (Note 3)

Vector control of the PM is carried out. High-efficiency operation in respect to the IM is possible.

(Note 1) Only the parameters required for each control are displayed. For example, when C30-0 = 1, 2
is selected, parameters that can be used only when C30-0 = 3, 4, 5 is selected will not display.
(Note 2) An optional PCB (V23-DN1 or DN2) for IM speed detection is necessary. (Refer to Table 7-1.)
(Note 3) This applies to the Meidensha standard PM motor. An optional PCB (V23-DN3) for PM speed
detection is necessary. (Refer to Table 7-1.)

3-2 Selection of operation mode

The VT230SE operation modes include the Local and Remote Modes. These modes can be changed
with the + keys while the motor is stopped. The selected mode can be confirmed with the
LCL LED on the operation panel. Refer to Section 4-1 for details.

For Local Mode : LCL lights

Operation is carried out from the operation panel.

For Remote Mode : LCL is not lit

Operation is carried out with the terminal block TB1 input terminals.

CAUTION

Make sure that there is no abnormal noise, smoke or odors at this time.
If any abnormality is found, turn the power OFF immediately.

3–2
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

3-3 Flow of test operation

Start
↓
Installation and wiring
↓
Initial power supply
↓ Refer to section 3-4 to 3-5.
Setting of rated items
↓
Automatic Tuning Refer to section 3-6.
Automatic tuning cannot be carried out when using the PM
↓ motor. Set the motor circuit constant from the panel. Refer to
Test operation with section 6-8-1
operation panel Refer to section 3-7.
↓
Setting of parameters
compatible with external
control
↓ Refer to Chapter 5, and perform test operation with the
Test operation including control input/output from the terminal block.
external control
↓
End of test operation

Fig. 3-1 Test operation procedure

CAUTION

1. Check that the wiring is correct.

2. The power supply must always be kept in the tolerable range.
3. Always check that the inverter rating and motor rating match.
4. Always correctly install the front cover before turning the power on.
5. Assign one worker to operate the switches, etc.
6. Refer to the Chapter 6 and observe the precautions when changing the set values such as torque
boost A02-0.

3–3
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

3-4 Preparation for operation

Always confirm the following points before turning ON the power after completing wire.

(1) Remove the coupling and belt coupling the motor and machine, so that the machine can be run as a
single unit.
(2) Confirm that the power supply wire is correctly wired to the input terminals (L1, L2, L3).
(3) When using the 400V Series (055H and larger), confirm that the auxiliary equipment power supply
terminal (TBA) short bar matches the power supply voltage.
For 380 to 400V : Short circuit between 2-3 (factory setting)
For 415 to 460V : Short circuit between 1-2

(4) Make sure that the power supply is within the tolerable range.
(5) Make sure that motor is connected with the correct phase order.
(6) Fix the motor with the specified method.
(7) Make sure that none of the terminal section screws are loose.
(8) Make sure that there is no short circuit state in the terminals caused by wire scraps, etc.
(9) Always correctly install the front cover and outer cover before turning the power ON.
(10) Assign an operator, and make sure that the operator operates the switches.

3-5 Settings of data before operation

(1) Turn ON the MCCB, and then turn ON the inverter power.
All LEDs will light momentarily on the indicator, and then
" ", " " will display before displaying
" ".
The "LCL" and "Hz" LED will also light.

(2) Refer to Section 4-5, and confirm the rating parameters.

3-6 Automatic tuning

Automatic tuning measures the constants of the connected motor, and automatically adjusts the
parameters so that the system is used to the fullest.

VT230SE automatic tuning can be carried out in respect to the following five types of control by using the
parameter setting control selection (C30-0).
V/f control (constant torque) (C30-0 = 1) (Default)
V/f control (variable torque) (C30-0 = 2)
IM speed sensor-less vector control (C30-0 = 3)
IM vector control with speed sensor (C30-0 = 4)
PM motor control (C30-0 = 5)

When perform Automatic tuning, please set Number of retries as 0. （C21-0 = 0）

(Note1) C30-0 is hardware option function setting. If changing, set A05-2 (Parameter skip) to 1(Display)
(Note2) The PM motor control (C30-0=5) automatic tuning function automatically adjusts the phase angle
between the encoder Z phase pulse and the PM motor phase coil, and does not automatically
adjust the motor circuit phase constant.

3–4
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

3-6-1 V/f control (constant torque) (C30-0 = 1),

V/f control (variable torque) (C30-0 = 2) automatic tuning
(1) Automatic tuning
The following two modes can be selected for the V/f control (constant torque) or V/f control (variable
torque) automatic tuning.

Using the Parameter setting B automatic tuning function (B19-0), select the automatic tuning mode to
match the working conditions. (Note 1) (Note 2)

1) B19-0 = 1: Mode 1: V/f control simple adjustment mode (Execution time: approx. 10 seconds)
The basic parameters, such as boost voltage and brake voltage, are adjusted without rotating the
motor.
The following parameters are automatically adjusted by executing Mode 1.

Table 3-6-1
Parameter No. Name
A02-2 Manual torque boost setting
A03-0 DC brake voltage
B02-0, 1 R1: Primary resistance

2) B19-0 = 2: Mode 2: V/f control high-function adjustment mode (Execution time: approx. 1 minute)
The parameters related to the slip compensation and max. torque boost are adjusted while
rotating the motor.
The magnetic saturation characteristics are measured at the voltage boost, and are adjusted to
match the max. torque boost.
The following parameters are automatically adjusted by executing Mode 2.

Table 3-6-2
Parameter No. Name
A02-2 Manual torque boost setting
A03-0 DC brake voltage
B02-0, 1 R1: Primary resistance
A02-5 Slip compensation gain
A02-6 Max. torque boost gain

(Note 1) The automatic tuning function (B19-0) cannot be used in modes other than control
selected with the Parameter setting C control selection (C30-0). In this case, the following
cannot be selected.
B19-0 = 3: Mode 3: Vector control basic adjustment mode
B19-0 = 4: Mode 4: Vector control expanded adjustment mode

(Note 2) If the base frequency of the motor is applied on a motor exceeding 120Hz, select Mode 1
(B19-0 = 1). (Adjust the slip compensation gain and max. torque boost gain manually.)

3–5
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

CAUTION

Precautions for executing V/f control (constant torque) V/f control (variable torque) automatic
tuning
• During automatic tuning, the motor may rotate, so always confirm safety before starting automatic
tuning.
• Separate the motor from the load and machine, etc., and run the motor as a stand alone unit during
automatic tuning.
• Even when Mode 1 is executed, the motor may rotate due to vibration, etc.
If the vibration is large, turn the key immediately to stop operation.

• Always check the safety on the load side before executing automatic tuning, regardless of the Mode
1 or 2 setting.
With Mode 2, the motor will automatically start rotating.
• If the automatic tuning function does not end correctly, always turn the inverter power OFF before
investigating or confirming the operation.
• Automatic tuning can be carried out only in the Local Mode.
• If the motor has an unstable frequency band, automatic tuning may not end normally. In this case,
the maximum torque boost function cannot be used.
• Always ground the motor and inverter.
• If the load is less than 30% and the fluctuation does not occur, automatic tuning can be carried out
with the load and machine connected. However, the performance may not be complete.
• Always carry out automatic tuning before using the maximum torque boost function.
• The contact output FLT will function if the automatic tuning does not end correctly. In equipment that
uses this contact, keep the operation of the related devices in mind.

3–6
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

(2) Automatic tuning operation procedures

Carry out automatic tuning with the following procedures.

Automatic tuning procedures

(1) Preparation

Turn power ON, start

(2) Select control method

C30-0 = 1 or 2

(3) Initialize motor constants

Can the motor

rotate?
Y
N
(4) Input 1 in B19-0, V/f control (4) Input 2 in B19-0, V/f control
simple adjustment mode high-function adjustment mode

"LCL" LED flickers

(5) Start automatic tuning.

Press the or key.

(6) During automatic tuning

execution

(7) Automatic tuning normal (8) Automatic tuning abnormal

completion completion (ATT-n)display

Operation panel "LCL" LED stable light

Automatic tuning end

Fig. 3-2 V/f control (constant torque) and V/f control (variable torque) automatic
tuning procedures

3–7
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

1) Preparation
Separate the motor and load, machine, etc., and confirm the safety on the load side.
2) Selection of control method
• Set A05-2 to 1. (Set the hardware option function display ON.)
• With parameter setting C control selection (C30-0), select one of the following to match the
load conditions
V/f control (constant torque) (C30-0 = 1), or
V/f control (variable torque) (C30-0 = 2)
* The default value is V/f control (constant torque) (C30-0 = 1).
3) Initialization of motor constants
Input the motor rating nameplate value parameters. Automatic tuning will automatically change the
parameters, so it is recommended to write down the values set in Table 3-6-1 or Table 3-6-2.
Table 3-6-3
Parameter No. Name
B00-0 Rated input voltage setting [No.]
B00-1 Max/base frequency simple setting [Hz]
B00-2 Motor rated output [kW]
B00-3 Rated output voltage [V]
B00-4 Max. frequency [Hz]
B00-5 Base frequency [Hz]
B00-6 Motor rated current [A]
B00-7 Carrier frequency [kHz]
* The max. frequency cannot be set below the base frequency, and the base frequency cannot
be set above the max. frequency.
4) Selection of automatic tuning function
• Set A05-0 to 1. (Set the expanded setting display ON.)
• Using the parameter setting B automatic tuning function (B19-0), select the automatic tuning
mode to match the working conditions. Refer to section 3-6-1 (1) for details.
• The automatic tuning standby state will be entered when the key is pressed.
• During the automatic tuning standby state and the automatic tuning execution state, the LCL
LED will flicker.
• To exit the automatic tuning standby state, press the key.
5) Starting automatic tuning

Automatic tuning will start when the key or key is pressed according to the required
rotation direction.
To stop, press the key or input the emergency stop signal (EMS) from the terminal block.

* Keys other than and are disabled during automatic tuning.

6) During automatic tuning execution

The progression state can be confirmed with D22-0.
Refer to section 3-6-4 for details.
7) Normal completion of automatic tuning
When the automatic tuning ends normally, the "LCL" LED will change from a flicker to a stable
light.
Refer to section 3-6-1 (1) for the adjustment items.
8) Abnormal completion of automatic tuning
If the automatic tuning ends abnormally, a message will appear. Investigate and check according
to the error codes.
Refer to section 3-6-4 for details on the error codes.

3–8
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

3-6-2 IM speed sensor-less vector control (C30-0 = 3) and

IM vector control with speedsensor (C30-0 = 4) automatic tuning
(1) Automatic tuning
The following two modes can be selected for the IM speed sensor-less vector control or IM vector
control with speed sensor automatic tuning.

Using the parameter setting B automatic tuning function (B19-0), select the automatic tuning mode to
match the working conditions. (Note 1)

1) B19-0 = 3: Mode 3: Vector control basic adjustment mode (Execution time: approx. 30 seconds)
The basic parameters for vector control are automatically adjusted.
The following parameters are automatically adjusted by executing Mode 3.

Table 3-6-4
Parameter No. Name
B01-9 No-load output voltage
B02-0, 1 R1 : Primary resistance
B02-2, 3 R2’ : Secondary resistance
B02-4, 5 Lσ : Leakage inductance
B02-6, 7 M' : Excitation inductance

2) B19-0 = 4: Mode 4: Vector control extended adjustment mode (Execution time: approx. 1 minute)
This mode is selected to carry out constant output range operation. (Note 2)
The following parameters are automatically adjusted by executing Mode 4.

Table 3-6-5
Parameter No. Name
B01-9 No-load output voltage
B02-0, 1 R1 : Primary resistance
B02-2, 3 R2’ : Secondary resistance
B02-4, 5 Lσ : Leakage inductance
B02-6, 7 M' : Excitation inductance
B34-0 to 7 M variable compensation table

(Note 1) The automatic tuning function (B19-0) cannot be used in modes other than control
selected with the parameter setting C control selection (C30-0). In this case, the following
cannot be selected.
B19-0 = 1: Mode 1: V/f control simple adjustment mode
B19-0 = 2: Mode 2: V/f control high-function adjustment mode

(Note 2) When carrying out constant output operation, the excitation inductance fluctuation must be
compensated.
Assign the operation range to the table reference speed in B33-0 to 7.
Note that the motor will rotate to the max. speed in this case, so take special care to
safety.

3–9
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

CAUTION

Precautions for executing IM speed sensor-less vector control or IM vector control with
speedsensor automatic tuning
• During automatic tuning, the motor may rotate, so always confirm safety before starting automatic
tuning.
• Separate the motor from the load and machine, etc., and run the motor as a stand alone unit during
automatic tuning.
• The motor may vibrate and rotate during automatic tuning.
If the vibration is large, turn the key immediately to stop operation.

• Always check the safety on the load side before executing automatic tuning. The motor will
automatically start rotating during automatic tuning.
• If the automatic tuning function does not end correctly, always turn the inverter power OFF before
investigating or confirming the operation.
• Automatic tuning can be carried out only in the Local Mode.
• Always ground the motor and inverter.
• If the load is less than 10% and the fluctuation does not occur, automatic tuning can be carried out
with the load and machine connected. However, the performance may not be complete.
• In case that the load is higher than 10% or the fluctuation occurs, if R1: Primary resistance, R2’:
Secondary resistance, Lσ : Leakage inductance, M’: Excitation inductance (For the calculations of
R2’, Lσ, M’, refer to section 6-6 B02-0 ~9 : Motor circuit constant) are input from the motor data
and Automatic turning : B19-0 = 5 is carried out, no load voltage is set automatically, so that the
running of vector control can be performed.

• The contact output FLT will function if the automatic tuning does not end correctly. In equipment that
uses this contact, keep the operation of the related devices in mind.

3 – 10
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

(2) Automatic tuning operation procedures

Carry out automatic tuning with the following procedures.

Automatic tuning procedures

(1) Preparation

Turn power ON, start

(2) Select control method

C30-0 = 3 or 4

(3) Initialize motor constants

Constant output
operation
Y
N
(4) Input 3 in B19-0. (4) Input 4 in B19-0.
Vector control basic Vector control expanded
adjustment mode adjustment mode

"LCL" LED flickers

(5) Start automatic tuning.

Press the or key.

(6) During automatic tuning

execution

(7) Automatic tuning normal (8) Automatic tuning abnormal

completion completion (ATT-n)display

Operation panel "LCL" LED stable light

Automatic tuning end

(9) Set and adjust according to * To use vector control, ASR must be manually
system adjusted.

Fig. 3-3 IM speed sensor-less vector control and

IM vector control with speed sensor automatic tuning procedures

3 – 11
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

1) Preparation
Separate the motor and load, machine, etc., and confirm the safety on the load side.

2) Selection of control method

• Set A05-2 to 1. (Set the hardware option function display ON.)
• With parameter setting C control selection (C30-0), select one of the following to match the
load conditions
IM speed sensor-less vector control (C30-0 = 3), or
IM vector control with speed sensor (C30-0 = 4)
* The default value is V/f control (constant torque) (C30-0 = 1).

3) Initialization of motor constants

Input the motor rating nameplate value parameters. Automatic tuning will automatically change the
parameters, so it is recommended to write down the values set in Table 3-6-4 or Table 3-6-5.
Table 3-6-6
Parameter No. Name
B01-0 Rated input voltage setting [No.]
B01-1 Motor rated output [kW]
B01-2 No. of motor poles [Pole]
B01-3 Rated output voltage [V]
B01-4 Max. speed [min−1]
B01-5 Base speed [min−1]
B01-6 Motor rated current [A]
B01-7 Carrier frequency [kHz]
B01-8 No. of encoder pulses [P/R] : (Note 1)
* When carrying out constant output operation, the excitation inductance fluctuation must be
compensated.
Assign the operation range to the table reference speed in B33-0 to 7. When B34-0 to 7 are
set to the default values (100%), B33-0 to 7 will be assigned automatically.
Note that the motor will rotate to the max. speed in this case, so take special care to safety.
* The max. speed cannot be set below the base speed, and the base speed cannot be set
above the max. speed.

(Note 1) Always input when using the speed sensor.

4) Selection of automatic tuning function

• Set A05-0 to 1. (Set the expanded setting display ON.)
• Using the parameter setting B automatic tuning function (B19-0), select the automatic tuning
mode to match the working conditions. Refer to section 3-6-2 (1) for details.
• The automatic tuning standby state will be entered when the key is pressed.
• During the automatic tuning standby state and the automatic tuning execution state, the "LCL"
LED will flicker.
• To exit the automatic tuning standby state, press the key.

5) Starting automatic tuning

Automatic tuning will start when the key or key is pressed according to the required
rotation direction.
To stop, press the key or input the emergency stop signal (EMS) from the terminal block.

* Keys other than and are disabled during automatic tuning.

3 – 12
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

6) During automatic tuning execution

The progression state can be confirmed with D22-0.
Refer to section 3-6-4 for details.

7) Normal completion of automatic tuning

When the automatic tuning ends normally, the "LCL" LED will change from a flicker to a stable
light.
Refer to section 3-6-2 (1) for the adjustment items.

8) Abnormal completion of automatic tuning

If the automatic tuning ends abnormally, a message will appear. Investigate and check according
to the error codes.
Refer to section 3-6-4 for details on the error codes.

9) Settings and adjustments to match system

The control parameters are adjusted to match the user's system. The main adjustment
parameters are shown below.
• A10-0: ASR response : Set the speed control response with a [rad/s] unit.
If the speed tracking is slow, increase this value.
Note that if this value is too high, hunting may occur.
• A10-1: Machine time constant 1 : Set the time required to accelerate from zero to the base
speed with the rated torque.
Tm [msec] = 10.97 × J [kgm2] × (N base [min−1])2 / Power [W]
J: Total inertia [kgm2] (=1/4 × GD2/Power [W]
Nbase: Base speed [min−1]
Power: Motor rated output [W]
• A10-2: Cumulative time constant compensation coefficient:
Increase the compensation coefficient if the
overshooting is high during speed control.
• A10-3: ASR drive torque limiter : Increase this value when a drive torque is required.
• A10-4: ASR regenerative torque limiter : Increase this value when a regenerative torque is
required.

10) Adjustment when using IM speed sensor-less vector control

Adjust the following items to use the speed sensor-less vector control at a high accuracy.
• Fine adjustment of primary resistance
In the no-load (only inertia load) state, carry out trial operation at the minimum operation speed
to be used, and finely adjust the primary resistance (B02-0,1). For forward run, adjust so that
ASR output (D11-4) is near zero on the positive side. (Note 1)
Make sure that the ASR output (D11-4) does not reach the negative side during forward run. If
adjusting it on the positive side during forward run, stopping with the regenerative limiter (B31-3, 4,
5, 6) may not be possible in rare case.
(Note 1) The Mantissa section of Primary resistance (B02-0) can be set during run and the
Exponent section of Primary resistance (B20-1) can not be set during run.
• Adjustment of estimated speed integral gain
Confirm that D00-3 (motor speed on % unit) is stable (±1% or less) during trial operation. If not
stable, decrease (to approx. half) the speed estimated proportional gain (B31-1).

3 – 13
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

3-6-3 Encoder Z-IN→U phase coil phase angle (C51-1) automatic tuning [PM motor control]
(1) Automatic tuning
The phase angle between the encoder Z phase pulse and the PM motor U phase coil can be
automatically adjusted when performing PM motor control (C30-0=5). By doing this, phase
adjustment can be omitted when attaching the encoder to the PM motor. Furthermore, even if
adjustment has already been completed, readjustment is recommended in order to further improve
the adjustment accuracy.
B19-0=6: Mode 6: PM motor control encoder phase adjustment mode (takes approx. 7 seconds)
Phase adjustment between the Z phase pulse and the PM motor U phase coil is performed
automatically.
The following parameters are automatically adjusted by executing mode 6.

Table 3-6-7

Parameter No. Name

C51-1 Z-IN→U phase coil phase angle

(Note 1) Only B-19-0=5 can be selected when performing PM motor control (C30-0=5).

CAUTION
Points to note when executing the encoder phase adjustment mode (PM motor control)

• The motor is rotated in the clockwise and counter clockwise directions when performing automatic
tuning, and therefore it is necessary to perform a safety check before commencing.
• When performing automatic tuning, separate from the load and machine etc., and run the motor on
its own.
• There are cases when the motor vibrates when rotating when performing automatic tuning.
If the vibration is significant, press the key to stop the motor immediately.
• Ensure to check the safety at the load side before performing automatic tuning.
The motor starts to rotate automatically when performing automatic tuning.
• Ensure to turn the inverter power OFF when performing inspections or checks in the case where
automatic tuning is not completed successfully.
• Automatic tuning can only be performed in direct operation mode.
• Always ensure to earth the motor and inverter.
• If using a load that results in fluctuations of 10% or less, automatic tuning can be performed with the
load or machine connected, however, there are cases where it not possible to achieve sufficient
performance.
• The contact output FLT operates when an error occurs when performing automatic tuning.
Please pay attention to the operations of related devices at the equipment using these contacts.

3 – 14
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

(2) Automatic tuning operation procedures

Carry out automatic tuning with the following procedures.

Automatic tuning procedures

(1) Preparation

Turn power ON, start

(2) Select control method

C30-0 = 5

(3) Initialize motor constants

(4) Input 6 in B19-0

Encoder phase adjustment
mode

"LCL" LED flickers

(5) Start automatic tuning.

Press the or key.

(6) During automatic tuning

execution

(7) Automatic tuning normal (8) Automatic tuning abnormal

completion completion (ATT-n)
display

Operation panel "LCL" LED stable light

Automatic tuning end

Fig. 3-4 Encoder phase automatic tuning procedure when performing PM motor control

3 – 15
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

1) Preparation
Separate the motor and load, machine, etc., and confirm the safety on the load side.

2) Selection of control method

• Set A05-2 to 1. (Set the hardware option function display ON.)
• Select PM motor control (C30-0=5) at the parameter setting C control selection (C30-0).
* The default value is V/f control (constant torque) (C30-0 = 1).

3) Initialization of motor constants

Input the motor rating nameplate value parameters. Automatic tuning will automatically change the
parameters, so it is recommended to write down the values set in Table 3-6-7.
Table 3-6-8
Parameter No. Name
A20-0 ACR response (PM) [rad/s]
A20-1 ACR constant (PM) [ms]
B01-0 Rated input voltage setting [No.]
B01-1 Motor rated output [kW]
B01-2 No. of motor poles [Pole]
B01-3 Rated output voltage [V]
B01-4 Max. speed [min−1]
B01-5 Base speed [min−1]
B01-6 Motor rated current [A]
B01-7 Carrier frequency [kHz]
B01-8 No. of encoder pulses [P/R]
C50-2 Encoder ABZ signal type selection [Number setting]
C51-0 Encoder UVW signal type selection [Number setting]
C51-2 Z-IN→U phase angle [deg]
* The max. frequency cannot be set below the base frequency, and the base frequency cannot
be set above the max. frequency.

4) Selection of automatic tuning function

• Set A05-0 to 1. (Set the expanded setting display ON.)
• Select Mode 6 using the parameter setting B automatic tuning function (B19-0).
• The automatic tuning standby state will be entered when the key is pressed.
• During the automatic tuning standby state and the automatic tuning execution state, the "LCL"
LED will flicker.
• To exit the automatic tuning standby state, press the key.

5) Starting automatic tuning

Automatic tuning will start when the key or key is pressed according to the required
rotation direction.
To stop, press the key or input the emergency stop signal (EMS) from the terminal block.

* Keys other than and are disabled during automatic tuning.

3 – 16
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

6) Normal completion of automatic tuning

When the automatic tuning ends normally, the "LCL" LED will change from a flicker to a stable
light.
Refer to section 3-6-3 for the adjustment items.

7) Abnormal completion of automatic tuning

If the automatic tuning ends abnormally, a message will appear. Investigate and check according
to the error codes.
Refer to section 3-6-4 for details on the error codes.

3 – 17
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

3-6-4 Automatic tuning error messages

If automatic tuning ends abnormally, the following message will appear. Investigate and confirm the state
following the error code.

–n
Automatic tuning step

No. Cause and remedy

n=1 The motor may not be connected correctly.
Check the connection.
The B00 and B01 parameters may not be set correctly.
Check the parameter setting.
The motor with the special circuit constants may be applied.
Change B19-1and B19-2 parameters.
n=2 The B00 and B01 parameters may not be set correctly.
Check the parameter setting.
n=3 The load and machine may not be separated.
Separate the load and machine.
Lengthen the acceleration time (A01-0).
Lengthen the deceleration time (A01-1).
If the motor vibrates, increase the torque stabilizing gain (B18-2).
n=4 The load and machine may not be separated.
Separate the load and machine.
If the motor vibrates, increase the torque stabilizing gain (B18-2).
n=5 When the motor does not stop
Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (A01-0, A01-1).
When the motor does stop
The B00 and B01 parameters may not be set correctly.
Check the parameter setting.
n=6 The B00 and B01 parameters may not be set correctly.
Check the parameter setting.

3-6-5 Automatic tuning progression state display

Details on the progression state of automatic tuning can be confirmed with the monitor parameter: D22-0
display.

Upper line : Indication of steps required for tuning. (LED light)

Lower line : Indication of completed steps. (LED light)
A flickering LED indicates that the step is currently
being executed.

3 – 18
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

3-7 Test operation with operation panel

The test operation with the operation panel is performed with the following procedure.

CAUTION

Make sure that signals are not input into the RUN, EMS, PSI1 ~ 5 terminals on the sequence input
terminals at this time.

(1) Turn ON the power supply.

All LEDs will light momentarily on the numeral indicator,
and then " ", " " will display before
displaying " ".
The "LCL" and "Hz" LED will also light.
Set 3 (panel fixed) for the speed setting No. of input
selection C02-0. Refer to section 4-5 for details on
changing the parameters.

CAUTION

The motor will run. Confirm the safety around the motor before starting the next step.

(2) Press the key.

The "FWD" LED will light and the display will change from " " to " ". This is because the
local setting frequency (A00-0) is set to 10Hz as the default setting.

CHECK

1. Did the motor run?

2. Is the run direction correct? Check the wiring and operation if abnormal.
3. Is the rotation smooth?

(3) Press the key and confirm that the motor runs in reverse.

(4) Press the key and stop the motor.

(5) Press the key. The motor will forward run at 10Hz.

(6) Press the key once. The display will alternate between " " and " ".

(7) Press the key once.

The display will stop at " ", and the last digit will flicker.
This completes the preparation for changing the output frequency. The digit to change can be moved
with the key. The output frequency can be incremented/decremented with the knob.

3 – 19
 3. Test Operation and Adjustment

(8) Move the digit with the key, and using the knob, raise the frequency to 50Hz. Then,

press the key. The output frequency will rise to 50Hz.

(Note) The operation panel frequency change operation is set to be changed (C11-2=1) in real time at
the factory shipment settings, and therefore the output frequency is changed in real time using
the knob, without having to press the key.

CAUTION

A 10-second acceleration and 20-second deceleration ramp time are set as defaults. The motor will
slowly increase its speed to the set value. Increase the speed by approx. 10Hz at a time with the
knob.

(9) Press the key when the motor speed reaches 50Hz. The display will decrease to 0.00 in 20
seconds. The "FWD" or "REV" LED will flicker for two seconds while the DC-brake is applied and the
motor will stop.

(10) Press the key to test the reverse run.

This completes the test operation with the operation panel.

Refer to Chapter 4 and make the adjustments according to the user application.

3 – 20
 4. Operation Panel

Chapter 4 Operation Panel

注 意

・Please do not detach the operation panel while the inverter power is ON. Please detach the
operation panel in the state of power supply OFF. When the operation panel is installed while
the inverter power is ON , the microcomputer of the inverter is occasionally reset.

4-1 Details of operation panel

The configuration of the operation panel is shown in Fig. 4-1.
Display
Minus polarity (7segment LEDs of 5 digits) Unit Indications
(LED) (LEDs)

Status indication
(LEDs)

Parameter operation
Knob

Parameter operation
Keys Mode Key

Operation Keys

Fig. 4-1

4–1
 4. Operation Panel

The functions of each section are shown in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Functions of operation panel

Status indications LEDs
The drive is running in the When both LEDs flicker simultaneously, it indicates that
FWD (Forward)
forward direction. DC Brake or pre-excitation is in action.
If only the "FWD" or "REV" LED is flickering, this
The drive is running in the
REV (Reverse) reverse direction. indicates that a command in the reverse direction has
been received, and the drive is decelerating.
The drive has detected a fault and has stopped. The drive can be reset from the
FLT (Fault)
Operation Panel (STOP + RST/MOD) or from the terminal block (RESET signal).
The drive is in the Local Mode and can be operated from the Operation Panel (FWD,
REV and STOP only). When LED is off, the drive is in the Remote Mode and can be
LCL (Local) controlled from the terminal block (sequence input signals). To change Modes
between Local and Remote, press + .

Unit indication LEDs

Hz･A･%･min−1 Indicates the unit of the parameter value shown on the display.
Minus polarity indication LED
—— Lights when the number on the display is a minus number.
Operation keys
Starts the drive in the forward direction. (in Local Mode only)

Starts the drive in the reverse direction. (in Local Mode only)

Stops the drive. The motor will either coast to a stop or ramp down to a stop as
selected on C00-1.
Changes control Modes from Local to Remote, or vice-versa. When the drive is in
+
Local Mode, "LCL" LED is on. (Note)
Resets a fault, putting out FLT LED.
+

Parameter operation keys ･ Parameter operation knob

Changes display Modes in the following order.
(Mode)
Monitor → Parameter-A → Parameter-B → Parameter-C → Utility mode-U

Fixes Parameter number or set its values.

Increases Parameter Block.

Increases Parameter Number or its values.
Decreases Parameter Block.
Decreases Parameter Number or its values.
Changes Parameter Block for the desired Parameter. To change to the next
Param.
select Block up, turn first. For the next Block down, turn first.
( )
Valve Moves the cursor to the desired digit for adjustment.
change The cursor is on the flickering digit.

(Note) The drive is default set so that a Local/Remote selection is disabled while the drive is running. Even
while the drive is at a stop, this selection cannot be made if operating commands such as RUN,
JOG, etc., are being received at the terminal. This lock can be released with Parameter C09-2.

4–2
 4. Operation Panel

4-2 Modes and parameters

The parameters used differ according to the control mode (C30-0). The parameters include the V/f
control (constant torque, variable torque) parameters, the IM vector control (sensor-less, with sensor)
and the PM motor control parameters.

These parameters are grouped into Modes and Blocks according to their functions and frequency of
usage.

4-2-1 V/f control (constant torque) mode and V/f control (variable torque) mode
The configuration of the parameters is shown in Fig. 4-2.

Mode

Monitor mode : Monitors (displays) the internal status.

Key Output frequency monitor (d00-0~1, 4~5)

Knob
or Frequency setting monitor (d01-0~1, 5)
Current monitor (d02-0~3, 6)
Voltage monitor (d03-0~3)
Key Sequence status (d04-0~4)
Minor fault monitor (d05-0)
Pattern run monitor (d06-0~1)
Pump operation status (d07-0~4)
monitor
Analog input random scale (d08-0~2)
display
STP operation monitor (d13-0~5)
Extend monitor (d20-0, 2) Fault history reference
Parameter reference,
change
Knob •
Maintenance monitor •
(d21-0~3)
Automatic tuning (d22-0)
Hardware monitor (d30-0~1)

Block-A Parameter
: Parameters changed frequently during the normal usage state.
Mode

Frequency setting (A00-0~1)

Knob Acceleration/deceleration time (A01-0~1)
or Torque boost (A02-0~6)
DC brake (A03-0~1)
Key Custom parameters (A04-0~7)
Block B, C parameter skip (A05-0~2)

(Continued on next page)

Fig. 4-2 (1) Parameter configuration

4–3
 4. Operation Panel

(Continued from previous page)

Block-B Parameter : Parameters changed infrequently during the normal usage

Mode state

Key
Basic function settings
Knob Output rating (B00-0~7)
or
Motor circuit constant (IM) (B02-0~1)
Frequency skip (B05-0~5)
Key Ratio interlock setting (B06-0~3)

Extended function
settings

Acceleration/deceleration time (B10-0~5)

Program frequency setting (B11-0~8)
Automatic torque bias setting (B16-0~C)
V/f Middle Point (B17-0~3)
Over current limit (B18-0~6)
Automatic tuning function (B19-0~2)
Output rating (Auxiliary drive) (B20-0~5)
Frequency setting (Auxiliary drive) (B21-0~1)
Acceleration/deceleration time (Auxiliary drive) (B22-0~5)
Torque boost (Auxiliary drive) (B23-0~1)
DC brake (Auxiliary drive) (B24-0~1)
Over current limit (Auxiliary drive) (B25-0~2)
Power outage deceleration setting (Main) (B26-0~6)
Power outage deceleration setting (Auxiliary drive) (B27-0~4)
Speed control expansion setting (B30-4)

Software option function settings

Software option application (B40-0~1)

Program ramp - acceleration (B41-0~7)
Program ramp - deceleration (B42-0~7)
PID control (B43-0~A)
Multi-pump control (B44-0~5)
Traverse run (B45-0~6)
External brake control (B46-0~5)
Simple ASR control (B47-0~6)
Pattern run (B50-0~B59-3)
Spinning frame operation (B60-0~B76-6)

(Continued on next page)

Fig. 4-2 (2) Parameter configuration

4–4
 4. Operation Panel

(Continued from previous page)

Block-C Parameter : Parameters changed infrequently during the normal usage

Mode state

Key Basic function settings

Knob Control Methods (C00-0~7)
or Start/stop frequency (C01-0~1)
Various setting input selection (C02-0~1)
Sequence input terminal function -1 (C03-0~9)
Key Sequence input terminal function -2 (C04-0~9)
Sequence input terminal function -3 (C05-0~7)
Sequence input terminal function -4 (C06-9~C)
Analog input terminal function (C07-0~5, A)
Automatic start setting (C08-0)
Parameter Protection/Operation Locks (C09-0~4, 6, 7)
Custom parameter register (C10-0~7)
Operation panel mode setting (C11-0~3)
Setting input terminal function (C12-0~5)
Output terminal function (C13-0~5)
Meter output gain, display adjustment (C14-0~7)
Status output detection level (C15-0~4)

Extended function setting

Start Interlock (C20-0~3)
Retry/pick-up (C21-0~3)
Overload setting (C22-0~5)
Start/stop frequency, overload (Auxiliary drive) (C23-0~4)
Speed detection error monitor (C24-1~2)
High-efficiency operation (C25-0~2)
Standard serial (C26-0~3)

Hardware option function setting

Control mode selection (C30-0)
Main circuit option selection (C31-0~1)
PC (parallel) interface (C32-0~2)
Sequence output terminal function (option) (C33-0~1)
Serial interface (C34-0~5)
Profibus interface (C35-0~1)

Utility mode U

Parameter control (U00-0)

(Note) At the default setting, only the basic functions are displayed. The extended function, software
option function, hardware option function parameters are skipped.
Thus, to change these parameters, change parameter A05-0 to 2 (parameter B, C block skip
setting), so that the target parameters are displayed.
Fig. 4-2 (3) Parameter configuration

4–5
 4. Operation Panel

4-2-2 IM speed sensor-less vector control , and IM vector control with speed sensor
The configuration of the parameters is shown in Fig. 4-3.

Mode

Monitor mode : Monitors (displays) the internal status.

Key Motor speed monitor (d00-0~4)

Speed setting monitor (d01-3~5)
Knob
Current monitor (d02-0~6)
or
Voltage monitor (d03-0~3)
Sequence status (d04-0~4)
Key Minor fault monitor (d05-0)
Pattern run monitor (d06-0~1)
Pump operation status monitor (d07-0~4)
Analog input random scale (d08-0~2)
display
Torque setting monitor (d11-0~5)
Slip (d12-0)
STP run monitor (d13-0~5)
Automatic torque bias (d14-0)
Extended monitor (d20-0, 2) Fault history reference
Parameter reference,
change
Knob •
Maintenance monitor (d21-0~3) •
Automatic tuning (d22-0)
Hardware monitor (d30-0~1)

Block-A Parameter : Parameters changed frequently during the normal usage

Mode state.

Speed setting (A00-2~3)

Knob Acceleration/deceleration time (A01-0~1)
or DC brake (A03-1~2)
Custom parameter (A04-0~7)
Key Block B,C parameter skip (A05-0~2)
ASR control constant (A10-0~5)
ACR control constant (A11-0~3)

(Continued on next page)

Fig. 4-3 (1) Parameter configuration

4–6
 4. Operation Panel

(Continued from previous page)

Block-B Parameter : Parameters changed infrequently during the normal usage

Mode state

Key
Basic function settings
Knob
or Output rating (B01-0~9)
Motor circuit constant (IM) (B02-0~9)
Ratio interlock setting (B06-0, 4~6)
Key

Extended function setting

Acceleration/deceleration time (B10-0~5)

Program frequency setting (B11-0~8)
Direct settings (B13-0~7)
ASR dead band setting (B14-0)
Machine time constant setting 2 (B15-0)
Automatic torque bias setting (B16-0~C)
Over current limit (B18-0~6)
Automatic tuning function (B19-0~2)
Output rating (Auxiliary drive) (B20-0~5)
Frequency setting (Auxiliary drive) (B21-0~1)
Acceleration/deceleration time (Auxiliary drive) (B22-0~5)
Torque boost (Auxiliary drive) (B23-0~1)
DC brake (Auxiliary drive) (B24-0~1)
Over current limit (Auxiliary drive) (B25-0~2)
Power outage deceleration setting (Main) (B26-0~6)
Power outage deceleration setting (Auxiliary drive) (B27-0~4)
Speed control extend function (B30-0~8)
Sensor less control function (B31-0~6)
Vector control compensation selection (B32-0~4)
Table reference speed (B33-0~7)
M fluctuation compensation (B34-0~7)

Software option function settings

Software option application (B40-0~1)

Program ramp - acceleration (B41-0~7)
Program ramp - deceleration (B42-0~7)
PID control (B43-0~A)
Multi-pump control (B44-0~5)
Traverse run (B45-0~6)
External brake control (B46-0~5)
Pattern run (B50-0~B59-3)
Spinning frame operation (B60-0~B76-6)

(Continued on next page)

Fig. 4-3 (2) Parameter configuration

4–7
 4. Operation Panel

(Continued from previous page)

: Parameters changed infrequently during the normal usage

Block-C Parameter Mode
state

Key
Basic function settings
Control method (C00-0~7)
Various setting input selection (C02-0~8)
Knob Sequence input terminal function -1 (C03-0~9)
or Sequence input terminal function -2 (C04-0~9)
Sequence input terminal function -3 (C05-0~9)
Sequence input terminal function -4 (C06-0~C)
Key Analog input terminal function (C07-0~A)
Automatic start setting (C08-0)
Parameter protection/Operation Locks (C09-0~7)
Custom parameter register (C10-0~7)
Operation panel mode setting (C11-0~3)
Setting input terminal function (C12-0~5)
Output terminal function (C13-0~5)
Meter output gain, Display adjustment (C14-0~7)
Status output detection level (C15-0~4)

Extend function settings

Start interlock (C20-0~3)
Retry/pick-up (C21-0~3)
Overload setting (C22-0~5)
Start/stop frequency, Overload (Auxiliary drive) (C23-0~4)
Speed detection error monitor (C24-0~6)
High-efficiency operation (C25-0~2)
Standard serial (C26-0~3)

Hardware option function settings

Control mode selection (C30-0)
Main circuit option selection (C31-0~1)
PC (parallel) interface (C32-0~2)
Sequence output terminal function (option) (C33-0~1)
Serial interface (C34-0~5)
Profibus interface (C35-0~1)
Encoder setting (C50-0~2)

Utility mode U

Parameter control (U00-0)

(Note) At the default setting, only the basic functions are displayed. The extended function, software
option function, hardware option function parameters are skipped.
Thus, to change these parameters, change parameter A05-0 to 2 (parameter B, C block skip
setting), so that the target parameters are displayed.
Fig. 4-3 (3) Parameter configuration

4–8
 4. Operation Panel

4-2-3 PM motor control mode

The configuration of the parameters is shown in Fig. 4-4.

Mode

Monitor mode : Monitors (displays) the internal status.

Key Motor speed monitor (d00-0~4)

Speed setting monitor (d01-3~5)
Knob
Current monitor (d02-0~5)
or
Voltage monitor (d03-0~3)
Sequence status (d04-0~4)
Key Minor fault monitor (d05-0)
Pattern run monitor (d06-0~1)
Pump operation status (d07-0~3)
monitor
Torque setting monitor (d11-0~5)
Extended monitor (d20-0, 2) Fault history reference
Parameter reference,
change
Knob •
Maintenance monitor •
(d21-0~3)
Hardware monitor (d30-0~1)

Block-A Parameter : Parameters changed frequently during the normal usage

Mode state.

Speed setting (A00-2~3)

Acceleration/deceleration time (A01-0~1)
Knob DC brake (A03-1~2)
or
Custom parameter (A04-0~7)
Block B, C parameter skip (A05-0~2)
Key ASR control constant (A10-0~5)
ACR control constant (A11-2~3)
ACR control constant (PM) (A20-0~3)

(Continued on next page)

Fig. 4-4 (1) Parameter configuration

4–9
 4. Operation Panel

(Continued from previous page)

Block-B Parameter : Parameters changed infrequently during the normal usage

Mode state

Key
Basic function settings
Knob
or Output rating (B01-0~9)
Motor circuit constant (PM) (B03-0~4)
Ratio interlock setting (B06-0, 4~6)
Key

Extended function setting

Acceleration/deceleration time (B10-0~5)

Program frequency setting (B11-0~8)
Digital setting (B13-0~7)
ASR dead band setting (B14-0)
Machine time constant setting 2 (B15-0)
Automatic torque bias setting (B16-0~C)
Over current limit (B18-0~6)
Automatic tuning function (B19-0)
Output rating (Auxiliary drive) (B20-0~5)
Frequency setting (Auxiliary drive) (B21-0~1)
Acceleration/deceleration time (Auxiliary drive) (B22-0~5)
Torque boost (Auxiliary drive) (B23-0~1)
DC brake (Auxiliary drive) (B24-0~1)
Over current limit (Auxiliary drive) (B25-0~2)
Power outage deceleration setting (Main) (B26-0~6)
Power outage deceleration setting (Auxiliary drive) (B27-0~4)
Speed control extend function (B30-0~8)
Vector control compensation selection (B32-1, 2, 4)
Voltage control constant (PM) (B35-0~5)
Demagnetizing current table (B36-0~4)

Software option function settings

Software option application (B40-0~1)

Program ramp - acceleration (B41-0~7)
Program ramp - deceleration (B42-0~7)
PID control (B43-0~A)
Multi-pump control (B44-0~5)
Traverse run (B45-0~6)
External brake control (B46-0~5)
Pattern run (B50-0~B59-3)
Spinning frame operation (B60-0~B76-6)

(Continued on next page)

Fig. 4-4 (2) Parameter configuration

4 – 10
 4. Operation Panel

(Continued from previous page)

: Parameters changed infrequently during the normal usage

Block-C Parameter Mode
state.

Key
Basic function settings
Control method (C00-0~7)
Various setting input selection (C02-0~8)
Knob
Sequence input terminal function -1 (C03-0~9)
or
Sequence input terminal function -2 (C04-0~9)
Sequence input terminal function -3 (C05-0~7, 9)
Key Sequence input terminal function -4 (C06-0~C)
Analog input terminal function (C07-0~A)
Automatic start setting (C08-0)
Parameter protection/Operation Locks (C09-0~7)
Custom parameter register (C10-0~7)
Operation panel mode setting (C11-0~3)
Setting input terminal function (C12-0~5)
Output terminal function (C13-0~5)
Meter output gain, display adjustment (C14-0~7)
Status output detection level (C15-0~4)

Extend function settings

Start interlock (C20-0~3)
Retry/pick-up (C21-0~3)
Overload setting (C22-0~5)
Start/stop frequency overload (Auxiliary drive) (C23-0~4)
Speed detection error monitor (C24-0~6)
High-efficiency operation (C25-0~2)
Standard serial (C26-0~3)

Hardware option function settings

Control mode selection (C30-0)
Main circuit option selection (C31-0~1)
PC (parallel) interface (C32-0~2)
Sequence output terminal function (option) (C33-0~1)
Serial interface (C34-0~5)
Profibus interface (C35-0~1)
Encoder setting (C50-2)
Encoder setting (PM) (C51-0~3)

Utility mode U

Parameter control (U00-0)

(Note) At the default setting, only the basic functions are displayed. The extended function, software
option function, hardware option function parameters are skipped.
Thus, to change these parameters, change parameter A05-0 to 2 (parameter B, C block skip
setting), so that the target parameters are displayed.
Fig. 4-4 (3) Parameter configuration

4 – 11
 4. Operation Panel

4-3 Changing modes

The modes on the operation panel will change between five modes each time when the key is
pressed.
The monitor mode , are the entries into the Extended Monitor Mode.

dnn-m

Monitor mode Fault history reading

Non-default value
Parameter list

Block-A Block-B Block-C

Parameter Parameter Parameter Utility
mode mode mode mode-U Extended monitor mode
Ann-m Bnn-m Cnn-m Unn-m

Changing modes
Fig. 4-5 Parameter mode changeover

4 – 12
 4. Operation Panel

4-4 Reading parameters in monitor mode

1) Refer to Section 6.1 for the Parameters that can be read in Monitor Mode.
2) The case for the V/f control (constant torque) (C30-0=1) of control section (C30-0) is shown
below.
3) The following is an example for reading the output current as a percentage and then showing the
output frequency as Hz.

＜Keys＞ ＜Display＞ ＜Explanation＞

zHz

(1) : Output frequency

(2) Parameter block changes to block.

(3) Parameter block changes to block.

(4) Parameter number increases.

↓
After one second, the display will show the
(5) z%
output current as a percentage.

(6) Parameter number decreases.

(7) Parameter block number decreases.

(8) Parameter block number decreases again.

↓
After one second, the display will show the
(9) zHz
output frequency as Hz.

4) Press to show the Parameter Number on the display

while monitoring.

5) Press repeatedly to return to from (5) as

shown in the right sequence.

4 – 13
 4. Operation Panel

4-5 Reading and adjusting block-A, B & C parameters

1) Refer to Sections 6-2 to 6-5, for the details of the Block-A, B and C parameters.

2) The case for the V/f control (constant torque) (C30-0=1) of control section (C30-0) is shown
below.

3) The following is an example for changing "maximum output frequency (Fmax) ( )" in
Block-B parameters, and then for changing "DC Breaking Time ( )" in Block-A
parameters.

＜Keys＞ ＜Display＞ ＜Explanation＞

Change the Parameter: B00-4 (maximum output frequency (Fmax) from 50.0 (default value) to 60.0

zHz
(In Monitor Mode)
(1)
Changes to the Block-A Parameter setting Mode.
(2)
Changes to the Block-B Parameter setting Mode.
(3)
Increase the parameter No. from parameter
B00-0 to B00-4.
↓ ↑
The display will alternate between Parameter
Number B00-4 and the present setting value
(4) 50.0.
(Note 2) Enable the value to be changed.
The preset setting value will display.
(5)
Press two times to move the flicker to the
2 times
digit that is to be changed.
(Note: Parameter B00-4 cannot be changed
while the inverter is running.)

(6) Change the flicker digit from 5 to 6.

(7) Fix the data.

↓ ↑ Changing of Parameter B00-4 to 60.0 will be
completed.
The display will alternate between the Parameter
Number B00-4 and the present value.
(Parameter Number Changing Mode.)

4 – 14
 4. Operation Panel

＜Keys＞ ＜Display＞ ＜Explanation＞

Change the parameter A03-1 (DC Breaking Time) from 2.0 (default value) to 3.5.

(In Block-B Parameter Setting Mode)

(8)
Changes to the Block-C Parameter Setting
Mode.
(9)

(10) Changes to the Utility Mode. (For future use)

(11) Changes to the Monitor Mode.

(12) Changes to the Block-A Parameter Setting

Mode.
3 times
(Note 1) Increase the Parameter Block Number from A00
↓ ↑ to A03.
(13) Increase the Parameter Number.

(14) The display will alternate between Parameter

(Note 2) Number A03-1 and the present value 2.0.
Enable the value to be changed.
(15) The preset setting value will display.
Press once to move the flicker to the digit
(16) that is to be changed.

Change the flicker digit from 2 to 3.

(17)
2 times Move the flickering digit to the digit to be
changed
(18)

Change the flicker digit from 0 to 5.

(19)
↓ ↑
Fix the data.
Changing of parameter A03-1 to 3.5 will be
completed.

The display will alternate between the Parameter

Number A03-1 and the present value.
(Parameter Number Changing Mode.)

(Note 1) When the Block Number is changed by , it will change to the next Block Number either

up or down according to , turned immediately before.

(Note 2) If (RUN) displays while the parameter is being set in (4) and (14), the parameter is
one that can only be changed while the inverter is stopped. In this case, stop the motor first,
and then press again.

4 – 15
 4. Operation Panel

4-6 Reading the changed parameters (Non-default value parameter list)

1) The Monitor Parameter d20-2 is the entry into the Block-A, B and C Non-Default Value Parameter
Listing Mode.

2) In this Non-Default Value Parameter Listing Mode, the display will show the Block-A, B and C
Parameters that have different values from their default values. These Parameter values can also
be read and changed in this mode.

3) The case for the V/f control (constant torque) (C30-0=1) of control selection (C30-0) is shown
below.

4) The following is an example for reading C14-0 (FM output gain) and changing its value.
Note that C14-0 is set to default value when the unit is shipped from the factory.
＜Keys＞ ＜Display＞ ＜Explanation＞

(In Block-B Parameter Setting Mode)

(1)
Change to Block-C Parameter Setting Mode.

(2)
Change to the Utility Mode (For future use)

(3) Change to the Monitor Mode.

(4) Increase the Parameter Block Number from d00

to d20.
6 times Increase the parameter number.
↓
Go to d20-2 (Non-Default Value Parameter List
(5) Mode Entry).

(6) After one second, [LST] will display.

Enter the Non-Default Value Parameter List
↓ ↑ Mode.
(7)
The display will alternate between the Parameter
No. of the parameter (A03-1) changed first from
the default value and the present setting value.

The next Non-default Value Parameter Number

↓ ↑
will display. If is turned, the next
Non-Default Value Parameter Number will
(8) increment or decrement and display.

The Parameter C14-0 (FM Output Gain) will

↓ ↑ display.

(9)
Select parameter C14-0.
The setting value change state will be entered.
(Continued on next page)

4 – 16
 4. Operation Panel

(Continued from previous page)

(10)
Change the setting value from 1.03 to 0.99.

(11) This completes changing of the setting value.

↓ ↑

(12)
The next Non-Default Parameter Number will
display.
↓ ↑

(13)
The display will alternate between d. CHG and
d.END to indicate the end of the Non-Default
Value Parameter List.
↓ ↑
If is pressed after this, the Non-Default
Value Parameter List will display again from the
(14) first.

↓ End the Non-Default Value Parameter List Mode.

The Monitor Parameter Selection status will be
entered.
(After one second, [LST] will display.)

4 – 17
 4. Operation Panel

4-7 Customizing block-B, C parameter

1) Block-B, C parameters can be assigned to any Block-A Parameter in the range of A04-0 to A04-7,
and can be read and changed in the Block-A Parameter Setting Mode.

2) To use this function, set parameter No. to be displayed in A04-0 to 7 in parameter C10-0 to 7.

3) The case for the V/f control (constant torque) (C30-0=1) of control selection is shown below.

<Block-A Parameters> <Block-C Parameters>

A00-n C10: Custom Parameter

Frequency setting selection
Parameter
−0
A01-n Number
−1 Setting
Accel/decel time
−2
A02-n −3
Torque Boost −4
•
A03-n
•
DC Brake Read/Change
−7
A04: Custom
Parameters
−0
−1 B10-0
−2 [Acceleration time 2]
−3 B10-1
−4 [Deceleration time 2]
• •
• •
−7 B10-2
•
A05-0 •
Parameter B, C block C14-0
skip •
C15-2
•
•

4 – 18
 4. Operation Panel

4) The following is an example for changing the value of a Custom Parameter.

＜Keys＞ ＜Display＞ ＜Explanation＞

Register parameter B10-0 on Parameter C10-0 (Custom Setting).
(Mode and Parameter Number Change to C10-0)
(1) The display shows Parameter C10-0.
The value 1.99.9 indicates that no Parameter has
↓ ↑ been registered on Parameter C10-0.

(2) Select Parameter Number C10-0.

(3) Set the sub-number of B10-0 to "0".

Each time is pressed, the flickering digit

(4)
will move to the digit to be changed.
Turn the knob key until the high-order digit
(5)
reaches the block No. 10.

(6) Selection of the parameter No. C10-0 is

completed.
↓ ↑
(Note) For parameter C, set as 2.xx.x.

Change parameter B10-0 that has been assigned to A04-0.

(7) Enter the Block-A Parameter Setting Mode.

3 times The Custom Parameter Number A04-0 will

display.

(8) ↓ ↑
The display will alternate between Parameter
Number A04-0 and the value of Parameter
Number B10-0 (Acceleration cushion time 2).
Parameter Number A04-0 is the same value as
that of Parameter Number B10-0.

(9) Parameter B10-0 can be changed now.

(10) Change the value as required.

Store the new value.

(11)
↓ ↑

(Note 1) If the Parameters C10-n values are either 1.99.9 or any other undefined values, Parameters
A04-n will be skipped during Parameter scan.
(Note 2) If all the C10 Parameters are set at 1.99.9. all the A04 Parameter block will be skipped
during Parameter scan.

4 – 19
 4. Operation Panel

4-8 Reading fault history

1) Parameter number d20-0 in the Monitor Mode is an entry into the Fault History Mode.
2) The following is an example in which the Fault History Mode is entered.

＜Keys＞ ＜Display＞ ＜Explanation＞

(1) zHz
(D00-0 will display in the Monitor Mode.)
6 times
Select Monitor Parameter D20-0.

↓ The [ERR] symbol will display after one second.

Select and enter the Fault History Mode.

The fault history number Emm-n and the fault

(2) code will display alternately.
↓ ↑
Scan the contents of the fault buffer using the
key and knob.

(3) End the Fault History Mode and return to the

↓
or Monitor Mode.

3) The Fault History Buffer is configured as shown below.

Change of Fault Fault History Display
Explanation
display sequence number (Example)
Fault 1 E00 Latest Fault Code
(the latest) E01 Secondary Fault Code
E02 zHz Output frequency at the Fault
E03 zA Output current at the Fault
Fault 2 E10
E11 ----- No Secondary Fault
E12 zHz
E13 zA
Fault 3 E20 ----- Indicates that no Fault has been
E21 ----- recorded.
E22 -----
E23 -----
Fault 4 E30 ----- Indicates that no Fault has been
E31 ----- recorded.
E32 -----
E33 -----
4) Set parameter C09-6 to 1 to clear the Fault History Buffer.
5) Refer to the Appendix 3 for details on the fault codes.

4 – 20
 5. Control Input/Output

Chapter 5 Control Input/Output

5-1 Input/output terminal function

The terminal block and input/output functions related to control are as shown in Tables 5-1.

Table 5-1 Terminal block functions (TB1, TB2)

Symbol Name Features
This is a common terminal for relay input signals specified below. The sink/source logic
RY0, RY24 Relay input common
can be changed with W1.
These commands can be arbitrarily led to the input signal circuit in the control PCB
PSI1~PSI5 Programmable input
through relay input selective setting (C03 to C06).
Sequence input

While the VT230SE is stopped, all operational commands are inhibited. If it is ON during
operation, the VT230SE is led into a stopping sequence. As for stopping method, either
EMS Emergency stop
ramp down stop or coast-to-stop is available. It is also possible to output this signal as a
fault (FLT). (C00-4)
A faulty condition is reset. With this signal, a fault status output (FLT LED, FAULT relay
RESET Fault reset
operation) is turned OFF and operation is made possible again.
This is a command for forward run. A command for run/reverse mode or a selfhold mode
RUN Forward run can be selected. This feature is available in the remote operation mode (LCL LED
unlighted). (C00-0)
This is mainly used for setting the frequency (speed) input. A maximum frequency (speed)
FSV Voltage/frequency setting is available at a 10V input. This setting is valid when VFS of the internal relay
setting signal is ON. (C04-1, C07-0=2, C12-0=1)
Analog input

This is mainly used for setting the frequency (speed) input. A maximum frequency (speed)
FSI Current/frequency setting is available at a 20mA input. This setting is valid when IFS of the internal relay
setting signal is ON. (C04-2, C07-1=3, C12-1=1)
This is mainly used for setting the frequency (speed) input. A maximum frequency (speed)
AUX Auxiliary input setting is available at a ±10V input. This setting is valid when AUX of the internal relay
signal is ON. (C04-3, C07-2=4, C12-2=1)
COM Analog input common This is a common terminal for FSV, FSI and AUX signals.
This is a voltage output signal for a frequency meter. In a standard mode, a 10V output is
available at the maximum frequency. This output voltage can be adjusted to 0.2 to 2.0
FM Frequency meter
times 10V. (Max. output is, however, approximately 11 volts.) Internal parameters other
than those of frequency can also be output. (C13-0, C14-0)
Analog output

This is a voltage output signal for ammeter. In standard arrangements, an output of 5V is

available for the rated current. This output voltage adjustment of 0.2 to 2.0 times of 5V is
AM Ammeter
also available.
Internal parameters other than those of current can also be output. (C13-1, C14-1)
COM Analog output common This is a common terminal for a frequency meter and ammeter.
This is a 10V source used when a frequency (speed) setter is connected to the FSV input
P10 FSV source circuit. The frequency (speed) setter to be used should be a variable resistor of 2W and
2kΩ.
This is a contact to be ON during operation or DC braking. Other internal signals can be
RC, RA RUN
output with the C13-2 setting.
These contacts function when a fault occurs (when the FLT lamp is lit). When a fault
FC, FA, FB Fault
Sequence output

occurs, the section FA-FC is closed and the section FB-FC is open.
This is the open collector output that turns ON at READY.
PSO1 READY (1)
Other internal signals can be output with the C13-3 setting.
This is the open collector output that turns ON when the output current reaches the
PSO2 Current detection
setting. (C15-1) Other internal signals can be output with the C13-4 setting.
Frequency (speed) This is the open collector output that turns ON when the output frequency (speed) reaches
PSO3
attainment the setting. (C15-0) Other internal signals can be output with the C13-5 setting.
Open collector output
PSOE These are the common terminals for the PSO1, 2 and 3 signals.
common

5–1
 5. Control Input/Output

5-2 Control input/output circuit

Examples of the control input/output circuit wiring are shown in table 5-2. The precautions must be
observed during wiring.
Table 5-2 Control input/output circuit

Function Example of wirings Precautions

Sequence input (a) Sink logic RY24V (b) Source logic 1. Wiring must not be longer than 50m.
4.7kΩ RY24 2. The allowable leakage current is
RY24V 0.5mA.
5mA
RY0 4.7kΩ 3. Use a minute current contact.
L<50m RY0V L<50m 5mA
4. Do not connect to the analog
1 1 RY0V input/output.
W1
W1 5. The sink/source logic can be changed
2 2
with W1. (1: Sink 2: Source)
Analog input +15V 1. Use 2kΩ/2W rating setter for the
P10 750Ω
and P10 output VR external variable resistor.
FSV
Amp 2. The maximum input rating of FSV is
COM 20kΩ
−0.0 to +10.5V.
2kΩ
2W
0V 3. Use a shielded wire shorter than 30m
20mA FSI for the wiring.
Amp
244Ω 4. For shield connections, open the
mate side, and connect to COM
0V
±10V AUX
Amp
terminal on the VT230SE side.
85kΩ 5. The maximum input rating for FSI is 0
L<30m
to +21mA or 0 to +5.25V.
0V
6. Do not connect to the sequence input.
Analog output 10V FM
Amp
1. Use a 10V full scale meter
1mA (impedance: 10kΩ or higher).
COM
2. The maximum output current is 1mA.
5V
L<30m AM 0V 3. Use a shielded wire shorter than 30m
Amp
for the wiring.
COM 4. For shield connections, open the
0V
mate side, and connect to COM
terminal on the VT230SE side.
Sequence RUN 1. Use within the rated range shown
output RA below. To comply with UL/CE, use at
(Relay output) 30VAC/DC or less.
RUN FLT
RC
250VAC 125VAC
FLT
Rated capacity 1A 0.4A
FA (resistance load) 30VDC 30VDC
1A 1A
FB 250VAC
Max. voltage 250VAC
220VDC
FC
Max. current 1A 1A
Switching 100VA 50VA
capacity 100W 60W
L<50m
2. The wire must be shorter than 50m.
Sequence 1. To drive an L load, such as a coil,
max. 50mA
output PSO1~3 insert the fly wheel diode shown in the
Coil
(Open collector max. 30VDC
drawing.
output) ATN 2. Keep the wiring length to 50m or less.
PSOE
L<50m 3. Use within the following rating range.
30VDC, 50mA

5–2
 5. Control Input/Output

5-3 Programmable sequence input function (PSI)

The sequence signal input contacts include the three types of data sent from the basic PCB terminal
block, the operation panel and the serial communication. The reset signals (RESET) are all input at
logical OR from the input point, and the emergency stop signal (EMS) is input at the logical OR of the
terminal block and serial transmission data.
For the other sequence signals, the input point can be determined with the input point changeover
command (COP) or system parameter settings (J1, J2) from the operation panel.

The standard sequence input of the basic PCB terminal block includes the three fixed function inputs
of forward run, reset and emergency stop. There are also five programmable sequence inputs. For the
programmable input, the function can be selected from Table 5-3 and randomly assigned. By
connecting the relay interface option (type: V23-RY0), extension up to nine channels is possible. The
programmable input terminals are PSI1 to PSI5. When extended, the terminals are PSI1 to PSI9. The
default settings are as shown below.

Default settings
Symbol Setting
PSI1 Reverse run
PSI2 Forward jogging
PSI3 Reverse jogging
PSI4 None
PSI5 None

The fixed input signal functions are given in Table 5-1, and the programmable input signal functions
are given in Table 5-3.

The general control block diagram of the IM speed sensor-less vector control and the IM vector control
with speed sensor is shown in Fig.5-1.

5–3
 Drooping
0 B13-5

Sequence input (Fig. 5-2) DROOP

ON
Sequence output (Fig. 5-5) Power
Terminal Internal supply
block setting
Analog input (Fig. 5-7） Torque ratio 2
setting
(Fig. 5-15)
Analog output (Fig. 5-8)
AT2
Torque ratio
X1 setting slave
AT2･X1 input
d03-0 Converter
Torque setting (Fig. 5-15) section
master output
(D11-0)
Torque ratio 1 DC voltage
d11-0 setting detection
d11-1∼3 (Fig. 5-14) Iron loss d03-2
Dead band resistance
(B14-0) Torque B02-8,9
setting Torque bias 1 Output
(Fig. 5-10) setting 0 power
d01-0,1 d01-4 d01-3 Iron loss calculation d02-2 d03-1,3 d02-4,5
(Fig. 5-11) ωr
d11-4 compensation
ON ASR EXC ACR
Ramp AT1 BT1 Limiter
F/R ＋ ON ACR ON ＋ ＋ 1T + + ON
Speed DCB iq＊
＋ ＋ Gate
setting AT1･X+BT1 × Inverter
(Fig. 5-9) R2 com- output
− DEDB ＋ × pensation + + section
CPASS Load Secondary
CSEL PCTL torque Regenerative resistance d02-3
PI control observer torque limiter
× B02-2,3
Ramp 1
setting
A01-0,1 (Fig. 5-13) d12-0 Heat sink tempe-
rature detection
ON Slip
P control frequency ω1 Vce com-
Ramp 2 ON calculation
Drive torque + + pensation
B10-0,1 limiter setting
ASR (Fig. 5-12) DCB

5–4
response Constant power EXC id＊
(Fig. 5-17) compensation 0 Current
id＊ iq＊ detectiion
HCT
Machine time
constant
Changeover with sequence input (Fig. 5-16) d02-0,1
IM
5. Control Input/Output

＋
Addition point M fluctuation
I0 compensation Flux observer
− & Speed
Estimation PP
Multiplication point
No-load output voltage B01-9 =3
Leakage inductance B02-4,5
d00-0∼3 Exciting inductance B02-6,7
Monitor output
ωr Speed
detection
ASR Automatic Speed Regulator =4
ACR Automatic Current Regulator Control mode Primary resistance B02-0,1
C30-0 Secondary resistance B02-2,3
Leakage inductance B02-4,5
Excitation inductance B02-6,7

Fig. 5-1 Block diagram for IM vector control

 5. Control Input/Output

Table 5-3 Programmable sequence input functions (1)

Connection of PSI1 to PSI9 is possible. Note that PSI6 to PSI9 are options.
The connection is done with data Nos.: C03 to C06

Symbol Name Function

This is a command for reverse run. A command of reverse run mode
R RUN Reverse run
(C00-0=2) is available in the run/reverse mode.
F JOG Forward jogging These are jogging commands. If this signal is ON while RUN is OFF,
operation then conforms to the setting of jogging (A00-1 or 3) made
R JOG Reverse jogging within the control circuit. For stoppage, either ramp down stop or
coast-stop is available.
This is a stop signal generated when the setting is to be the self-hold
mode during the operating mode. The VT230SE stops with this signal
HOLD Hold
turned off. Input of RUN or R RUN can be held with this signal turned
on.
DC brake can be operated with this signal.
BRAKE DC brake In the case of PM motor control, DC excitation takes place. Shaft
torsion will occur according to the load torque.
COP Serial The sequence commands from serial transmission are validated.
transmission By selecting the control changeover method (C00-6), the input point of
selection the auxiliary operation sequence during COP ON can be selected.
COP C00-6 Input point
1 Terminal block input
ON
2 Serial transmission input
For resetting and emergency strop, the terminal block and serial
transmission are both valid regardless of the C00-6 setting.
Accel./decel. ramp performance is switched over. Accel./decel. time 2
(B10-0, 1) is available with ON, and accel./decel. time 1 (A01-0, 1 Note
C SEL Ramp selection
that B22-0,1 is used when the auxiliary drive is selected) is available
with OFF.
Ratio interlock
I PASS Ratio interlock operation is bypassed.
bypass
CPASS Ramp bypass The ramp function is bypassed.
The frequency (speed) setting is carried
VFS Speed setting 1
out with the input selected with C07-0.
The frequency (speed) setting is carried
IFS Speed setting 2 out with the input selected with C07-1. When inputs are entered
The frequency (speed) setting is carried simultaneously, setting is
AUX Speed setting 3 out with the input selected with C07-2. selected in accordance with
Used for multiple setting. Selection of 8 following preference order.
Program steps (PROG0~PROG7) is made with JOG>CFS>PROG>AUX>IF
PROG
function enable S0~S3, SE. S>VFS
Serial The setting from the serial
CFS communication communication option is selected.
setting select
S0 to S3 Program setting When PROG is ON, the program frequency (speed) 0~7 are selected
SE selection (B11-0~7). The BCD/Direct input mode can be selected with B11-8.
Frequency
FUP (speed) The currently selected direct frequency (speed) setting (A00-0, A00-2)
increase or program frequency (speed) setting 0 to 7 (B11-0~7) is increased or
decreased.
Frequency When the ON state continues, the frequency is
FDW (speed) incremented/decremented with the currently valid ramp rate.
decrease

5–5
 5. Control Input/Output

Table 5-3 Programmable sequence input functions (2)

Symbol Name Function

Ratio interlock
BUP
bias increase When IVLM is ON and the BUP, BDW ON state continues, the
Ratio interlock sequential ratio bias will increase/decrease at the currently valid ramp
BDW rate.
bias decrease
Ratio interlock When IVLM turns OFF, the bias increase/decrease value will be
bias increase/ cleared to zero.
IVLM The BUP, BDW operation will be invalidated.
decrease
selection
Auxiliary drive The auxiliary drive setting is validated with this signal. This operation is
AUXDV
selection valid during the inverter stopping.
While this signal is ON, pick-up operation is effected as soon as RUN
PICK Pick-up
or R RUN is ON.
EXC Pre-excitation Pre-excitation operation takes place. Pre-excitation operation refers to
establishing only the flux in the motor without generating toque. If
torque is required immediately from the start of operation, use
pre-excitation operation beforehand to establish the flux in the motor.
ACR ACR ACR operation is selected.
PCTL P Control ASR control is changed from the PI control to the P control.
LIM1 Drive torque The drive torque limiter reduction setting by the analog input or serial
limiter transmission is validated.
changeover
LIM2 Regenerative The regenerative torque limiter reduction setting by the analog input or
torque limiter serial transmission is validated.
changeover
MCH Machine time During ASR operation, ASR gain is changed over.
constant Machine time constant 2 (B15-0) is available with ON, and machine
changeover time constant 1 (A10-1) is available with OFF.
RF0 0 setting The speed setting is changed to 0min–1.
DROOP Drooping Drooping function is validated. (B13-5)
changeover
DEDB Dead band The dead band setting of ASR is validated. (B14-0)
setting
TRQB1 Torque bias The torque bias input 1 is valid.
setting 1
TRQB2 Torque bias The torque bias input 2 is valid.
setting 2
PIDEN PID control The PID control is validated.
selection
PRST STP reset Inputs the pattern operation reset signal when performing spinning
frame operation.
MBRK_ans External brake Inputs an answer in response to the external brake command.
answer
S5 to S7 Digital torque Selects a digital torque bias value (B16-0~5) by inputting.
bias 1 to 3

5–6
 5. Control Input/Output

5-4 Programmable sequence output function (PSO)

As a standard, the sequence outputs include five
channels (1C contact output: one channel, 1a Default values
contact output: one channel, open collector Terminal symbol Setting
output: three channels). Of the five channels, one
FA-FB-FC Fault: Fixed
channel is fixed to the fault output, but the other
RA-RC Run
channels can be set to arbitrarily output the
signals given in Table 5-4. By connecting the PSO1-PSOE Ready (1)
relay or PC interface option (type: V23-RY0, PSO2-PSOE Current detection
V23-PI0), extension up to seven channels is PSO3-PSOE
Frequency (speed)
possible. The programmable output terminals are attainment
RA-RC, PSO1, PSO2 and PSO3 as standard.
When extended, the terminals are RA-RC and
PSO1∼PSO5. The default values are as shown on the right.
The functions of the programmable output signals are given in Table 5-4.

Table 5-4 Programmable sequence output functions

Symbol Name Function
RUN Run This turns ON during running, jogging or
DC braking. C00-7 RUN output
Turning ON or OFF during pre-excitation 1 ON during pre-excitation
can be selected. 2 OFF during pre-excitation

FLT Fault This turns ON during a fault.

MC Charge completed This turns ON when the DC main circuit voltage reaches a voltage higher than the MC
ON level.
RDY1 Ready (1) This turns ON when there is no fault, EMS is not activated, and pre-charging is completed.
RDY2 Ready (2) This turns ON when there is no fault and pre-charging is completed.
LCL Local This turns ON when the operation mode is local (operation from the operation panel).
REV Reverse run V/f: This turns ON while the output frequency is reverse running.
VEC, PM: This turns ON while the motor is reverse running.
IDET Current detection This turns ON when the output current reaches the detection level (C15-1) or higher.
ATN Frequency (speed) This turns ON when the output frequency (speed) reaches the set frequency (speed).
attainment The detection reach width is set with C15-0.
SPD1 Frequency(speed) This turns ON when the output frequency (speed) absolute value reaches a
detection (1) frequency(speed) higher than the speed set with the detection level (C15-2).
SPD2 Frequency(speed) This turns ON when the output frequency (speed) absolute value reaches a
detection (2) frequency(speed) higher than the speed set with the detection level (C15-3).
COP Transmission This turns ON when serial transmission operation is selected.
selection
EC0~EC3 Fault code 0 to F This outputs the fault details with a 4-bit binary code.
EC0 is the low-significant bit, and EC3 is the most significant bit.
Refer to Appendix 3 for details on the fault codes.
ACC Acceleration This turns ON during acceleration.
DCC Deceleration This turns ON during deceleration.
AUXDV Auxiliary drive This turns ON when the auxiliary drive parameter setting is validated by the sequence
selection input AUXDV.
ALM Minor fault This turns ON during a minor fault.
FAN Fan control This turns ON during running, jogging, pre-excitation and DC braking. A three minute off
delay is provided, so even if the above operations turn OFF, this control will not turn OFF
for three minutes. This is used for external fan control.
ASW Automatic start wait When C08-0 is selected and the automatic start function is used, this will turn ON while
waiting for automatic start.
ZSP Zero speed This turns ON when the output frequency (speed) absolute value is below the level set
with zero speed (C15-4).
LL MT PID lower limit output This turns ON when the feedback value exceeds the lower limit value (<B43-4) during
PID control.
ULMT PID upper limit output This turns ON when the feedback exceeds the upper limit value (>B43-3) during PID
control.
Doff-End Doff-End alarm This turns ON only at the point going back the set time (B60-5) from the moment auto
output stoppage is engaged after completing the final step when performing spinning frame
operation.
MBRK External brake output Outputs an external brake command.
DVER Speed deviation error This turns ON during a speed deviation error.
BPF Stoppage This turns ON when the DC voltage is the set value (B26-1) or under.
deceleration output
RDELAY Run delay answer This signal delays(C15-5) the turning OFF of the sequence output RUN.
(Note) "ON" indicates that the contact is closed.
5–7
 5. Control Input/Output

5-5 Sequence input logic

Operation input Sequence signal changover Internal command

Logic LCL RUN

Operation panel
converter JOG
RMT REV
Terminal block Basic operation
RUN F RUN OFF HOLD
R RUN R RUN BRAKE
PSI1∼9 F JOG COP
R JOG COP CSEL
HOLD
BRAKE IPASS
COP PIDEN
CSEL PRST
IPASS CPASS
PIDEN (Set with C00-5)
PRST VFS
J1
CPASS IFS
VFS Auxiliary operation
PSI AUX
IFS
AUX OFF LCL PROG
PROG CFS
CFS RMT S0
S0∼S3 COP S1
SE
FUP S2
ON S3
FDW J2
OFF BUP SE
BDW COP (Set with C00-6)
FUP
IVLM
AUXDV FDW
PICK BUP
EXC BDW
ACR
PCTL IVLM
LIM1,2 AUXDV
MCH PICK
RF0
EXC
DROOP
DEDB ACR
TRQB1,2 PCTL
MBRK_ans LIM1
S5
S6 LIM2
S7 MCH
RF0
F RUN DROOP
R RUN Basic operation DEDB
F JOG
TRQB1
R JOG
Communication TRQB2
option MBRK_ans
HOLD Auxiliary operation
BRAKE S5
S6
S7
Same as

terminal block Operation

panel

RESET RESET
EMS
RESET
EMS EMS

Fig. 5-2 Sequence input logic

5–8
 5. Control Input/Output

5-6 Changing of terminal functions

The programmable input terminals (PSI1 to PSI9) can be connected to arbitrarily internal commands.
The internal state can be connected to the programmable output terminal (RA-RC and PSO1 to
PSO5) to lead in the ON/OFF signals.

5-6-1 Sequence input terminal assignment and monitoring

The parameters can be assigned to the terminal block as shown in Fig. 5-3 according to the
parameter Nos. C03 to C06. Each internal signal can be fixed to ON (set value to 16) or OFF (set
value to 0). Fig. 5-4 shows the case when the ON state of each internal signal is shown on the
d04 monitor. This monitoring is performed with D04-0 to 2. RUN, R RUN, F JOG and R JOG are
displayed with a combination of RUN, REV and JOG converted into an internal command.

CFS
Internal command
Terminal block PROG
Assignment in this range is possible

PSI AUX
C03-0=1
OFF 0 R RUN IFS
C03-1=2
PSI1 1 F JOG VFS
C03-2=3 CPASS
PSI2 2 R JOG
C03-3 IPASS
PSI3 3 HOLD
C03-4 CSEL
PSI4 4 BRAKE
C03-5
PSI5 5 COP
C03-6
PSI6 6 CSEL
C03-7
V23-RY0 PSI7 7 IPASS EMS
C03-8 RESET
Option PSI8 8 PIDEN
C03-9 RUN
PSI9 9 PRST
C04-0 REV
PL0 10 CPASS
C04-1=16 JOG
Programable PL1 11 VFS EXC
C04-2
input PL2 12 IFS BRAKE (D04-0)
C04-3
PL3 13 AUX COP
C04-4
EMS 14 PROG LIM2
C04-5
RUM 15 CFS LIM1
C04-6
ON 16 S0 PCTL
C04-7 ACR
S1
C04-8 PICK
S2
C04-9 AUXDV
S3
C05-0 IVLM
SE BDW
C05-1
FUP
C05-2
FDW
C05-3
BUP
C05-4 S0
BDW
C05-5 S1
IVLM
C05-6 S2
AUXDV
C05-7 S3
PICK SE
C05-8
EXC FUP (D04-1)
C05-9
ACR FDW
C06-0 BUP
PCTL
C06-1
LIM1 S7
C06-2
LIM2 S6
C06-3 S5
MCH
C06-4 PRST
RFO MBRK_ans
C06-5
DROOP
C06-6
DEDB
C06-7
TRQB1
C06-8 MCH
TRQB2
C06-9 RF0
MBRK_ans
C06-A DROOP
S5
C06-B DEDB
S6
C06-C TRQB1 (D04-2)
S7 TRQB2
PIDEN

Fig. 5-3 Assignment of sequence input Fig. 5-4 Sequence input monitor

5–9
 5. Control Input/Output

5-6-2 Sequence output terminal assignment and monitoring

The ON/OFF of the internal signals can be output to the RA-RC and PSO1 to 5-PSO terminals as
shown in Fig. 5-5 with the parameter Nos. C13-2 to 5 and C33-0 to 1. The ON/OFF of each signal
can be monitored as shown in Fig. 5-6. This monitoring is executed with D04-3, 4.

EC3
Internal signal Terminal block EC2
EC1
EC0
RUN 0
Output fixed COP
FLT 1 FA SPD2
MC 2
RDY1 FB SPD1
3
RDY2 ATN
4 FC
LCL 5
REV 6
IDET 7 RA
C13-2=0
ATN 8 RUN
SPD1 9 FLT
RC
SPD2 10 MC
COP 11 C13-3=3
PSO1∼3
RDY1
C13-4=7
EC0 12 C13-5=8 RDY2
EC1 13 LCL
E02 14 PSOE REV
E03 15 IDET
ACC 16 (D04-3)
DCC 17 RDELAY
AUXDV 18 (C33-0) BPF
PSO4
ALM 19 Doff-End
FAN 20 V23-RY0 MBRK
ASW 21 When option DVER
ZSP 22 is mounted ULMT
LLMT 23 (C33-1)
PSO5
ULMT 24
Doff-End 25
MBRK 26 ACC
DVER 27 DCC
BPF 28 AUXDV
(C33-0) PSO4
RDELAY 29 ALM
FAN
V23-PIO
When option ASW
is mounted ZSP
LLMT (D04-4)
(C33-1)
PSO5

Fig. 5-5 Assignment of sequence output Fig. 5-6 Sequence output monitor

5 – 10
 5. Control Input/Output

5-7 Programmable analog input function (PAI)

5-7-1 Types of analog inputs
As a standard, there are three channels for the analog input. Each analog input can be connected to
the internal setting signals shown in Table 5-5 by using the programmable input function.
Table 5-5 Types of internal setting signals assigned to analog input
Setting range (Note1)(Note3)
Signal name
FSV FSI AUX
0~10V −10~10V
Function
4~20mA
0~5V −5~5V
0~20mA
1~5V 1~5V
Speed setting 1 This is the speed setting.
Speed setting 2 −100~100% The + polarity is the forward run setting, and the
Speed setting 3 0~100% – polarity is the reverse run setting.
If the analog input is selected with the speed setting,
0~100% the speed setting can be changed between 1, 2 and
3 with the sequence input (VFS, IFS, AUX).
Ratio interlock −100~100% This is the bias setting for the sequential ratio
bias setting 0~100% operation.
0~100%
Traverse center ( 0~10V ) This is the center frequency setting for traverse
frequency setting 0~5V operation.
0~100% 0~100%
(Note 2)
0~100%
PID feedback ( 0~10V ) This can be used as the feedback input to configure
0~5V a feedback loop. Do not use the programmable
0~100% 0~100% analog output (FM, AM) as the PID feedback signal.
(Note 2)
0~100%
Torque setting This is the torque setting for ACR operation.
−300~300% The + polarity is the forward run direction torque, and
0~300% the – polarity is the reverse run direction torque. The
torque setting can be limited by using the torque
0~300% limiter (A11-2, 3).
Drive torque
limiter reduction
( 0~10V
0~5V
) The drive torque limit (A10-3 or A11-2) is multiplied
using 0V to +10V as 0 to 100%, and the limit value is
setting 0~100% reduced.
0~100%
(Note 2) This function is valid when the drive limiter
changeover (LIM1) is turned ON with the sequence
0~100% input.
Regenerative ( 0~10V ) The regenerative torque limit (A10-4 or A11-3) is
torque limiter 0~5V multiplied using 0V to +10V as 0 to 100%, and the
reduction setting 0~100% limit value is reduced.
0~100%
(Note 2) This function is valid when the regenerative limiter
changeover (LIM2) is turned ON with the sequence
0~100% input.
Torque bias 1 −300~300% This is added to ASR output during ASR operation,
setting 0~300% or to the torque setting during ACR operation.
0~300%
This function is valid when the torque bias 1
0~300% (TRQB1) is turned ON with the sequence function.
Analog torque −100~100% This is the torque bias setting when the auto torque
0~100%
bias setting 0~100% bias selection (B16-0) is analog.
(Note 1) Select each analog input mode with C12-0 to 2.
(Note 2) AUX: The setting is limited to 0% during the −10 to 0V and −5 to 0V input.
(Note 3) Setting range / Resolution FSV:0-10V/12bit, FSI:0~20mA/12bit, −10~+10V/12bit
The resolution is reduced according to setting range. Example) FSV:0~5V/11bit.
5 – 11
 5. Control Input/Output

5-7-2 Setting the analog input

The analog input can be assigned to the random internal setting signals given in Table 5-5 by setting
parameter C07-0 to A as shown in Fig. 5-7.
The setting is completed by setting the data corresponding to the analog input (FSV, FSI, AUX) in
C07-0 to A. Set "0" for the internal setting signals that are not to be used.

Panel setting
Internal setting signal A, B
Terminal block
PAI C07-0=3
0% 0 Speed setting 1
C07-1 X Y Speed
Y=AX+B+C
(Note) 100% 1 Speed setting 2 setting
C07-2 C
2 Speed setting 3
FSV
C07-3
Ratio interlock bias setting
FSI 3 C07-4
Traverse center frequency setting
C07-5
AUX 4 PID feedback setting
C07-6=2
PAI1 Torque setting
5
C07-7
Drive torque limiter reduction setting
For future PAI2 6 C07-8
use Regenerative torque limiter reduction setting
PAI3 C07-9
7 Torque bias 1 setting
C07-A
Analog torque bias setting

(Note) The torque setting is 300% when C07-6 is 1.

Fig. 5-7 Analog input assignment

The sequential ratio operation can be carried out in respect to speed settings 1 to 3. (Refer to 6-6,
B06.)

5 – 12
 5. Control Input/Output

5-8 Programmable analog output function (PAO)

5-8-1 Types of analog outputs

As a standard, there are 2 channels for the analog output (10-bit). As shown in Fig. 5-8, internal data
can be assigned to the FM and AM terminals.
The default setting is shown below.

Default settings
Terminal symbol Setting
FM Output frequency
AM Output current (Motor)

5-8-2 Setting the analog output

A following internal data can be output to FM, AM terminals with parameters C13-0 and 1 as shown in
Fig. 5-8. The setting is completed by setting the output data number in C13-0 and 1.
If the gain needs to be adjusted, use C14-0, 1, C40. The data with symbols can be output by setting
an offset voltage at C14-3, 4.

Internal data Terminal block

Output frequency C13-0=0

0 FM
Setting frequency
(Setting speed) 1
C13-1=3
Cushion output 2 AM
Output current (Motor) 3
(C39-0)
Output current (Drive) 4 A01
For future
Output voltage 5 use
(C39-1)
Drive output power 6 A02
DC voltage 7
OLT monitor 8
(motor protection)
Heat sink temperature 9

Motor speed 10

Torque current 11

Excitation current 12

Actual motor rotation 13

speed
14
Namp output
OLT monitor 15
(device protection)

Fig. 5-8 Analog output assignment

5 – 13
 5. Control Input/Output

5-9 Selecting the setting data

5-9-1 Speed setting

(1) Speed setting selection
The nine types of speed setting inputs shown below can be used.
One of the nine types of inputs can be selected by setting a parameter or with the sequence input.
Setting
Setting data Explanation
input point
Analog speed setting 1 This is a setting value issued with an analog input.
Analog Analog speed setting 2
Analog speed setting 3
This is a setting value issued from the host computer with serial
transmission. Setting is possible with the following serial
transmission.
Serial Serial speed setting
• Serial interface option (Type: V23-SL0 required)
• PROFIBUS interface option (Type: V23-SL6 required)
• Standard serial transmission
This is a setting value issued from the host sequencer with parallel
Parallel Parallel speed setting
transmission. A PC interface option (type: V23-PI0) is required.
Panel speed setting This is the setting value issued from the parameter (A00-0, 2).
Panel jogging setting This is a setting value issued from the parameter (A00-1, 3).
Panel This is the traverse pattern operation setting value with parameter
Traverse pattern operation
(B45-0 to 6).
This is the pattern operation setting value with parameter (B50-0
Pattern operation
to B59-3).

(2) Speed setting selection sequence

The relation of the speed setting and changeover sequence is as shown below.
Refer to Section 6-5 B06 (Ratio interlock setting) for details.
Ratio interlock : Changeover with
operation sequence input
Analog speed setting 3
(C07-2) AX+B+C : Changeover with
Ratio interlock operation parameter setting
Analog speed setting 2 AUX
AX+B+C IFS on C02-0
(C07-1) =1 Speed
Ratio interlock operation
VFS on setting
Analog speed setting 1 AX+B+C on off =2
(C07-0) off
off
=3
Ratio interlock operation
Serial/parallel speed
AX+B+C =4
setting
Panel frequency
(speed) setting 0
(A00-0, 2)
PROG. on CFS JOG
Traverse pattern (=4) off off LCL
run frequency (speed) on B40-0 off on
setting (B44-0~6) on on B40-0 C30-0
off off =/ 3 =1,2 off
Program frequency off
=/ 4
(speed) setting
on
(B11-0~7)
=3 on
RF0 = 3,4,5
Panel jogging setting off
(A00-1, 3)
on
Pattern run frequency
(speed) setting
(B50-0~B59-3) 0

Fig. 5-9 Speed setting selection

5 – 14
 5. Control Input/Output

5-9-2 Torque setting

(1) Torque setting selection
The following three types of torque setting inputs can be used.
One of the three types of inputs can be selected by setting a parameter or with the sequence
input.

Setting
Setting data Explanation
input point
Analog Analog torque setting This is a setting value issued from the analog input.
This is a setting value issued from the host computer
with serial transmission. Setting is possible with the
following serial transmission.
Serial Serial torque setting
• Serial interface option (Type: V23-SL0 required)
• PROFIBUS interface option (Type: V23-SL6 required)
• Standard serial transmission
Panel Panel torque setting This is a setting value issued from the parameter (B13-0).

(2) Torque setting selection sequence

The relation of the torque setting and changeover sequence is as shown below.

: Changeover with sequence input

: Changeover with parameter setting

Analog torque
setting (C07-6) Forward run
CFS C02-2
off LCL Torque
off =1 setting
Serial torque
on −1
setting Reverse run
on =2

=3
Panel torque
setting (B13-0)
=4

Fig. 5-10 Torque setting selection

5 – 15
 5. Control Input/Output

5-9-3 Torque bias 1 setting

(1) Torque bias 1 setting selection
The following three types of torque bias 1 setting inputs can be used.
One of the three types of inputs can be selected by setting a parameter or with the sequence
input.

Setting
Setting data Explanation
input point
Analog torque bias 1
Analog This is a setting value issued from the analog input.
setting
This is a setting value issued from the host computer
with serial transmission. Setting is possible with the
Serial torque bias 1 following serial transmission.
Serial
setting • Serial interface option (Type: V23-SL0 required)
• PROFIBUS interface option (Type: V23-SL6 required)
• Standard serial transmission
Panel torque bias 1
Panel This is a setting value issued from the parameter (B13-2).
setting

(2) Torque bias 1 setting selection sequence

The relation of the torque bias 1 setting and changeover sequence is as shown below.
: Changeover with
sequence input

: Changeover with
Analog torque parameter setting
bias 1 setting
(C07-9)
CFS
off LCL TRQB1
C02-4
off =1 on
Serial torque Torque
on
bias 1 setting bias 1
on =2
setting
off
Panel torque
bias 1 setting =3
(B13-2)
=4 0

Fig. 5-11 Torque bias 1 setting selection

5-9-4 Torque limiter setting

(1) Torque limiter reduction setting selection
The torque limiter can be set independently for the drive side and regeneration side in the ASR
mode and ACR mode. The setting parameters are as shown below. If the emergency stop
sequence is valid, the regeneration side limiter value will become the emergency stop limiter
value.
A10-3 : ASR drive torque limiter setting
A10-4 : ASR regenerative torque limiter setting
A10-5 : Emergency stop regenerative torque limiter setting
A11-2 : ACR drive torque limiter setting
A11-3 : ACR regenerative torque limiter setting
For each limiter input, the limiter value can be reduced by external or internal settings. The final
limiter value is the results of multiplying the above panel setting values with the reduction ratio.

5 – 16
 5. Control Input/Output

(1-1) External reduction setting

The limiter reduction setting input from an external source includes the following two types
independently for the drive and regeneration.
One of the two types of inputs can be selected by setting a parameter or with the sequence
input.

Setting
Setting data Explanation
input point
This is a setting value issued with an analog input.
The drive torque limit (A10-3 or A11-2) is multiplied using 0V to
Analog drive torque limiter
+10V as 0 to 100%, and the limit value is reduced.
reduction setting
This function is valid when the drive limiter changeover (LIM1)
is turned ON with the sequence input.
Analog This is a setting value issued with an analog input.
The regenerative torque limit (A10-4, A10-5 or A11-3) is
Analog regenerative torque multiplied using 0V to +10V as 0 to 100%, and the limit value is
limiter reduction setting reduced.
This function is valid when the regenerative limiter changeover
(LIM2) is turned ON with the sequence input.
This is a setting value issued from the host computer with
serial transmission. Setting is possible with the following serial
transmission.
• Serial interface option (Type: V23-SL0 required)
Serial driver torque limiter • PROFIBUS interface option (Type: V23-SL6 required)
reduction setting • Standard serial transmission
The data is set in the range of 0 to 100%, is multiplied with the
drive torque limiter value (A10-3, A11-2), and the limiter value
is reduced. This function is valid when the drive limiter
changeover (LIM1) is turned ON with the sequence input.
Serial This is a setting value issued from the host computer with
serial transmission. Setting is possible with the following serial
transmission.
• Serial interface option (Type: V23-SL0 required)
• PROFIBUS interface option (Type: V23-SL6 required)
Serial regenerative torque
• Standard serial transmission
limiter reduction setting
The data is set in the range of 0 to 100%, is multiplied with the
regenerative torque limiter value (A10-4, A10-5, A11-3), and
the limiter value is reduced.
This function is valid when the regenerative limiter changeover
(LIM2) is turned ON with the sequence input.

(1-2) Internal reduction setting

When the double rating speed ratio setting (B13-4) is changed, the torque limiter reduction
pattern will be generated as shown below, and will be multiplied with the drive torque limiter
value (A10-3 or A11-2) and regenerative torque limiter value (A10-4, A10-5, A11-3).
–1
KDBL (%) × NBASE (min )
–1
NFB (min ) KDBL : B13-4
Double rating speed ratio (%)
: Speed detection (min–1)
Reduction ratio (%)

NFB
NBASE : Base speed (min–1)
NDBL : NBASE × KDBL (min )
–1

–1
Speed (min )
NBASE

5 – 17
 5. Control Input/Output

(2) Torque limiter setting selection sequence

The relation of the torque limiter setting and changeover sequence is as shown below.

: Changeover with
When NFB < NDBL sequence input
100%
: Changeover with
parameter setting
1
KDBL (%) × NBASE (min– ) When NDBL ≤ NFB ≤ NBASE
1
NFB (min– )

When NBASE < NFB

KDBL (%) KDBL : B13-4
Double rating speed ratio (%)
–1
NFB : Speed detection (min )
–1
C02-6 NBASE : Base speed (min )
Analog drive torque =1 NDBL : NBASE×KDBL (min )
–1
limiter reduction
setting (C07-7) =2
CFS
off =3
Serial drive torque
limiter reduction on
setting

ACR drive torque ACR

on LIM1
limiter (A11-2)
on
Drive side
ASR drive torque off torque
limiter (A10-3) limiter
off

Fig. 5-12 Drive torque limiter setting selection

: Changeover with
When NFB < NDBL sequence input
100%
: Changeover with
parameter setting
KDBL (%)×NBASE (min– )
1
When NDBL ≤ NFB ≤ NBASE
1
NFB (min– )

When NBASE < NFB

KDBL (%)

C02-6
Analog regenerative
torque limiter =1
reduction setting
(C07-8) CFS =2
off
=3
Serial regenerative
torque limiter on
reduction setting
EMS LIM2
Emergency stop on
regenerative torque on
limiter (A10-5) off Regenerative
ACR side torque
ACR regenerative on off limiter
torque limiter (A11-3)
ASR regenerative off
torque limiter (A10-4)

Fig. 5-13 Regenerative torque limiter setting selection

5 – 18
 5. Control Input/Output

5-9-5 Torque ratio 1 setting

(1) Torque ratio 1 setting selection
The following two types of torque ratio 1 setting inputs can be used.
One of the two types of inputs can be selected by setting a parameter or with the sequence input.

Setting
Setting data Explanation
input point
This is a setting value issued from the host computer
with serial transmission.
Serial Torque ratio 1 setting
Setting is possible with the PROFIBUS interface option
(Type: V23-SL6 required).
Panel torque ratio 1
Panel This is a setting value issued from the parameter (B13-1).
setting

(2) Torque ratio 1 setting selection sequence

The relation of the torque ratio 1 setting and changeover sequence is as shown below.

: Changeover with sequence input

: Changeover with parameter setting

C02-3
=1
Option Torque ratio 1 setting
Serial torque ratio
1 setting Mounted CFS =2
on LCL
Not
off
mounted
=3
1.000 off
on

Panel torque ratio 1

setting (B13-1)

Fig. 5-14 Torque ratio 1 setting selection

5 – 19
 5. Control Input/Output

5-9-6 Torque ratio 2, torque bias 2 setting

(1) Torque ratio 2 setting selection
The following two types of torque ratio 2 setting inputs can be used.
One of the two types of inputs can be selected by setting a parameter or with the sequence input.

Setting
Setting data Explanation
input point
This is a setting value issued from the host computer
with serial transmission.
Serial Torque ratio 2 setting
Setting is possible with the PROFIBUS interface option
(Type: V23-SL6 required).
Panel torque ratio 2
Panel This is a setting value issued from the parameter (B13-3).
setting

(2) Torque ratio 2 setting selection sequence

The relation of the torque ratio 2 setting and changeover sequence is as shown below.

: Changeover with sequence input

: Changeover with parameter setting

C02-5
Option =1
Serial torque ratio CFS
2 setting Mounted
LCL =2
on
Not off =3
mounted
off Torque ratio 2
0 setting
on

Panel torque ratio 2

setting (B13-3) TRQB2
Serial torque setting on
Torque bias 2
setting
0 off

Fig. 5-15 Torque ratio 2 setting selection

5 – 20
 5. Control Input/Output

5-9-7 Machine time constant setting

(1) Machine time constant setting
The following three types of machine time constant setting inputs can be used.
One of the three types of inputs can be selected by setting a parameter or with the sequence
input.

Setting
Setting data Explanation
input point
This is a setting value issued from the host computer
with serial transmission.
Serial Machine time constant
Setting is possible with the PROFIBUS interface option
(Type: V23-SL6 required).
Panel machine time
This is a setting value issued from the parameter (A10-1).
constant −1
Panel
Panel machine time
This is a setting value issued from the parameter (B15-0).
constant −2

(2) Machine time constant setting and changeover sequence

The relation of the machine time constant setting and changeover sequence is as shown below.

: Changeover with sequence input

: Changeover with parameter setting

C02-8
=1 Machine time
Option constant setting
Serial machine time
constant setting Mounted CFS =2
on LCL
Not off
mounted
=3
off
on

Panel machine time

constant 1 setting MCH
(A10-1) off

on
Panel machine time
constant 2 setting
(B15-0)

Fig. 5-16 Machine time constant setting selection

5 – 21
 5. Control Input/Output

5-9-8 ASR response setting

(1) ASR response setting selection
The following two types of ASR response setting inputs can be used.
One of the two types of inputs can be selected by setting a parameter or with the sequence input.

Setting
Setting data Explanation
input point
This is a setting value issued from the host computer
with serial transmission.
Serial ASR response setting
Setting is possible with the PROFIBUS interface option
(Type: V23-SL6 required).
Panel ASR response
Panel This is a setting value issued from the parameter (A10-0).
setting

(2) ASR response setting and changeover sequence

The relation of the ASR response setting and changeover sequence is as shown below.

: Changeover with sequence

input

: Changeover with parameter

setting

C02-7
=1 ASR response
Option
setting
Serial ASR response Mounted CFS
setting =2
on LCL

Not off
mounted
=3
off
on

Panel ASR response

setting (A10-0)

Fig. 5-17 ASR response setting selection

5 – 22
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Chapter 6 Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-1 Monitor parameters
The monitor mode sequentially displays the frequency, power supply, etc., parameters recognized by
the VT230SE.
The symbols shown at the right of the list show the application of each parameter as shown below.
ST : Indicates parameters that apply for all control modes (C30-0 = 1 to 5) including V/f control
(constant torque, variable torque), sensor-less vector control, vector control with sensor and PM
motor control.
V/f : Indicates parameters that apply for V/f control (constant torque, variable torque) (C30-0 = 1, 2).
VEC : Indicates parameters that apply for IM speed sensor-less vector control and IM speed vector
control with sensor (C30-0 = 3, 4).
PM : Indicates parameters that apply for PM motor control (C30-0 = 5).
Monitor parameters list
Application
No. Parameter Unit Remarks
ST V/f VEC PM
D00 – Output frequency monitor
0 Output frequency in Hz Hz will display when the gate is closed.
displays while the DC brake is in action.
1 Output frequency in % %
is displayed during pick up.
–1 –1
2 Motor speed in min min The forward run direction is displayed with the + polarity, and
the reverse run direction with the – polarity. (This is displayed
3 Motor speed in % % even when stopped.)
When V/f control operation (C30-0 = 1, 2) or auxiliary drive
operation is selected, a value obtained by multiplying D00-0:
output frequency with the random scale display coefficient:
C14-2 will be displayed.
Output frequency/motor
When IM vector control or PM motor control (C30-0 = 3 to 5) is
4 speed random scale
selected, a value obtained by multiplying D00-2: motor speed
display
with the random scale display coefficient, C14-2 will be
displayed.
If the value exceeds the range of -99999 to 99999,
will be displayed.
This displays the detected rotation count for V/f or sensorless
5 Motor rotation count vector control in the case where the unit is equipped with a
speed detection option.
D01 – Frequency setting monitor
0 Setting frequency in Hz Hz The currently selected frequency setting value is displayed.
1 Setting frequency in % % The max. frequency is displayed as 100%.
The set speed at ASR input point is displayed.
Ramp function output –1
3 min The forward run direction is displayed with the + polarity, and
speed
the reverse run direction with the – polarity.
The set speed at the ramp function’s input point is displayed.
Ramp function input –1
4 min The forward run direction is displayed with the + polarity, and
speed
the reverse run direction with the – polarity.
When V/f control operation (C30-0 = 1, 2) or auxiliary drive
operation is selected, a value obtained by multiplying D00-4:
setting frequency with the random scale display coefficient:
Setting frequency/input C14-2 will be displayed.
speed /ramp function input When IM vector control or PM motor control (C30-0 = 3 to 5) is
5
selected, a value obtained by multiplying D01-4: input speed
Random scale display with the random scale display coefficient, C14-2 will be
displayed.
If the value exceeds the range of -99999 to 99999,
will be displayed.
D02 – Current monitor
0 Output current Amps A will display when the gate is closed.
1 Output current in % % The motor rated current is displayed as 100%.
2 Overload (OL-1) monitor % OL-1 functions when this value reaches 100%.
3 Heatsink temperature °C
The torque current detection value is displayed using the
motor rated current as 100%. The forward run direction torque
4 Torque current detection %
is displayed with the + polarity, and the reverse run direction
torque with the – polarity.
The excitation current’s detection value is displayed using the
Excitation current motor rated current as 100%.
5 %
detection With the PM motor control, the demagnetizing current is
indicated with – polarity.
Motor overload (OL-3)
6 % The OL-3 operates when at 100%.
monitor

6–1
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Monitor parameters list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Remarks
ST V/f VEC PM
D03 – Voltage monitor
0 DC voltage V Displays the voltage of the DC link circuit in the main circuit.
Displays output voltage command. The display may differ from
Output voltage
1 V the actual output voltage. It depends on the power supply
(command)
voltage. will display when the gate is closed.
Displays the inverter’s output power. will display when
2 Output power kW
the gate is closed.
3 Carrier frequency kHz The current carrier frequency is displayed.
D04 – Sequence status
0 ~ 2 Input The ON/OFF state of the internal sequence data will display.
The correspondence of each LED segment and signal is
3 ~ 4 Output shown in the next page.
D05 – Minor fault monitor
The internal minor fault status will display.
0 Minor fault The correspondence of each LED segment and signal is
shown in the next page.
D06 – Pattern run monitor
0 Step No. The current step No. will display.
1 Remaining time hrs The remaining time of current step will display
D07 – Pump operation status monitor
This indicates the ON/OFF status of the pump.
0 Pump operation status The correspondence of the LED segments and signals is
shown below.
1 Next ON pump No. 0 is displayed when all pumps are ON.
2 Next OFF pump No. 0 is displayed when all pumps are OFF.
This displays the continuous ON/OFF time of the current
3 Passage time hrs pump.
This is cleared when the pump operation is changed over.
Current inverter drive This displays the number of the pump currently driven by the
4
pump No. inverter.
D08 –Analog input random scale display
Value to which coefficient set at C14-5 displays for FSV input.
FSV max. frequency/
0 [OVER] displays if the coefficient exceeds the –99999. to
speed reference
99999. range.
Value to which coefficient set at C14-6 displays for FSI input.
FSI max. frequency/
1 [OVER] displays if the coefficient exceeds the –99999. to
speed reference
99999. range.
Value to which coefficient set at C14-7 displays for AUX input.
AUX max. frequency/
2 [OVER] displays if the coefficient exceeds the –99999. to
speed reference
99999. range.

CFS LIM2
PROG LIM1
AUX PCTL
IFS ACR
VFS PICK
CPASS AUXDV
IPASS IVLM
CSEL BDW

EMS S0
RESET S1
RUN S2
REV S3
JOG SE
EXC FUP
BRAKE FDW
COP BUP

Sequence input (D04-0) Sequence input (D04-1)

6–2
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

S7
S6
S5
PRST
MBRK_ans

MCH
RF0
DROOP
DEDB
TRQB1
TRQB2
PIDEN

Sequence input (D04-2)

EC3
EC2 RDELAY
EC1 BPF
EC0 Doff-End
COP MBRK
SPD2 DVER
SPD1 ULMT
ATN

RUN ACC
FLT DCC
MC AUXDV
RDY1 ALM
RDY2 FAN
LCL ASW
REV ZSP
IDET LLMT
Sequence output (D04-3) Sequence output (D04-4)

Speed (position) detection error

Reducing carrier frequency
Overload error (Overload counter 50%)
Speed deviation error
Pump control upper limit
Pump control lower limit

Minor fault (D05-0)

6–3
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Upper line:
Indication of steps required
for tuning. (LED light)
Lower line:
Indication of completed steps.
(LED light)

PSO1 (Pump 1)
PSO2 (Pump 2)
PSO3 (Pump 3)
Automatic tuning (D22-0)
PSO4 (Pump 4)
PSO5 (Pump 5)

Pump operation status monitor (D07-0)

Speed detection 3 (for PM)

Speed detection 1/Speed detection 2 (for IM)

Relay interface
PC interface
Serial interface

Profibus interface

Option P.C.B. monitor(D30-1)

6–4
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Monitor parameters list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Remarks
ST V/f VEC PM
D11 – Torque setting
The currently selected torque setting of the current control
0 Torque setting input point %
input points is selected.
The setting value input from the analog torque setting is
1 Analog torque setting %
displayed.
Serial communication The setting value input from the serial communication torque
2 %
torque setting setting is displayed.
Operation panel torque
3 % The torque set with the operation panel (B13-0) is displayed.
setting
4 ASR output % The ASR output is displayed.
The forward run direction torque is displayed with the +
Torque setting (after
5 % polarity, and the reverse run direction torque with the –
torque limiter limit)
polarity.
D12 – Slip
The slip is displayed as a percentage in respect to the base
0 Slip %
speed.
D13 – STP run monitor
0 STP step No. – displays during stoppage.
Displays the time remaining until the end of the current
1 Remaining pattern time min
pattern.
2 STP No. – Displays the currently selected STP.
Average spindle
3 Hz Displays the average frequency for each spindle.
frequency
Displays the current Hank count. The display is limited at a
4 Hank count – maximum of 6553.5. This is cleared to zero when the power is
turned OFF.
Displays the operation time until now. The display is limited at
5 Total patter operating time min a maximum of 65535. This is cleared to zero when the power
is turned OFF.
D14 – Automatic torque bias
Automatic torque bias Displays the currently set torque bias value at the
0 %
setting value analog/digital auto torque bias setting.
D20 – Extended monitor
The fault history reference mode will display when SET is
0 Fault history reading entry
pressed.
The mode for referring to and changing parameters that differ
Non-default value
2
parameter list mode entry from the default value will display SET is pressed.

D21 – Maintenance monitor

Cumulative conductivity The cumulative power ON time after product shipment will be
0 Hrs
time counted and displayed.
The cumulative run time after product shipment will be
1 Cumulative runt time Hrs
counted and displayed.
2 CPU version Display for maker control.
3 ROM version Display for maker control.
D22 – Automatic tuning
Automatic tuning
0 The progression state of automatic tuning is displayed.
progression display
D30 – Hardware monitor
0 Inverter type This indicates the inverter type.
Displays the mounted option PCB. The correspondence of the
1 Option PCB
LED segments and signals is shown in the previous page.

6–5
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-2 Block-A parameters

The parameters used most frequently have been grouped in Block-A.
RWE: Displays the parameters that can be changed during operation.

Block-A parameters list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

A00 – Frequency setting

Local frequency This is the frequency set from the
0 Hz 10.00 0.10 Max. fre-
setting operation panel.
quency
Frequency setting for This is the frequency setting for
1 Hz 5.00 0.10
jogging jogging.
–1 This is the speed set from the
2 Local speed setting min 300.0
–Max. Max. operation panel.
Speed setting for –1 speed speed
3 min 100.0 This is the speed setting for jogging.
jogging
A01 – Acceleration/deceleration time

0 Acceleration time – 1 sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 The value can be displayed in units of
0.1 or 10 times as set on B10-5.
The time to reach the max. frequency
1 Deceleration time – 1 sec 20.0 0.1 6000.0 or max. speed from 0 is set.

A02 – Torque boost

Manual torque boost
0 2. 1. 2. 1: Disable = 2: Enable
selection
Automatic torque
1 1. 1. 2. 1: Disable = 2: Enable
boost selection
Set the boost voltage at 0Hz.
Manual torque boost Inverter
2 % 0.00 20.00 This is automatically adjusted by the
setting rating
automatic tuning.
Square reduction Set the reduced voltage at Base
3 % 0.00 0.00 25.00
torque setting frequency/2.
R1 drop
4 % 100.0 0.0 100.0
compensation gain
Set the motor’s rated slip.
Slip compensation
5 % 0.00 0.00 20.00 This is automatically adjusted by the
gain
automatic tuning.
Maximum torque This is automatically adjusted by the
6 % 0.00 0.00 50.00
boost gain automatic tuning.
A03 – DC Brake
Inverter This is automatically adjusted by the
0 DC braking voltage % 0.01 20.00
rating automatic tuning.
1 DC braking time sec 2.0 0.0 20.0
2 DC braking current % 50. 0. 150.
A04 – Custom parameters
0 Custom – 0
1 –1
2 –2 Set the parameter Nos. to be
3 –3 displayed in this block in
C10-0~7.
4 –4 This block displays when the above
5 –5 settings are not made.
6 –6
7 –7
A05 – Block B, C parameter skip
0 Extended setting 2. 1. 2. = 1 : Display, = 2 : Skip
Software option
1 2. 1. 2. = 1 : Display, = 2 : Skip
function
Hardware option
2 2. 1. 2. = 1 : Display, = 2 : Skip
function

6–6
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-A parameters list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

A10 – ASR control constant 1

The required ASR response radian
0 ASR response rad/s 10.0 1.0 300.0
frequency is set.
Machine time The time to accelerate the motor and
1 ms 1000. 1. 20000. load’s torque inertia to the base speed
constant−1
at the rated torque is set.
Integral time constant The compensation coefficient applied
2 compensation % 100. 20. 500. on the integral time constant of the
coefficient speed regulator (ASR) is set.
ASR drive torque
3 % 100.0 0.1 300.0
limiter The limit values for the ASR drive side
ASR regenerative and regenerative side are set.
4 % 100.0 0.1 300.0
torque limiter
Emergency stop The ASR regenerative side limit value
5 regenerative torque % 100.0 0.1 300.0 applied during the emergency stop
limiter mode is set.
A11 – ACR control constant
0 ACR response rad/s 1000. 100. 6000. The ACR gain and time constant are
set.
This will affect the current response. If
the gain is too low or too high, the
current will become unstable, and the
1 ACR time constant ms 20.0 0.1 300.0 over current protection will function.
Normally adjust the response
between 500 and 1000, and the time
constant between 5 and 20ms.
ACR drive torque
2 % 100.0 0.1 300.0
limiter The ACR drive side and regenerative
ACR regenerative side limit values are set.
3 % 100.0 0.1 300.0
torque limiter
A20 – ACR control constant (PM)
0 ACR response (PM) rad/s 1500. 100. 6000. The ACR gain and time constant are
set.
This will affect the current response. If
the gain is too low or too high, the
ACR time constant current will become unstable, and the
1 ms 10.0 0.1 300.0 over current protection will function.
(PM)
Normally adjust the response
between 500 and 2000, and the time
constant between 5 and 20ms.
d axis current This is the cushion setting to prevent
2 command cushion ms/I1 10.0 0.1 100.0 instability caused by overshooting,
time etc., when the current command
changes suddenly.
q axis current Set at how many ms to change the
3 command cushion ms/I1 10.0 0.1 100.0 current command value equivalent to
time the motor rated current.
Normally, a value 5ms or more is set.

6–7
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-3 Block-B parameters

The Block-B parameters are divided into the basic functions, extended functions and software option
functions.
Block-B parameters (Basic function of V/f control) list
Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

B00 – Output rating

Rated input voltage Select the rated input voltage from the
0 7. 1. 7.
setting following table.

Small size (Note 1) Large size (Note 2)

Value 200V 400V Value 200V 400V
system system system system
1 200V 380V 1 200V 380V
When this data is changed, the 2 200V 400V 2 200V 400V
output voltage data will be changed
3 200V 415V 3 220V 415V
to the same value.
4 220V 440V 4 220V 440V
5 230V 460V 5 230V 460V
6 230V 480V 6 230V 460V
7 230V 400V 7 230V 400V

Max./base frequency Select the output frequency rating from the

1 1. 0 9
simple setting combination below.
Value Ftrq [Hz] Fmax [Hz] Value Ftrq [Hz] Fmax [Hz]
0 Free setting on B00-4 5 50 100
and B00-5 6 60 70
1 50 50 7 80
2 60 60 8 90
9 120
3 50 60
4 75

Inverter The motor rated output at the base

2 Motor rated output kW 0.10 750.00
rating frequency is set.
DC-AVR does not operate when set to 39.
The input voltage equals the output voltage at
480 the base frequency.
(Note1) DC-AVR operates so that the set voltage is
230. attained at the base frequency when not set
3 Rated output voltage V 39. to 39.
/400. 460 When the rated input voltage setting (B00-0)
(Note2) is changed, this data is also changed to the
. rated input voltage value.
This cannot be set above the rated input
voltage.
4 Max. frequency Hz 50.0 3.0 440.0 When "B00-1" is a value other than 0, this
will be rewritten with the data set in the
5 Base frequency Hz 50.0 1.0 440.0 simple setting.
Inverter This is the reference value for the
Inverter Inverter
6 Motor rated current A rating overcurrent limit, OLT, current % display
rating rating
× 0.3 and meter output.
The noise can be lowered by changing the
PWM carrier frequency and control
method, and changing the sound of the
magnetic noise generated from the motor.
Carrier frequency This can be changed while running.
17.0 1.0 21.0 1.0 to 15.0 : Monotone sound method
(Small size : Note 1)
(Carrier frequency: 1.0 to 15.0kHz)
15.1 to 18.0 : Soft sound method 1
7 (Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)
18.1 to 21.0 : Soft sound method 2
(Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)
1.0 to 8.0 : Monotone sound method
(Carrier frequency: 1.0 to 8.0kHz)
Carrier frequency 8.1 to 11.0 : Soft sound method 1
10.0 1.0 14.0
(Large size : Note 2) (Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)
11.1 to 14.0 : Soft sound method 2
(Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)
Note 1) Small size : 0P4H∼045H, 0P4L∼037L
Note 2) Large size : 055H and larger, 045L and larger

6–8
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (Basic function of vector control) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

B01 – Output rating

Rated input voltage Select the rated input voltage from the
0 7. 1. 7.
setting following table.

Small size (Note 1) Large size (Note 2)

Value 200V 400V Value 200V 400V

system system system system
When this data is changed, the 1 200V 380V 1 200V 380V
output voltage data will also be 2 200V 400V 2 200V 400V
changed to the same value. 3 200V 415V 3 220V 415V
4 220V 440V 4 220V 440V
5 230V 460V 5 230V 460V
6 230V 480V 6 230V 460V
7 230V 400V 7 230V 400V

Inverter The motor’s rated output at the base

1 Motor rated output kW 0.10 750.00
rating speed is set.
2 No. of motor poles Pole 4. 2. 32.
480
230. (Note1) The motor terminal voltage during full
3 Rated output voltage V 40.
/400. 460 load at the base speed is set.
(Note2)
The max. motor speed is set. Set a
value that is 4-times or less of the base
–1 speed.
4 Max. speed min 1800. 150. 7200.
In the case of PM motor control, set a
value 1.2 times or less of the base
speed.
The motor base speed is set. When
–1
5 Base speed min 1800. 150. 7200. higher than this speed, the flux control
during vector control will be weakened.
Inverter
Inverter Inverter The motor current during full load at the
6 Motor rated current A rating
rating rating base speed is set.
× 0.3
The noise can be lowered by changing
the PWM carrier frequency and control
method, and changing the tone of the
magnetic noise generated from the
motor. This can be changed while
Carrier frequency running.
17.0 1.0 21.0
(Small size : Note 1) 1.0 to 15.0 : Monotone sound method
(Carrier frequency: 1.0 to 15.0kHz)
15.1 to 18.0 : Soft sound method 1
7
(Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)
18.1 to 21.0 : Soft sound method 2
(Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)
1.0 to 8.0 : Monotone sound method
(Carrier frequency: 1.0 to 8.0kHz)
Carrier frequency 8.1 to 11.0 : Soft sound method 1
10.0 1.0 14.0
(Large size : Note 2) (Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)
11.1 to 14.0 : Soft sound method 2
(Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)
No. of encoder pulses
8 P/R 1000. 30. 10000.
(Note 3)
No-load output The motor terminal voltage during
9 V 160. 20. 500.
voltage no-load at the base speed is set.
Note 1) Small size : 0P4H∼045H, 0P4L∼037L
Note 2) Large size : 055H and larger, 045L and larger
Note 3) B01-8 is available from ROM version (D21-3) 9320.1 and above

6–9
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (Basic function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

B02 – Motor circuit constant (IM)

R1:
Inverter
0 Primary resistance mΩ 0.100 9.999
rating
(Mantissa section)
The motor circuit constant is set.
R1:
Inverter
1 Primary resistance −3 4
rating
(Exponent section)
R2’:
2 Secondary resistance mΩ 1.000 0.100 9.999
(Mantissa section) This combination means below
R2’ = 1.000 × 10 [mΩ]
0
R2’:
3 Secondary resistance 0 −3 4
(Exponent section)
Lσ:
4 Leakage inductance mH 1.000 0.100 9.999
(Mantissa section)
Lσ:
5 Leakage inductance 0 −3 4
(Exponent section)
M’:
6 Excitation inductance mH 1.000 0.100 9.999
(Mantissa section)
M’:
7 Excitation inductance 0 −3 4
(Exponent section)
Rm:
8 Iron loss resistance mΩ 1.000 0.100 9.999
(Mantissa section)
Rm:
9 Iron loss resistance 0 −3 5
(Exponent section)
B03 – Motor circuit constant (PM)
R1: PM motor primary
0 resistance mΩ 1.000 0.001 9.999
(Mantissa section)
This combination means below
R1: PM motor R1 = 1.000 × 10 [mΩ]
0

secondary
1 0. –1. 4.
resistance
(Exponent section)
Ld: PM motor d axis
2 inductance mH 1.000 0.001 9.999
(Mantissa section)
Lq: PM motor q axis This combination means below
3 inductance mH 1.000 0.001 9.999 0
Ld = 1.000 × 10 [mH]
(Mantissa section)
Ld, Lq: PM motor
4 inductance 0. –1. 4.
(Exponent section)
B05 – Frequency skip
0 Skip frequency – 1 Hz 0.1 0.1 440.0
1 Skip band – 1 Hz 0.0 0.0 10.0
2 Skip frequency – 2 Hz 0.1 0.1 440.0
3 Skip band – 2 Hz 0.0 0.0 10.0
4 Skip frequency – 3 Hz 0.1 0.1 440.0
5 Skip band – 3 Hz 0.0 0.0 10.0
B06 – Ratio interlock setting
0 Coefficient 1.000 –10.000 10.000
1 Bias Hz 0.0 –440.0 440.0
The upper limit is larger than the
2 Upper limit Hz 440.00 –440.00 440.00
lower limit.
3 Lower limit Hz 0.10 –440.00 440.00
–1
4 Bias min 0. –7200. 7200.
–1 The upper limit is larger than the
5 Upper limit min 7200. –7200. 7200.
–1
lower limit.
6 Lower limit min –7200. –7200. 7200.

6 – 10
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (Extended function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

B10 – Acceleration/deceleration time

The acceleration/deceleration ramp
Acceleration ramp time valid when the sequence input
0 sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 ramp 2 selection is ON (CSEL=ON) is
time−2
set.
Set a time between 0 and the max.
frequency or max. speed.
Deceleration ramp The unit can be changed to ×0.1s,
1 sec 20.0 0.1 6000.0
time−2 ×10s with the time unit setting
(B10-5).
The acceleration/deceleration time
Acceleration ramp value when the JOG sequence (F
2 sec 5.0 0.1 6000.0
time for jogging JOG, R JOG) is valid is set.
Set a time between 0 and the max.
frequency or max. speed.
Deceleration ramp The unit can be changed to ×0.1s,
3 sec 5.0 0.1 6000.0 ×10s with the time unit setting
time for jogging
(B10-5).
Set to 1/2 of less of the ramp time.
S-shape
4 sec 0.0 0.0 5.0 S-shape pattern is possible by setting
characteristics (Ts)
this parameter.
The acceleration/deceleration ramp
time setting unit can be changed by
setting an acceleration/deceleration
5 Time unit 1. 1. 3.
ramp time with a wider range. This
parameter will affect all acceleration/
deceleration ramp time parameters.
S-shape ramp pass =1: OFF =2: For program 0
6 1. 1. 3.
function =3: For RUN-OFF
B11 – Program frequency (speed) setting
0 Program frequency % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Select as follows with S0, S1, S2, S3
(speed) –0 and SE .
1 Program frequency % 10.00 0.00 100.00 (1) For binary mode (B11-8=1)
(speed) –1 Sequence command Selected
frequency
2 Program frequency % 10.00 0.00 100.00 SE S3 S2 S1 S0
(speed) –2 OFF OFF OFF B11-0
OFF OFF ON B11-1
3 Program frequency % 10.00 0.00 100.00
OFF ON OFF B11-2
(speed) –3 OFF ON ON B11-3
4 Program frequency % 10.00 0.00 100.00 * *
ON OFF OFF B11-4
(speed) –4 ON OFF ON B11-5
5 Program frequency % 10.00 0.00 100.00 ON ON OFF B11-6
(speed) –5 ON ON ON B11-7

6 Program frequency % 10.00 0.00 100.00 *：SE and S3 are not used.
(speed) –6 (2) For direct select mode (B11-8=2)
7 Program frequency % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Sequence command Selected
SE S3 S2 S1 S0 frequency
(speed) –7
Previous
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF values
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON B11-0
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF B11-1
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF B11-2
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF B11-3
Previous
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF values
ON OFF OFF OFF ON B11-4
ON OFF OFF ON OFF B11-5
ON OFF ON OFF OFF B11-6
ON ON OFF OFF OFF B11-7
When S0 to S3 are all OFF, or when two or more
are set between S0 and S3, the previous values
will be held. If there are no previous values
because the power has been turned ON, etc., "0"
will be set.

Select the program frequency setting

(B11) and program ramp (B41, B42)
Selection mode
8 1. 1. 2. selection mode.
setting
= 1 : Binary mode
= 2 : Direct select mode

6 – 11
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (Extended function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE
B13 – Local setting
This is the torque setting from the operation
0 Torque setting % 0.0 –300.0 300.0
panel.
1 Torque ratio 1 setting 1.000 0.001 5.000
2 Torque bias 1 setting % 0.0 –300.0 300.0
3 Torque ratio 2 setting 1.000 –5.000 5.000
This sets the torque limiter reduction pattern
Double rating speed ratio
4 % 100.0 0.1 100.0 changeover point. Set as a percentage in
setting
respect to the base speed.
By adjusting this parameter, the
5 Drooping setting % 0.00 0.00 20.00 torque-motor speed drooping
characteristics can be achieved.
This sets the ASR P gain compensation
value at the max. speed.
By adjusting this parameter, the ASR P
ASR gain compensation gain can be compensated in the constant
6 % 100.0 0.0 150.0
in constant power range power range.
If ASR hunting occurs in the sensor-less
vector control's constant output range, set
a smaller value.
This sets the ACR P gain compensation
value at the max. speed.
ACR gain compensation
7 % 100.0 0.0 150.0 By adjusting this parameter, the ACR P
in constant power range
gain can be compensated in the constant
power range.
B14 – ASR dead band setting
The non-sensitive range of the ASR input is
0 ASR dead band setting % 0.0 0.0 100.0
set.
B15 – Machine time constant setting 2
The time to accelerate the motor and load’s
torque inertia to the base speed at the
Machine time constant− rated torque is set.
0 ms 1000. 10. 20000.
2 This is valid when the sequence input
machine time constant changeover is ON
(MCH = ON).
B16 – Automatic torque bias setting
Automatic torque bias =0: Not used =1: Digital
0 – 0. 0. 2.
selection =2: Analog
1 Digital bias setting 0 % –100.0 –150.0 150.0 The torque bias value is selected based on
2 Digital bias setting 1 % –50.0 –150.0 150.0 the contact input.
S7 S6 S5
3 Digital bias setting 2 % 0.0 –150.0 150.0
0 0 0 Setting 0
4 Digital bias setting 3 % 50.0 –150.0 150.0
0 0 1 Setting 1
0 1 0 Setting 2
0 1 1 Setting 3
5 Digital bias setting 4 % 100.0 –150.0 150.0
1 x x Setting 4
x: Status is irrelevant
Set the bias direction.
6 Bias direction selection – 1. 1. 2. =1: Clockwise drive direction
=2: Counterclockwise drive direction
8 Analog bias voltage 0 % 0.0 –100.0 100.0 Set the input voltage lower limit value.
9 Analog bias voltage 1 % 50.0 –100.0 100.0 Set the input voltage at the balance point.
A Analog bias voltage 2 % 100.0 –100.0 100.0 Set the input voltage upper limit value.
Set the bias torque at the input voltage
B Output bias torque 0 % –100.0 –150.0 150.0
lower limit value.
Set the bias torque at the input voltage
C Output bias torque 2 % 100.0 –150.0 150.0
upper limit value.
B17 – V/f middle point
0 Frequency 2 Hz 0.0 0.0 Max. frequency
These parameters should be set:
1 Voltage 2 % 0.0 0.0 100.0
Base frequency ≥ B17-0 ≥ B17-2
2 Frequency 1 Hz 0.0 0.0 Max. frequency
B17-1 ≥ B17-3
3 Voltage 1 % 0.0 0.0 100.0

6 – 12
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (Extended function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE
B18 – Over current limit
The value when the making the reduction
0 Over current limit % 150. 50. 300.
torque setting is “105.”
Regenerative current
1 % 10. 5. 300. Set to 10% when not using the DBR option.
limit
2 Torque stabilization gain 1.00 0. 4.00 Increase if the motor vibrates.
Over current limit
3 0.25 0. 2.00 Decrease if current hunting occurs.
function gain
4 Current stabilization gain 0.25 0. 2.00
Over current stall
5 1.00 0. 2.50
prevention gain
Over current stall
6 100. 10. 1001. P control will be applied if 1001 is set.
prevention time constant
B19 – Automatic tuning function
1: Basic adjustment for V/f Control
2: Extended adjustment for V/f Control
3: Basic adjustment for Vector Control
Automatic tuning 4: Extended adjustment for Vector Control
0 0. 0. 4
selection 5: Calculation of no load voltage for Vector
Control
6: Encoder phase adjustment (PM)
When the motor with special circuit
Initial proportion
1 % 100. 0. 500. parameters is applied, the initial condition
compensation gain
of automatic tuning is set. Set these value
if auto tuning is completed incorrectly and
Initial time constant
2 % 100. 0. 500. try to auto tuning again. Set these value to
compensation gain increase or decrease with 50% step
B20 – Output rating (Auxiliary drive)
Max./base frequency Select the output frequency rating from the
0 1. 0. 9.
simple setting combination below.
Value Ftrq [Hz] Fmax [Hz] Value Ftrq [Hz] Fmax [Hz]
0 Free setting on B20-2, 3 5 100
1 50 50 6 60 70
2 60 60 7 80
8 90
3 50 60 9 120
4 75
DC-AVR operates so that the set voltage is
attained at the base frequency.
230. When the rated input voltage setting (B00-0)
1 Rated output voltage V 40. 480. is changed, this data is also changed to the
/400. rated input voltage value.
This cannot be set above the rated input
voltage.
2 Max. frequency Hz 50.0 3.0 440.0 When "B20-0" is a value other than 0, this
will be rewritten with the data set in the
3 Base frequency Hz 50.0 1.0 440.0 simple setting.
Inverter This is the reference value for the
Inverter Inverter
4 Motor rated current A rating overcurrent limit, OLT, current % display
rating rating
× 0.3 and meter output.
The noise can be lowered by changing the
PWM carrier frequency and control
method, and changing the sound of the
magnetic noise generated from the motor.
This can be changed while running.
Carrier frequency
17.0 1.0 21.0 1.0 to 15.0 : Monotone sound method
(Small size : Note 1) (Carrier frequency: 1.0 to 15.0kHz)
15.1 to 18.0 : Soft sound method 1
5 (Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)
18.1 to 21.0 : Soft sound method 2
(Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)
1.0 to 8.0 : Monotone sound method
(Carrier frequency: 1.0 to 8.0kHz)
Carrier frequency 8.1 to 11.0 : Soft sound method 1
10.0 1.0 14.0
(Large size : Note 2) (Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)
11.1 to 14.0 : Soft sound method 2
(Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)
B21 – Frequency setting (Auxiliary drive)
This is the frequency set from the
0 Local frequency setting Hz 10.00 0.10 Max. operation panel.
fre-
Frequency setting for quency
1 Hz 5.00 0.10 This is the frequency setting for jogging.
jogging
Note 1) Small size : 0P4H∼045H, 0P4L∼037L
Note 2) Large size : 055H and larger, 045L and larger

6 – 13
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (Extended function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE
B22 – Acceleration/deceleration time (Auxiliary drive)
The time to reach the max. frequency
0 Acceleration time – 1 sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 from 0 is set.
The unit can be changed to ×0.1s,
1 Deceleration time – 1 sec 20.0 0.1 6000.0 ×10s with the time unit setting
(B10-5).
The acceleration/deceleration ramp
Acceleration ramp time value when the JOG sequence
2 sec 5.0 0.1 6000.0
time for jogging (F JOG, R JOG) is valid is set.
Set a time between 0 and the max.
frequency.
Deceleration ramp The unit can be changed to ×0.1s,
3 sec 5.0 0.1 6000.0 ×10s with the time unit setting
time for jogging
(B10-5).
This is the acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration ramp ramp time setting made valid when
4 sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 the sequence command ramp 2
time – 2
switch is ON (CSEL=ON).
Set a time between 0 and the max.
frequency or max. speed.
Deceleration ramp The unit can be changed to ×0.1s,
5 sec 20.0 0.1 6000.0
time – 2 ×10s with the time unit setting
(B10-5).
B23 – Torque boost (Auxiliary drive)
Manual torque boost Inverter
0 % 0.00 20.00 Set the boost voltage at 0Hz.
setting rating
Square reduction Set the reduced voltage at Base
1 % 0.00 0.00 25.00
torque setting frequency/2.
B24 – DC Brake (Auxiliary drive)
Inverter
0 DC braking voltage % 0.01 20.00
rating
1 DC braking time sec 2.0 0.0 20.0
B25 – Over current limit (Auxiliary drive)
The value when the making the reduction
0 Over current limit % 150. 50. 300. torque setting is “105.”
Regenerative current Set to 10% when not using the DB
1 % 10. 5. 300.
limit option.
Torque stabilization
2 1.00 0. 4.00 Increase if the motor vibrates.
gain
B26 – Power outage deceleration setting (Main)
Power outage =1: C00-0.1 compliant
0 deceleration stoppage 1. 1. 2. =2: Power outage deceleration
usage stoppage
Power outage Sequence output : BPF turns ON
1 % 80. 65. 90.
determination level when DC voltage is this level or lower.
Deceleration ramp Set the deceleration time from the
2 sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0
time-1 (Main) maximum frequency value to 0Hz.
Set the deceleration time from the
Deceleration ramp maximum frequency value to 0Hz.
3 sec 10.0 0.0 6000.0
time-2 (Main) Deceleration is performed at
deceleration ramp time-1 when 0.0.
No subtraction made when 0.00Hz.
Subtraction frequency 0Hz and brake engaged when the
4 Hz 0.00 0.00 20.00
(Main) result of output frequency –
subtraction frequency is 0 or less.
If the output frequency is higher than
this value, deceleration is performed
Max. fre-
Subtraction start from the result of output frequency –
5 Hz 0.0 0.0 quency
frequency value (Main) subtraction frequency.
or 999.9
Subtraction is always performed when
999.9.
Switching frequency Max. fre- Switching is not performed when 0.00
6 Hz 0.00 0.00
(Main) quency to stoppage frequency or less.
(Note) (Main) indicates a normal drive related setting, and is used to distinguish between auxiliary drive.

6 – 14
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (Extended function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

B27 – Power outage deceleration setting (Auxiliary drive)

Deceleration performed for this length
Deceleration ramp
0 sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 of time from the max. frequency value
time-1 (Auxiliary)
to 0Hz.
Deceleration performed for this length
of time from the max. frequency value
Deceleration ramp
1 sec 10.0 0.0 6000.0 to 0Hz.
time-2 (Auxiliary)
Deceleration is performed at
deceleration ramp time-1 when 0.0.
No subtraction made when 0.00Hz.
Subtraction frequency 0Hz and brake engaged when the
2 Hz 0.00 0.00 20.00
(Auxiliary) result of output frequency –
subtraction frequency is 0 or less.
If the output frequency is higher than
this value, deceleration is performed
Subtraction start Max. fre-
from the result of output frequency –
3 frequency value Hz 0.0 0.0 quency
subtraction frequency.
(Auxiliary) or 999.9
Subtraction is always performed when
999.9.
Max.
Switching frequency Switching is not performed when
4 Hz 0.00 0.00 fre-
(Auxiliary) 0~stoppage frequency or less.
quency
B30 – Speed control extended function
Set the observer gain for the load
torque observer.
To increase the responsiveness of the
external disturbance response
Load torque observer
0 times 0.0 0.0 200.0 characteristics, set a large gain.
gain
Note that if the gain is set too high,
the output torque could hunt.
When set to zero, the load torque
observer will not function.
Model machine time Set the model machine time constant
1 ms 500. 10. 20000.
constant used by the load torque observer.
If the speed setting value or motor
ASR proportional item speed change suddenly, this will
2 % 50.0 1.0 400.0
change rate limit prevent the ASR's P item from
suddenly changing.
Overshooting can be suppressed by
Speed setting LPF
3 ms 0. 0. 1000. setting this to the filter time constant
time constant
equivalent to the speed response.
Speed detection LPF
4 ms 2. 0. 1000. The speed detection noise is cut.
time constant
Set the low path filter time constant
Speed detection LPF
5 ms 5. 0. 1000. used for the speed detection value
time constant for ASR
input into the speed regulator.
Set the low path filter time constant
Speed detection LPF
used for the speed detection value for
6 time constant for ms 20. 0. 1000.
constant output range compensation
compensation
or iron loss compensation, etc.
Torque current
Set the low path filter time constant
7 command setting LPF ms 0. 0. 1000.
used for the torque current command.
time constant
Set the low path filter time constant
LPF time constant for
8 ms 100. 0. 1000. used for drooping value input into the
drooping
speed regulator.

6 – 15
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (Extended function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

B31 – Sensor-less control function

This is the feedback gain for the
flux observer.
If hunting occurs at the
0 Flux observer gain 1.20 0.50 1.50 estimated speed in the
high-speed operation range,
adjust within the range of 1.2 to
0.9.
This is the proportional gain for
the adaptive speed estimation
mechanism. To increase the
Speed estimated
1 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 speed estimation response, set
proportional gain
a large value. Note that if the
value is too high, the speed
estimation value will hunt.
This is the integral gain for the
adaptive speed estimation
mechanism. To increase the
Speed estimated integral
2 % 0.10 0.00 100.00 speed estimation response, set
gain
a large value. Note that if the
value is too high, the speed
estimation value will hunt.
Regenerative compensation The regenerative torque limiter
3 % 10.0 0.1 100.0
torque limiter 1 can be changed in the
Regenerative compensation low-speed area.
4 % 20.0 0.1 100.0 The shaded section shows the
torque limiter 2
operation range. If operation is
Regenerative compensation unstable within the shaded line
5 % 10.0 0.1 100.0
low-speed area setting 1 range, set the parameter so that
Regenerative compensation the unstable point is not within
6 % 20.0 0.1 100.0
low-speed area setting 2 the shaded line area.

Output torque B31-5 B31-6

Motor speed

B31-3

B31-4

Regenerative torque
Regeneration limiter lever
direction

6 – 16
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (Extended function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE
B32 – Vector control compensation selection
= 1: Disable = 2~50: Enable
This is the control gain used for
high-speed control of the
secondary flux when starting
operation.
Use this to control the
0 High-speed flux control gain 1. 1. 50. secondary flux at a high speed
at the start of operation or
during operation in a constant
output range.
High speed control is possible
by increasing the gain, but if
increased too high, the
magnetizing current may hunt.
= 1: Disable = 2: Enable
If torque accuracy is required
when vector control with sensor
is selected (C30-0 = 4), or if
speed accuracy is required
Temperature compensation when sensor-less vector control
1 1. 1. 2.
selection is selected (C30-0 = 3), the
parameter fluctuation of the
primary resistance value and
secondary resistance value
caused by a rise in temperature
can be compensated.
= 1: Disable = 2: Enable
If the output voltage in control is
larger than the voltage that can
be output by the inverter, select
this control to limit the exciting
current to prevent the current or
torque from hunting.
Voltage saturation Select this when raising the
2 2. 1. 2.
compensation selection output voltage to near the input
voltage, or when the input
voltage changes.
Note that if voltage saturation
occurs, some torque ripple will
occur. In this case, lower the
B01-9 no-load voltage setting to
avoid voltage saturation.
= 1: Disable = 2: Enable
Iron loss compensation This compensates the torque
3 1. 1. 2. error caused by iron loss. The
selection
iron loss resistance value
(B02-8, 9) must be set.
= 1: Disable = 2: Enable
The voltage fluctuation caused
by the leakage inductance is
feed forward controlled.
ACR voltage model FF The current regulator (ACR)
4 2. 1. 2.
selection response speed will be
increased. Select this if the
current hunts in the high-speed
operation range during
sensor-less control.

6 – 17
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (Extended function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE
B33 – M fluctuation compensation table reference speed
–1
0 Table reference speed 0 min 200 100. 7200.
–1 This is the reference speed for
1 Table reference speed 1 min 400 100. 7200. changing the compensation
–1
2 Table reference speed 2 min 600 100. 7200. amount according to the
3 Table reference speed 3 min
–1
800 100. 7200. operation speed.
–1 If all of B34 is set to the default
4 Table reference speed 4 min 1000 100. 7200. value (=100%), these will be
–1
5 Table reference speed 5 min 1200 100. 7200. automatically set when adjusted
6 Table reference speed 6 min
–1
1400 100. 7200. with automatic tuning mode 4
–1 (B19-0=4). (Note 1)
7 Table reference speed 7 min 1600 100. 7200.
B34 – M fluctuation compensation
M fluctuation compensation
0 % 100.0 50.0 150.0
coefficient 0
M fluctuation compensation
1 % 100.0 50.0 150.0 This compensates the exciting
coefficient 1
inductance fluctuation according
M fluctuation compensation to the B33 table reference
2 % 100.0 50.0 150.0
coefficient 2 speed.
M fluctuation compensation Set the compensation table so
3 % 100.0 50.0 150.0
coefficient 3 that the output voltage is
M fluctuation compensation constant during no-load
4 % 100.0 50.0 150.0 operation through the entire
coefficient 4
operation range.
M fluctuation compensation * This is adjusted with the
5 % 100.0 50.0 150.0
coefficient 5 automatic tuning mode 4
M fluctuation compensation (B19-0 = 4).
6 % 100.0 50.0 150.0
coefficient 6
M fluctuation compensation
7 % 100.0 50.0 150.0
coefficient 7
B35 – Voltage control constant (PM)
Demagnetizing control
0 % 10.0 5.0 100.0 % of rated voltage
operation voltage allowance
Demagnetizing current limit
1 % 50.0 10.0 200.0 % of rated current
value
Demagnetizing current
2 times 0.10 0.01 99.99
control proportional gain
Demagnetizing current
3 control integral time ms 10. 2. 1000.
constant
Flux temperature fluctuation
4 % 0.0 0.0 50.0
compensation range
Flux temperature fluctuation
5 sec 1000. 1. 9999.
compensation time constant
B36 – Demagnetizing current table (PM)
Demagnetizing current table
Demagnetizing current
0 % 0.0 0.0 100.0 (Motor rated current reference)
table 0
(at torque command 25%)
Demagnetizing current
1 % 0.0 0.0 100.0 (at torque command 50%)
table 1
Demagnetizing current
2 % 0.0 0.0 100.0 (at torque command 75%)
table 2
Demagnetizing current
3 % 0.0 0.0 100.0 (at torque command 100%)
table 3
Demagnetizing current
4 % 0.0 0.0 100.0 (at torque command 150%)
table 4

6 – 18
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (S/W option constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

B40 – Software option function

= 1 : Following functions are not used.
= 2 : Program ramp function use
0 Function selection – 1 1 1. 4.
= 3 : Pattern run use
= 4 : Traverse run use
= 1 : Following functions are not used.
= 2 : PID use
= 3 : PID, multi-pump control use
1 Function selection – 2 1 1. 3. (No main pump rotation)
= 4 : PID, multi-pump control use
(Main pump rotation performed)
(Note)
B41 – Program ramp – acceleration
0 Acceleration time – 0 sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0
1 –1 sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0
2 –2 sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0
3 –3 sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 Select as follows with S0, S1, S2, S3
4 –4 sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 and SE.
5 –5 sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0
6 –6 sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0
7 –7 sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0
B42 – Program ramp – deceleration
0 Deceleration time – 0 sec 20.0 0.1 6000.0
1 –1 sec 20.0 0.1 6000.0
2 –2 sec 20.0 0.1 6000.0
3 –3 sec 20.0 0.1 6000.0
Select as follows with S0, S1, S2, S3
4 –4 sec 20.0 0.1 6000.0 and SE.
5 –5 sec 20.0 0.1 6000.0
6 –6 sec 20.0 0.1 6000.0
7 –7 sec 20.0 0.1 6000.0

(1) For binary mode (B11-8=1) (2) For direct select mode (B11-8=2)
The binary mode or Sequence command Selected Sequence command Selected
direct input mode is SE S3 S2 S1 S0 ramp time SE S3 S2 S1 S0 ramp time
selected with B11-8. B41-0 Previous
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
B42-0 values
B41-1 B41-0
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
B42-1 B42-0
B41-2 B41-1
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
B42-2 B42-1
B41-3 B41-2
OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
B42-3 B42-2
* * ON OFF OFF B41-4 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF B41-3
B42-3
B42-4
B41-5 Previous
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
B42-5 values
B41-6 B41-4
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
B42-6 B42-4
B41-7 B41-5
ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF
B42-7 B42-5
B41-6
ON OFF ON OFF OFF
* : SE and S3 are not used. B42-6
B41-7
ON ON OFF OFF OFF B42-7
When S0 to S3 are all OFF, or when two or more are set
between S0 and S3, the previous values will be held. If
there are no previous values because the power has been
turned ON, etc., "0" will be set.

Note) Multi-pump control can be selected only for V/f control.

6 – 19
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (S/W option constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

B43 – PID control

0 Proportional gain times 1.00 0.01 10.00
1 Integral time constant sec 10.0 0.0 30.0
Differential time
2 sec 0.000 0.000 1.000
constant
3 Upper limit % 100. 50. 100. The maximum frequency
(B00-4,B20-2) and maximum speed
4 Lower limit % 0. 0. 50. (B01-4) are 100%
Detected error Error determination is commenced if
5 determination start % 0.0 0.0 100.0 the command value is this value or
level higher.
An error occurs if the detected value
6 Detected error level % 0.0 0.0 100.0
is this value or lower.
Detected error A breakdown occurs if the error
7 sec 0.5 0.1 25.0
determination time continues this length of time or longer.
The command and detection polarity
8 Polarity reverse flag 1. 1. 2. is reversed.
=1: Normal =2: Reversed
PID operation method selection(Note)
f0: PID operation conditions
1: RUN and PIDEN AND conditions
9 PID operation method – 11. 11. 22. 2: PIDEN
f1: RUN conditions
1: RUN operation (normal operation)
2: PIDOP operation stoppage
Set the PID output hysteresis width
Hysteresis when
A % 3.0 1.0 10.0 when restarting operation when
restarting operation
B42-9=22.
B44 – Multi-pump control
No. of controlled Set the No. of pumps to be ON/OFF
0 units 3. 1. 5.
pumps controlled.
If the time that the PID output is
Pump start holding applied on the upper limiter is longer
1 sec 60. 0.1 3600.
time than this setting, the pump's ON
control will be carried out.
If the time that the PID output is
Pump stop holding applied on the lower limiter is longer
2 sec 60. 0.1 3600.
time than this setting, the pump's OFF
control will be carried out.
If the pump's ON/OFF control is not
carried out for longer than the time set
Continuous operation here, the pumps will change from that
3 hrs 8. 2. 168.
limit time operating to the longest to that
operating the shortest so that the
operation time of each pump is equal.
Set the time for changing from the
pump that has been operating the
4 Changeover time sec 3. 1. 120.
longest to the pump that has been
operating the shortest.
Set the dead time for switching the
INV/main switching
5 sec 1. 0.2 10. INV and main power supply during
dead time setting
main pump rotation.
Select whether to stop the INV or
continue operation when the other
INV control method at auxiliary motor is stopped and the
6 1. 1. 2.
lower limit selection lower limit state is continued.
1:Stop 2:Continue running
Note) f0 to f1 are indicated in the order of [f1 f0.]. f0 indicates the least significant digit.

6 – 20
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (S/W option constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

B45 – Traverse run

Center frequency
0 % 20.00 5.00 100.00
(speed) (FH)
1 Amplitude (A) % 10.0 0.1 20.0 Set (A/FH) × 100.
2 Drop (D) % 0.0 0.0 50.0 Set (D/A) × 100.
3 Acceleration time (B) sec 10.0 0.5 60.0
4 Deceleration time (C) sec 10.0 0.5 60.0
5 Deviated traverse (X) % 10.0 0.0 20.0 Set (X/FH) × 100.
6 Deviated traverse (Y) % 10.0 0.0 20.0 Set (Y/FH) × 100.
B46 – External brake control
f0= External brake function selection
=1: OFF =2: ON
f1= IDET interlock
External brake =1: OFF =2: ON
0 – 111. 111. 222. f2= Acceleration wait time
selection
=1: Program frequency output
=2: DC brake output
(Note)
Set the wait time from the RUN
Brake release wait
1 sec 0.00 0.00 2.50 command to the brake release
time (LB)
command.
Set the wait time from the point the
brakes are released until the motor
Acceleration start wait
2 sec 0.00 0.00 2.50 accelerates. If there is a brake answer
time (BL)
(MBRK_ans), set from answer, and if
none, set time from command.
Set the wait time (cumulative) from the
Brake engage wait point the frequency (speed) command
3 sec 0.00 0.00 2.50
time (DB) value reaches the zero speed setting
or below until the brake is engaged.
A fault stoppage occurs if ON for the
RUN error judgment
RUN setting time or longer when
4 time when engaging sec 0.0 0.0 25.0
engaging the brake.
brake
Error judgment is turned OFF at 0.00.
The brake command and brake
Brake answer error answer do not match for the set time or
5 sec 0.0 0.0 25.0
judgment time longer, and a fault stoppage occurs.
Error judgment is turned OFF at 0.00.
B47 – Simple ASR control
f0: Simple ASR selection
=1: OFF =2: ON
Simple ASR control f1: Integral mask processing when
0 – 21. 11. 22.
selection accelerating / decelerating
=1: OFF =2: ON
(Note)
Simple ASR Set with response for machine time
1 – 0.10 0.00 10.00
proportional gain constant of 1s.
Simple ASR integral Set the simple ASR integral time
2 s 1.00 0.00 10.00
time constant constant.
Proportional variation Set the proportional variation rate
3 % 1.00 0.01 50.00
rate limit control value.
Compensation torque Set the slippage compensation limit
4 % 100.0 0.1 300.0
limiter value.
Simple ASR pole
5 – 4. 2. 32. Set the motor pole count.
count
Simple ASR pulse
6 – 1000. 30. 10000. Set the encoder pulse count.
count
Note) f0 to f2 are indicated in the order of [f2 f1 f0.]. f0 indicates the least significant digit.

6 – 21
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (S/W option constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

B50 – Pattern run step-0

= 0 : Stop = 1 : Forward run
0 Mode 0. 0. 2.
= 2 : Reverse run
1 Frequency (speed) % 10.00 0.00 100.00
2 Time sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0
B51 – Pattern run step-1
= 0 : Stop = 1 : Forward run
0 Mode 0. 0. 2.
= 2 : Reverse run
1 Frequency (speed) % 10.00 0.00 100.00
2 Time sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0
B52 – Pattern run step-2
0 Mode 0. 0. 3. = 0 : Stop = 1 : Forward run
1 Frequency (speed) % 10.00 0.00 100.00 = 2 : Reverse run = 3 : Return
2 Time sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0
3 Return destination step 0. 0. 1.
B53 – Pattern run step-3
0 Mode 0. 0. 3. = 0 : Stop = 1 : Forward run
1 Frequency (speed) % 10.00 0.00 100.00 = 2 : Reverse run = 3 : Return
2 Time sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0
3 Return destination step 0. 0. 2.
B54 – Pattern run step-4
0 Mode 0. 0. 3. = 0 : Stop = 1 : Forward run
1 Frequency (speed) % 10.00 0.00 100.00 = 2 : Reverse run = 3 : Return
2 Time sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0
3 Return destination step 0. 0. 3.
B55 – Pattern run step-5
0 Mode 0. 0. 3. = 0 : Stop = 1 : Forward run
1 Frequency (speed) % 10.00 0.00 100.00 = 2 : Reverse run = 3 : Return
2 Time sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0
3 Return destination step 0. 0. 4.
B56 – Pattern run step-6
0 Mode 0. 0. 3. = 0 : Stop = 1 : Forward run
1 Frequency (speed) % 10.00 0.00 100.00 = 2 : Reverse run = 3 : Return
2 Time sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0
3 Return destination step 0. 0. 5.
B57 – Pattern run step-7
0 Mode 0. 0. 3. = 0 : Stop = 1 : Forward run
1 Frequency (speed) % 10.00 0.00 100.00 = 2 : Reverse run = 3 : Return
2 Time sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0
3 Return destination step 0. 0. 6.
B58 – Pattern run step-8
0 Mode 0. 0. 3. = 0 : Stop = 1 : Forward run
1 Frequency (speed) % 10.00 0.00 100.00 = 2 : Reverse run = 3 : Return
2 Time sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0
3 Return destination step 0. 0. 7.
B59 – Pattern run step-9
0 Mode 0. 0. 3. = 0 : Stop = 1 : Forward run
1 Frequency (speed) % 10.00 0.00 100.00 = 2 : Reverse run = 3 : Return
2 Time sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0
3 Return destination step 0. 0. 8.

6 – 22
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (S/W option constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

B60 – Spinning frame operation setting

0 STP function selection – 0. 0. 1. =0: Not selected =1: Selected
1 STP0 step count – 14. 0. 14. Set the step number to STP0.
2 STP1 step count – 14. 0. 14. Set the step number to STP1.
3 STP2 step count – 14. 0. 14. Set the step number to STP2.
4 STP3 step count – 14. 0. 14. Set the step number to STP3.
Outputs alarm signal for the set time
5 Doff-End alarm time sec 1.0 0.1 3000.0 from completion of the final step until
directly before stoppage.
1=×1, 2=×10
This is valid for the STP time (B63, 64,
6 STP time unit setting – 1. 1. 2.
67, 68, 71, 72, 75, 76) and Doff alarm
time (B60-5).
This is the Hank count calculation
7 Hank count gain – 1.000 0.001 30.000
gain.
8 Hank count gain unit – 1. 1. 3. =1: ×1.0, =2: ×0.1, =3: ×10
B61 – STP0 frequency
0 STP0 frequency 0 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP0 step 0 frequency.
1 STP0 frequency 1 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP0 step 1 frequency.
2 STP0 frequency 2 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP0 step 2 frequency.
3 STP0 frequency 3 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP0 step 3 frequency.
4 STP0 frequency 4 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP0 step 4 frequency.
5 STP0 frequency 5 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP0 step 5 frequency.
6 STP0 frequency 6 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP0 step 6 frequency.
7 STP0 frequency 7 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP0 step 7 frequency.
B62 – STP0 frequency
0 STP0 frequency 8 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP0 step 8 frequency.
1 STP0 frequency 9 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP0 step 9 frequency.
2 STP0 frequency 10 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP0 step 10 frequency.
3 STP0 frequency 11 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP0 step 11 frequency.
4 STP0 frequency 12 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP0 step 12 frequency.
5 STP0 frequency 13 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP0 step 13 frequency.
6 STP0 frequency 14 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP0 step 14 frequency.
B63 – STP0 time
0 STP0 time 0 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP0 step 0 time.
1 STP0 time 1 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP0 step 1 time.
2 STP0 time 2 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP0 step 2 time.
3 STP0 time 3 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP0 step 3 time.
4 STP0 time 4 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP0 step 4 time.
5 STP0 time 5 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP0 step 5 time.
6 STP0 time 6 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP0 step 6 time.
7 STP0 time 7 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP0 step 7 time.
B64 – STP0 time
0 STP0 time 8 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP0 step 8 time.
1 STP0 time 9 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP0 step 9 time.
2 STP0 time 10 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP0 step 10 time.
3 STP0 time 11 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP0 step 11 time.
4 STP0 time 12 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP0 step 12 time.
5 STP0 time 13 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP0 step 13 time.
6 STP0 time 14 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP0 step 14 time.

6 – 23
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (S/W option constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

B65 – STP1 frequency

0 STP1 frequency 0 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP1 step 0 frequency.
1 STP1 frequency 1 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP1 step 1 frequency.
2 STP1 frequency 2 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP1 step 2 frequency.
3 STP1 frequency 3 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP1 step 3 frequency.
4 STP1 frequency 4 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP1 step 4 frequency.
5 STP1 frequency 5 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP1 step 5 frequency.
6 STP1 frequency 6 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP1 step 6 frequency.
7 STP1 frequency 7 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP1 step 7 frequency.
B66 – STP1 frequency
0 STP1 frequency 8 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP1 step 8 frequency.
1 STP1 frequency 9 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP1 step 9 frequency.
2 STP1 frequency 10 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP1 step 10 frequency.
3 STP1 frequency 11 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP1 step 11 frequency.
4 STP1 frequency 12 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP1 step 12 frequency.
5 STP1 frequency 13 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP1 step 13 frequency.
6 STP1 frequency 14 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP1 step 14 frequency.
B67 – STP1 time
0 STP1 time 0 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP1 step 0 time.
1 STP1 time 1 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP1 step 1 time.
2 STP1 time 2 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP1 step 2 time.
3 STP1 time 3 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP1 step 3 time.
4 STP1 time 4 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP1 step 4 time.
5 STP1 time 5 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP1 step 5 time.
6 STP1 time 6 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP1 step 6 time.
7 STP1 time 7 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP1 step 7 time.
B68 – STP1 time
0 STP1 time 8 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP1 step 8 time.
1 STP1 time 9 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP1 step 9 time.
2 STP1 time 10 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP1 step 10 time.
3 STP1 time 11 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP1 step 11 time.
4 STP1 time 12 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP1 step 12 time.
5 STP1 time 13 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP1 step 13 time.
6 STP1 time 14 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP1 step 14 time.

6 – 24
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (S/W option constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

B69 – STP2 frequency

0 STP2 frequency 0 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP2 step 0 frequency.
1 STP2 frequency 1 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP2 step 1 frequency.
2 STP2 frequency 2 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP2 step 2 frequency.
3 STP2 frequency 3 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP2 step 3 frequency.
4 STP2 frequency 4 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP2 step 4 frequency.
5 STP2 frequency 5 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP2 step 5 frequency.
6 STP2 frequency 6 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP2 step 6 frequency.
7 STP2 frequency 7 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP2 step 7 frequency.
B70 – STP2 frequency
0 STP2 frequency 8 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP2 step 8 frequency.
1 STP2 frequency 9 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP2 step 9 frequency.
2 STP2 frequency 10 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP2 step 10 frequency.
3 STP2 frequency 11 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP2 step 11 frequency.
4 STP2 frequency 12 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP2 step 12 frequency.
5 STP2 frequency 13 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP2 step 13 frequency.
6 STP2 frequency 14 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP2 step 14 frequency.
B71 – STP2 time
0 STP2 time 0 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP2 step 0 time.
1 STP2 time 1 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP2 step 1 time.
2 STP2 time 2 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP2 step 2 time.
3 STP2 time 3 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP2 step 3 time.
4 STP2 time 4 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP2 step 4 time.
5 STP2 time 5 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP2 step 5 time.
6 STP2 time 6 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP2 step 6 time.
7 STP2 time 7 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP2 step 7 time.
B72 – STP2 time
0 STP2 time 8 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP2 step 8 time.
1 STP2 time 9 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP2 step 9 time.
2 STP2 time 10 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP2 step 10 time.
3 STP2 time 11 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP2 step 11 time.
4 STP2 time 12 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP2 step 12 time.
5 STP2 time 13 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP2 step 13 time.
6 STP2 time 14 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP2 step 14 time.

6 – 25
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-B parameters (S/W option constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

B73 – STP3 frequency

0 STP3 frequency 0 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP3 step 0 frequency.
1 STP3 frequency 1 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP3 step 1 frequency.
2 STP3 frequency 2 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP3 step 2 frequency.
3 STP3 frequency 3 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP3 step 3 frequency.
4 STP3 frequency 4 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP3 step 4 frequency.
5 STP3 frequency 5 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP3 step 5 frequency.
6 STP3 frequency 6 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP3 step 6 frequency.
7 STP3 frequency 7 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP3 step 7 frequency.
B74 – STP3 frequency
0 STP3 frequency 8 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP3 step 8 frequency.
1 STP3 frequency 9 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP3 step 9 frequency.
2 STP3 frequency 10 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP3 step 10 frequency.
3 STP3 frequency 11 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP3 step 11 frequency.
4 STP3 frequency 12 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP3 step 12 frequency.
5 STP3 frequency 13 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP3 step 13 frequency.
6 STP3 frequency 14 % 10.00 0.00 100.00 Set the STP3 step 14 frequency.
B75 – STP3 time
0 STP3 time 0 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP3 step 0 time.
1 STP3 time 1 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP3 step 1 time.
2 STP3 time 2 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP3 step 2 time.
3 STP3 time 3 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP3 step 3 time.
4 STP3 time 4 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP3 step 4 time.
5 STP3 time 5 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP3 step 5 time.
6 STP3 time 6 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP3 step 6 time.
7 STP3 time 7 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP3 step 7 time.
B76 – STP3 time
0 STP3 time 8 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP3 step 8 time.
1 STP3 time 9 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP3 step 9 time.
2 STP3 time 10 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP3 step 10 time.
3 STP3 time 11 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP3 step 11 time.
4 STP3 time 12 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP3 step 12 time.
5 STP3 time 13 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP3 step 13 time.
6 STP3 time 14 sec 1.0 0.1 6000.0 Set the STP3 step 14 time.

6 – 26
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-4 Block-C parameters

The Block-C parameters are divided into the basic functions, extended functions and hardware option
functions.

Block-C parameters (Basic function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

C00 – Control methods

Run command method is set.
= 1 : F･RUN, R･RUN
Run command = 2 : RUN, REV
0 1. 1. 3. = 3 : Self hold
method
(Pulse inputs for F･RUN and
R･RUN)
Set the stopping method for RUN
operation.
1 Run/stop methods 2. 1. 2.
= 1 : Coast to stop
= 2 : Ramp down to stop
Set the stopping method for JOG
operation.
2 Jog stop method 2. 1. 2.
= 1 : Coast to stop
= 2 : Ramp down to stop
Emergency stop input logic is set.
Emergency stop
3 1. 1. 2. = 1 : Close to stop
(EMS) input logic
= 2 : Open to stop
Set the stopping method for the
emergency stop.
= 1 : Coast to stop without a fault
Emergency stop
4 1. 1. 3. output
(EMS) mode
= 2 : Coast to stop with a fault
output
= 3 : Ramp down to stop
Set whether to validate the remote
Control source
auxiliary operation sequence for the
5 switchover method 1. 1. 2.
local operation mode.
(J1 setting)
= 1 : Disables = 2 : Enables
Select the No. of auxiliary operation
Control source sequence input points when the COP
6 switchover method 1. 1. 2. command is ON.
(J2 setting) = 1 : Terminal block input
= 2 : Serial input
The conditions for turning the
Run contact output sequence RUN output ON are set.
7 1. 1. 2.
condition selection = 1 : ON at pre-excitation
= 2 : OFF at pre-excitation
C01 – Start/stop frequency
0 Start frequency Hz 1.0 0.1 60.0
Stop frequency
1 Hz 1.0 0.1 60.0
(DC brake start)

6 – 27
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-C parameters (Basic function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

C02 – Various setting input selection

= 1 : Analog fixed
Speed setting input
0 4. 1. 4. = 2 : Serial/parallel fixed
points selection
= 3 : Panel fixed = 4 : Sequence
Traverse center
= 1 : Analog fixed = 2 : Panel fixed
1 frequency input points 2. 1. 3.
= 3 : Sequence
selection
= 1 : Analog fixed
Torque setting input
2 3. 1. 4. = 2 : Serial fixed = 3 : Panel fixed
points selection
= 4 : Sequence
Torque ratio 1 setting = 1 : Serial fixed = 2 : Panel fixed
3 2. 1. 3.
input points selection = 3 : Sequence
= 1 : Analog fixed
Torque bias 1 setting
4 3. 1. 4. = 2 : Serial fixed = 3 : Panel fixed
input points selection
= 4 : Sequence
Torque ratio 2 setting = 1 : Serial fixed = 2 : Panel fixed
5 2. 1. 3.
input points selection = 3 : Sequence
Drive/regenerative
= 1 : Analog fixed = 2 : Serial fixed
6 torque limit input 3. 1. 3.
= 3 : Sequence
points selection
ASR response input = 1 : Serial fixed = 2 : Panel fixed
7 2. 1. 3.
points selection = 3 : Sequence
Machine time
= 1 : Serial fixed = 2 : Panel fixed
8 constant input points 2. 1. 3.
= 3 : Sequence
selection

6 – 28
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-C parameters (Basic function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE
C03 – Sequence input terminal function – 1
0 R·RUN Reverse run 1.
1 F·JOG Forward jogging 2.
2 R·JOG Reverse jogging 3.
3 HOLD Hold signal 0.
4 BRAKE DC brake 0.
COP Serial transmis- 0. 16. Value Input terminal
5 0.
sion selection 0 OFF fixed
6 CSEL Ramp selection 0. 1 PSI1
IPASS Ratio interlock 2 PSI2
7 0.
bypass 3 PSI3
8 PIDEN PID control selection 0. 4 PSI4
9 PRST STP reset 0. 5 PSI5
C04 – Sequence input terminal function – 2 6 PSI6
0 CPASS Ramp bypass 0. 7 PSI7
1 VFS Speed setting 1 16. 8 PSI8
9 PSI9
2 IFS Speed setting 2 0.
10 PL0 C16-0
3 AUX Speed setting 3 0.
11 1 C16-1
PROG Program function 12 2 C16-2
4 0.
enable
13 3 C16-3
CFS Serial
5 communica- 0. 14 EMS
tion setting select 0. 16. 15 RUN
S0 Program setting 16 ON fixed
6 0.
selection
S1 Program setting To use PSI6 to PSI9, the relay
7 0.
selection interface option must be provided.
S2 Program setting PL0 to 3 is programmable input.
8 0.
selection Input is ON when corresponding
S3 Program setting sequence output is ON.
9 0.
selection
C05 – Sequence input terminal function – 3
SE Program setting
0 0.
selection

1 FUP Frequency (speed)

0.
increase

2 FDW Frequency (speed)

0.
decrease
BUP Ratio interlock
3 0.
bias increase
BDW Ratio interlock
4 0. 0. 16.
bias decrease
IVLM Ratio interlock bias
5 increase/decrease 0.
selection
AUXDV Auxiliary drive
6 0.
selection
7 PICK Pick-up 0.
8 EXC Pre-excitation 0.
9 ACR ACR 0.
C06 – Sequence input terminal function – 4
0 PCTL P control 0.
LIM1 Drive torque limiter
1 0.
changeover

2 LIM2 Regenerative torque

0.
limiter changeover

3 MCH Machine time

0.
constant changeover
4 RF0 0 setting 0.
5 DROOP Drooping changeover 0. 0. 16.
6 DEDB Dead band setting 0.
7 TRQB1 Torque bias setting 1 0.
8 TRQB2 Torque bias setting 2 0.
MBRK_ans
9 0.
External brake answer
A S5 Digital torque bias 1 0.
B S6 Digital torque bias 2 0.
C S7 Digital torque bias 3 0.

6 – 29
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-C parameters (Basic function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

C07 – Analog input terminal function

0 Speed setting 1 2. 0. 7.
1 Speed setting 2 3. 0. 7. Value Input terminal
2 Speed setting 3 0. 0. 7. 0 0% fixed
Ratio interlock bias 1 100% fixed
3 0. 0. 7.
setting 2 FSV
Traverse center 3 FSI
4 0. 0. 7.
frequency 4 AUX
5 PID feedback 0. 0. 7. 5 PAI4 (OP)
6 PAI5 (OP)
6 Torque setting 0. 0. 7.
7 PAI6 (OP)
Drive torque limiter
7 1. 0. 7. PAI4 to PAI6 are for future.
reduction setting
Regenerative torque
8 limiter reduction 1. 0. 7.
setting
9 Torque bias 1 setting 0. 0. 7.
Analog torque bias
A 0. 0. 7.
setting
C08 – Automatic start setting
= 1 : off
Auto start = 2 : on without pick-up
0 1. 1. 3.
(To F·RUN/R·RUN) = 3 : on with pick-up (re-start after a
momentary power loss)
C09 – Parameter protection/operation locks
Set to prevent unintentional operation
from the operation panel (OPU).
0 Parameter protection 1. 1. 9. Set whether to enable or prohibit data
changing for each parameter function
unit as shown above.

Parameter protection: Block B, C

value Block A
Basic Extn. S/W H/W
: Unprotected 1
(changeable)
× : Protected 2 × × × × ×
(unchangeable) 3 × × × ×
4 × × ×
5 × ×
6
7~8 × × × × ×
9

= 1 : Enable control from Operation

Panel
= 2 : Disable control from Operation
1 Operation panel lock 1. 1. 3. Panel (except for STOP key , if
pressed for 2 seconds, will stop
the drive)
= 3 : Only STOP key is available
= 1 : Disables switchover while the
LCL switchover drive is running
2 1. 1. 2.
protection = 2 : Enables switchover while the
drive is running
Set this to prevent unintentional
reverse run operation.
When set to "2", the sequence input
"R RUN" operation command will be
Reveres run
disabled.
3 sequence (R·RUN) 1. 1. 2.
Note that if the reverse run setting
prohibit
(negative value) is input into the
speed setting during "F·RUN”
operation, reverse run will start.
= 1 : Enable = 2 : Prohibit

6 – 30
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-C parameters (Basic function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

C09 – Parameter protection/operation locks

Set this to prevent unintentional
reverse jogging operation.
When set to “2”, the “R·JOG”
Reverse run jogging operation command will be disabled.
4 sequence (R JOG) 1. 1. 2. Note that if the reverse run setting
prohibit (negative value) is input into the
jogging setting during “F·JOG”
operation, reverse run will start.
= 1 : Enable = 2 : Prohibit
Set this to prevent unintentional
reverse run operation.
When set to “2”, reverse run during
ACR operation will be prohibited.
Reverse run during The reverse run speed will be limited
5 1. 1. 2. to approx. 1% if reverse run is started.
ACR mode prohibit
This setting is ignored in the V/f
mode.
= 1 : Enable
= 2 : Prohibit
Set 1 for the setting value to clear the
fault history details.
Fault history buffer
6 0. 0 9999 The clearing operation will not take
clear
place at a setting other than 1.
1: Clear fault history
9: All default values load (excluding
maintenance)
10: Parameter A
11: Parameters B, C basic functions
12: Parameters B, C extended
functions
13: Parameter B software option
function
Parameter C hardware option
7 Default value load 0. 0 9999
function
14: Parameters B basic functions
15: Parameters B extended functions
16: Parameter B software option
function
17: Parameters C basic functions
18: Parameters C extended functions
19: Parameter C hardware option
function
C10 – Custom parameter register
0 Custom – 0 1.99.9 1.00.0 2.99.9 Set for each parameter No. to be
1 –1 displayed and changed as an A04-0
Parameter to 7 custom parameter.
2 –2
number Example) To set B13-0 (torque
3 –3 setting), set as 1.13.0.
Block number
4 –4
5 –5 1: Block B
6 –6 2: Block C
7 –7

6 – 31
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-C parameters (Basic function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE
C11 – Operation panel mode setting
The initial operation mode for when
0 Initial mode 1. 1. 2. the power is turned ON is set
= 1 : Local = 2 : Remote
The initial operation mode for when
the power is turned ON, if using the
automatic start function (when C08-0
=2 or 3) during the local operation
mode (operation from operation
1 Run command status 1. 1. 3. panel) is set.
If =2 is set, forward run will start when
the run enable state is entered after
the power is turned ON.
= 1 : Stop = 2 : Forward run
= 3 : Reverse run
Used to prevent changes to the
Operation panel frequency/rotation count settings in
2 frequency change 1. 1. 2. real time.
operation =1: Change in real time
=2: Change using the Set key.
Set the monitor parameter No. to be
Operation panel
3 0.0 0.0 99.9 displayed initially when the power is
monitor parameter
turned ON.
C12 – Setting input terminal function
FSV terminal input
0 1. 1. 3. = 1: 0 ~ 10V, = 2: 0 ~ 5V, = 3: 1 ~ 5V
mode
1 FSI terminal input mode 1. 1. 2. = 1: 4 ~ 20mA, = 2: 0 ~ 20mA
AUX terminal input
2 1. 1. 3. = 1: 0 ~ ±10V,= 2: 0 ~ ±5V,=3: 1 ~ 5V
mode
Filter time constant for
3 FSV/FSI and AUX 1. 1. 2. = 1: 8ms = 2: 32ms
input
4 AUX input gain 1.000 0.000 5.000
Program setting input with set terminal
5 Program setting filter sec 0.01 0.00 1.00 batch filer processing. (Setting to
prevent errors cause by chattering)
C13 – Output terminal function
0 FM output parameters 0. 0. 15. Select the setting value from the
1 AM output parameters 3. 0. 15. following table, and output.
The terminal voltage can be changed
freely with parameters C14-0.1
Value Parameter Terminal voltage Value Parameter Terminal voltage
0 Output frequency 10V at Max. frequency OLT monitor
8 10V at 100%
Setting frequency 10V at Max. frequency (unit protection)
1
Setting speed 10V at Max. speed 9 Heat sink temperature 10V at 100°C
10V at Max. frequency 10 Motor speed 10V at Max. speed
2 Ramp output
10V at Max. speed 11 Torque current 5V at Motor rated current
3 Output current (Motor) 5V at Motor rated current 12 Excitation current 5V at Motor rated current
4 Output current (Drive) 5V at drive rated current Actual motor rotation
13 10V at Max. speed
5 Output voltage 10V at Motor rated voltage speed
5V at (Rated output voltage 14 Namp output 10V at Rated torque
6 Motor output power
× Motor rated current) OLT monitor
15 10V at 100%
5V at 300V (200V Series) (motor protection)
7 DC voltage
5V at 600V (400V Series)

RC-RA output
2 0. 0. 29.
parameters
Select the setting value from the
3 PSO1 output parameters 3. 0. 29.
following table, and output.
4 PSO2 output parameters 7. 0. 29.
5 PSO3 output parameters 8. 0. 29.

Value Output Output Output Output

signal Value Value Value
signal signal signal
0 RUN 8 ATN 16 ACC 24 ULMT
1 FLT 9 SPD1 17 DCC 25 Doff-End
2 MC 10 SPD2 18 AUXDV 26 MBRK
3 RDY1 11 COP 19 ALM 27 DVER
4 RDY2 12 EC0 20 FAN 28 BPF
5 LCL 13 EC1 21 ASW 29 RDELAY
6 REV 14 EC2 22 ZSP
7 IDET 15 EC3 23 LLMT

6 – 32
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-C parameters (Basic function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

C14 – Meter output gain

0 Output gain for FM 1.00 0.20 2.00 10V at Max. frequency when this is
set to 1.00.
1 Output gain for AM 1.00 0.20 2.00 5V at the rated current when this is
set to 1.00. (Max. 11V)
Random scale display Set the coefficient for the D00-4 and
2 30.00 0.01 100.00
coefficient D01-5 random scale display.
Set an offset of 5V to enable plus
3 FM output offset V 0.00 0.00 8.00 minus output of parameters with
symbols in a 0~10V range, with 5V as
4 AM output offset V 0.00 0.00 8.00 the center. Set 0.00 for absolute value
output.
FSV random scale Analog output: FSV dedicated random
5 30.00 0.01 100.00
coefficient scale coefficient
FSI random scale Analog output: FSI dedicated random
6 30.00 0.01 100.00
coefficient scale coefficient
AUX random scale Analog output: AUX dedicated
7 30.00 0.01 100.00
coefficient random scale coefficient
C15 – Status output detection level
Attainment (ATN) The attained output (ATN) operation
0 % 1.0 0.0 20.0
detection width width is set.
Current (IDET) The current detection (IDET)
1 % 100. 5. 300.
detection level operation level is set.
Speed detection
2 % 95.0 1.0 105.0
(SPD1) level – 1 The speed detection (SPD1, SPD2)
Speed detection operation level is set.
3 % 50.0 1.0 105.0
(SPD2) level – 2
Zero speed detection The zero speed detection (ZSP)
4 % 1.00 0.00 50.00
(ZSP) level operation level is set.
Set the delay time for RDELAY
5 RDELAY delay time sec 1.0 0.0 1000.0
output.
C16 – PL input parameters
0 PL0 input selection 7. 0. 29.
The signal selected from the following
1 PL1 input selection 8. 0. 29.
table is assigned to 10 to 13 of the
2 PL2 input selection 9. 0. 29. sequence input.
3 PL3 input selection 10. 0. 29.

Value Output Output Output Output

signal Value Value Value
signal signal signal
0 RUN 8 ATN 16 ACC 24 ULMT
1 FLT 9 SPD1 17 DCC 25 Doff-End
2 MC 10 SPD2 18 AUXDV 26 MBRK
3 RDY1 11 COP 19 ALM 27 DVER
4 RDY2 12 EC0 20 FAN 28 BPF
5 LCL 13 EC1 21 ASW 29 RDELAY
6 REV 14 EC2 22 ZSP
7 IDET 15 EC3 23 LLMT

6 – 33
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-C parameters (Extended function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

C20 – Start interlock

Start/stop frequency The motor will stop when below this
0 % 0.0 0.0 20.0
(speed) frequency setting.
Start/stop frequency
1 % 1.0 0.0 20.0
(speed) hysteresis
The motor will not start when the
setting is above this frequency.
(When using with the setting start, set
a value that is larger than the setting
Interlock frequency
2 % 0.0 0.0 20.0 start frequency.)
(speed)
When C20-0=0, the setting start/stop
will not operate.
When C20-2=0, the setting interlock
will not operate.
3 RUN delay timer sec 0.00 0.00 10.00
C21 – Retry/pick-up
0 Number of retries 0. 0. 10.
1 Retry wait time sec 5. 1. 30.
2 Pick-up wait time sec 2.0 0.5 10.0
Pick-up current limit Do not set a value less than the
3 % 100. 50. 300.
value excitation current.
C22 – Overload
Note that when this parameter is
Motor overload changed, Parameters C22-1 and
0 % 100. 50. 105.
reference C22-2 will automatically be adjusted
to the value of this setting.
The maximum value is as set on
1 0Hz overload % 100. 20. 105.
C22-2.
The minimum value is as set on
2 0.7Base freq.overload % 100. 50. 105.
C22-1.
This parameter is for setting %ED of
DBR operation. When DBR transistor
or DBR built in the unit is used, set
the parameter within the specification.
3 DBR overload % 1.6 0.0 10.0
When 0.0 is set, the protection
function is disabled. When the
external DBR unit is used, set to 0.0.
(Note 1)
This function is valid when control
Motor power loss mode selection is C30=1,2 or auxiliary
4 % 50. 0. 70.
braking setting drive is selected and DB option
selection is C31-0=3,4
Set the trip overload breakdown
reference at 1 minute. A breakdown
Motor overload
5 % 150.0 110.0 300.0 stoppage (OL-3) will occur after 1
breakdown reference
minute with the motor rated reference
current value at this value.
C22-0~2: The max. value differs according to the load characteristic selection (C30-0).
When C30-0=2 (when variable torque is selected), these max. value is 100.
C23 – Start/stop frequency, Overload (Auxiliary drive)
0 Start frequency Hz 1.0 0.1 60.0
Stop frequency
1 Hz 1.0 0.1 60.0
(DC brake start)
Note that when this parameter is
changed, Parameters C23-3, 4 will
2 Overload setting % 100. 50. 105.
automatically be adjusted to the value
of this setting.
The maximum value is as set on
3 0Hz overload % 100. 20. 105.
C23-4.
The minimum value is as set on
4 0.7Base freq.overload % 100. 50. 105.
C23-3.

6 – 34
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-C parameters (Extended function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

C24 – Speed detection error monitor

Over speed protection The over speed protection operation
0 % 105.0 20.0 200.0
level level is set.
Select control at speed detection error
= 1 : Speed detection error not
monitored
= 2 : Speed detection error
monitored (Do not change to
sensorless vector control)
= 3 : Speed detection error
monitored (Switch to sensor-
Control mode
less vector control)
1 changeover during 1. 1. 3.
Set whether to monitor speed
speed detection error
detection errors, such as wire
breakage of the speed detector
circuit, and to change over from
vector control to sensorless vector
control.
There will be no switch to sensorless
control for other than vector control
(C30-0=4). In this case, select 1 or 2.
Speed detection error
2 % 10.0 10.0 100.0 The conditions for judging the speed
level
detection error are set.
Speed detection error Set as C24-2 ≥ C24-3.
3 % 5.0 1.0 100.0
recovery level
Select speed deviation control error.
= 1: No error monitoring performed,
Control mode no ALM output, no FLT output
4 changeover during 1. 1. 3. = 2: Error monitoring performed, no
speed deviation error ALM output, FLT output performed
= 3: Error monitoring performed, ALM
output performed, no FLT output
Speed deviation error Set the error judgment command and
5 % 10.0 1.0 50.0
level the deviation level for detection.
Speed deviation error Set the time for judging speed
6 sec 10.0 0.1 20.0
judgment time deviation.
C25 – High-efficiency operation
Set the time for the output voltage to
0 Voltage reduction time sec 10.0 0.1. 30.0
drop from the V/f setting value to 0V.
Voltage lower limit When selecting a high-efficiency
1 % 100. 50. 100.
setting value operation function, set 50 to 99.
=1 : ON / OFF control is enabled. FAN
Cooling fan ON/OFF
is ON when inverter runs.
2 control 2. 1. 2.
=2 : ON / OFF control is disabled.
(Note 1)
FAN is always ON.
Note 1) Cooling fan ON/0FF control doesn't operate in 011L∼045L,011H∼090H.

6 – 35
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-C parameters (Extended function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE
C26 – Standard serial transmission setting
The parameters with a mark below
can be changed.
Set- Block A Block B, C Parameter
ting Para-
value meter Basic Extend S/W H/W
Parameter change 1
0 1. 1. 5.
protection 2 × × × × ×
3 × × × ×
4 × × ×
5 × ×
: Changeable × : Unchangeable
1 Station No. 1. 0. 32 Set the local station No.
Set the minimum time from receiving
2 Response timer sec 0.00 0.00 2.00
command to returning an answer.
CN2 serial connection Standard serial communication via the
3 setting （Note 1） 0. 0. 1. CN2 connector is enabled when the
(Note 2) setting value is 0.
CN2 standard serial
4 communication baud bps 1. 1. 4. =1:4800 =2:9600 =3:14400 =4:19200
rate setting
CN2 standard serial
5 communication stop 2. 1. 2. =1:1bit =2:2bit
bit setting
CN2 standard serial
6 communication parity 3. 1. 3. =1:None =2:Even =3:Odd
setting
The power must be reset to apply the C26-4,5,6 parameters change.
Refer to instruction manual (ST-3443) for other details.
Note 1) C26-3 is available from ROM version (D21-3) 9320.1 and above.
Note 2) C26-3 has been deleted from CPU version 9319.0,ROM version 9320.3 and above.
(CN4:Panel dedicated,CN2:Standard serial dedicated)

6 – 36
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-C parameters (H/W option function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

C30 – Control mode selection

The control mode is set.
= 1 : V/f control (constant torque:
overload characteristics
150% for one minute.)
= 2 : V/f control (variable torque:
Control mode overload characteristics
0 — 1. 5.
selection 120% for one minute.)
= 3 : IM speed sensor-less vector
control
= 4 : IM speed vector control with
sensor
= 5 : PM motor control
C31 – Main circuit option selection
= 1 : Without motor power loss
braking, Without DB, With OVL
= 2 : Without motor power loss
braking, With DB, With OVL
= 3 : With motor power loss braking,
Without DB, With OVL
= 4 : With motor power loss braking,
With DB, With OVL
0 DBR option selection 1. 1. 8. = 5 : Without motor power loss
braking, Without DB,
Without OVL
= 6 : Without motor power loss
braking, With DB, Without OVL
= 7 : With motor power loss braking,
Without DB, Without OVL
= 8 : With motor power loss braking,
With DB, Without OVL
Ground fault detection
1 1. 1. 2. = 1 : Enabled = 2 : Disabled
function
C32 – PC (parallel) interface
= 1 : 16-bit strobe
0 Input mode (strobe) 1. 1. 3. = 2 : 8-bit time multiplexed strobe
= 3 : 16-bit sample
Input mode = 1 : 1 at opened circuit
1 1. 1. 2.
(input logic) = 2 : 1 at closed circuit
2 Data format 1. 0. 10. Set according to the following table.

Setting data Format Setting resolution Setting range

0 16-bit binary 0.01Hz/LSB (0.1rpm/LSB) 0 to 440.00Hz (0.0 to 6553.5rpm or Nmax)
1 16-bit binary 0.1Hz/LSB ( 1rpm/LSB) 440.0Hz (0 to Nmax rpm)
2 16-bit binary 0.01%/LSB 100.00%
3 16-bit binary 0.1%/LSB 100.0%
4 16-bit BCD 0.01Hz/LSB (0.1rpm/LSB) 99.99Hz (0.0 to 999.9rpm)
5 16-bit BCD 0.1 Hz/LSB ( 1rpm/LSB) 100.0Hz (0 to Nmax rpm)
6 16-bit BCD 0.01%/LSB 99.99%
7 16-bit BCD 0.1%/LSB 100.0%
8 8-bit binary 1/255% 100.0%
9 12-bit binary 1/4095% 100.0%
10 16-bit binary 1/65535% 100.0%
Hz = Frequency setting [For V/F control (constant torque, reduced torque) (C30-0 = 1, 2)]
rpm: Speed setting For IM speed sensor-less vector control (C30-0 = 3)
For IM speed vector control (C30-0 = 4)
For PM motor control (C30-0 = 5)

Set this when the PC interface option (V23-PI0) has been mounted.
Refer to the instruction manual (ST-3303) for other details.

6 – 37
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-C parameters (H/W option function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

C33 – Sequence output terminal function (Option)

0 PSO4 Output 5. 0. 28.
1 PSO5 Output 6. 0. 28.
2 PSO6 Output 7. 0. 28. Set this when the relay interface
3 PSO7 Output 8. 0. 28. option (V23-RY0) and PC interface
option (V23-PI0) are mounted.
4 PSO8 Output 9. 0. 28. Refer to Instruction Manual (ST-3259)
5 PSO9 Output 10. 0. 28. for other details.
6 PSO10 Output 11. 0. 28.
7 PSO11 Output 12. 0. 28.

Output Output Output Output

Value Value Value Value
signal signal signal signal
0 RUN 8 ATN 16 ACC 24 ULMT
1 FLT 9 SPD1 17 DCC 25 Doff-End
2 MC 10 SPD2 18 AUXDV 26 MBRK
3 RDY1 11 COP 19 ALM 27 DVER
4 RDY2 12 EC0 20 FAN 28 BPF
5 LCL 13 EC1 21 ASW 29 RDELAY
6 REV 14 EC2 22 ZSP
7 IDET 15 EC3 23 LLMT

C34 – Serial interface

= 1 : 300 = 4 : 2400
0 Baud rate [bps] 1. 1. 6. = 2 : 600 = 5 : 4800
= 6 : 1200 = 6 : 9600
1 Transmission system 1. 1. 2. =1:1:1 =2:1:N
2 Parity check 1. 1. 3. = 1 : None, = 2 : Even, = 3: Odd
The parameters with a mark below
can be changed.
Set- Block A Block B, C Parameter
ting Para-
value meter Basic Extend S/W H/W
Parameter change 1
3 1. 1. 5
protection 2 × × × × ×
3 × × × ×
4 × × ×
5 × ×
: Changeable × : Unchangeable
4 Station No. 1. 0. 32. Set the local station's station No.
Set the minimum time from receiving
5 Response timer sec 0.00 0.00 2.00
the command to returning an answer.
Set this when the serial interface option (V23-SL0) is mounted.
Refer to the instruction manual (ST-3261) for other details.
C35 – Field network interface (PROFIBUS/DeviceNet/CANopen/CC-Link)

0 Station number 1. 0. 126.

Transmission error =1 : Disable
1 1. 1. 2.
detection =2 : Enable (For future use)
Set C35-0 when the PROFIBUS interface option (V23-SL6) is mounted.
Refer to the instruction manual (PROFIBUS:ST-3263,DeviceNet:ST-3430,CANopen:ST-3432) for other details.
C38 – Field network interface (CC-Link)
Transmission version =1: Ver.1 Transmission setting
0 1. 1. 2.
changeover =2: Ver.2 (for future use)
1 HOLD/CLR 1. 1. 2. =1:CLR =2:HOLD
Set this when the CC-Link interfase option (V23-SL9) is mounted.
Refer to the instruction manual (ST-3434) for other details.

6 – 38
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Block-C parameters (H/W option function constants) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

C50 – Encoder setting

The pulse input from the encoder can
be divided in half, and output to an
external source from PAOUT and
Encoder pulse divided
0 4. 1. 1024. PBOUT on the speed detection PCB
output setting
(V23-DN1, -DN2).
Adjust the setting value so that the
output pulse is up to 70kHz.
= 1 : 2-phase input
= 2 : 1-phase input
Encoder output pulse When using vector control with speed
1 1. 1. 2.
No. selection sensor, set whether the number of
pulses input from the encoder is a
2-phase input or 1-phase input.
Encoder ABZ pulse Perform the A, B phase interchange,
2 0. 0. 15.
type selection and A, B, Z phase invert settings.
Table C50-2
A-IN1 B-IN1 Z-IN A-IN1 B-IN1 Z-IN
Setting Non Non Non AB inter- Setting Non Non Non AB inter-
No. invert invert invert change No. invert invert invert change
/ Invert / Invert / Invert / Invert / Invert / Invert
0 – – – 8 – – –
1 Invert – – 9 Invert – –
2 – Invert – 10 – Invert –
3 Invert Invert – No inter- 11 Invert Invert – AB inter-
4 – – Invert change 12 – – Invert change
5 Invert – Invert 13 Invert – Invert
6 – Invert Invert 14 – Invert Invert
7 Invert Invert Invert 15 Invert Invert Invert

A-IN1 Origin
AB interchangeable
Invert A
B-IN1
B
Invert
Z-IN Z
Invert During CCW rotation t

C51 – Encoder setting (PM)

Encoder UVW pulse
0 – 0 0 7. Refer to Table C51-0.
type selection
Z-IN → U phase
1 deg 0.0 0.0 359.9 Electrical angle from Z-IN to U phase
winding phase angle
2 Z-IN → U pulse angle deg 0.0 0.0 359.9 Electrical angle from Z-IN to u pulse
Table C51-0
U-IN V-IN W-IN
Setting Non Non Non UV inter-
No. invert invert invert change
/ Invert / Invert / Invert Invert
U-IN
0 – – – u
1 Invert – –
V-IN v
2 – Invert –
3 Invert Invert – No inter- W-IN w
4 – – Invert change
5 Invert – Invert During CCW rotation t
6 – Invert Invert
7 Invert Invert Invert

=0: Normal
AB phase-Z phase
3 – 0 0 1 =1: When the AB phase and Z phase
type selection
edge is identical

6 – 39
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-5 Block-U parameters

Block-U parameters (Utility mode) list

Application
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function
ST V/f VEC PM RWE

U00 – Parameter Control

The parameter copy function is

executed while the inverter is
stopped.
= 1001 : Save
The parameter data is saved
from the inverter to the
operation panel.
= 2002 : Load
The parameter data is
loaded from the operation
panel to the inverter.
If parameter data outside the
setting range, such as for a
different inverter capacity,
could be loaded, the settings
of the parameters not within
Parameter copy the setting range may be
0 0. 0. 9999. uncertain. In this case,
function
always turn the power OFF
and ON once.
If 。 appears when
the power is turned ON,
enter D20-2 and set the
uncertain data.
= 3003 : Verify check
The operation panel and
inverter parameter data
contents are verified and
checked.
If the parameters differ,
。 will appear.
= 4004 : Clear
The parameter data of
operation panel is cleared.

注 意

・Please do not detach the operation panel while the inverter power is ON. Please detach the
operation panel in the state of power supply OFF. When the operation panel is installed while
the inverter power is ON, the microcomputer of the inverter is occasionally reset.

6 – 40
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-6 Function explanation

A00-0 Local frequency setting

A00-2 Local speed setting
This is the frequency (speed) setting selected in the local operation mode ("LCL" LED lit).
The output frequency (speed) changes immediately according to the operation.
Refer to section 5-9-1 for details on selecting the speed setting.

A00-1 Frequency setting for jogging

A00-3 Speed setting for jogging
This is the frequency (speed) setting selected when executing jogging run with the
sequence command F JOG or R JOG.
An acceleration/deceleration time exclusive for jogging can be set with parameters B10-2
and 3.
B10-2: Acceleration ramp time for jogging
B10-3: Deceleration ramp time for jogging

A01-0, 1 Acceleration/deceleration times

A03-0, 1 DC brake
C01-0, 1 Start/stop frequency
(V/f control: C30-0 = 1, 2)
B00-4: Max. frequency

C01-0: Start frequency C01-1: Stop frequency

A03-0: DC braking voltageNote)

A01-0 A01-1
A03-1: DC braking time
Acceleration time Deceleration time

This is the acceleration/deceleration ramp time validated during normal use (when
sequence command CSEL is OFF). The inverter may trip if the set time is too short.
Increase the DC braking voltage in units of 1% or less at a time while monitoring the
output current. The inverter may trip if the setting is too high.
(Note) When automatic tuning is carried out, the DC braking voltage is automatically
adjusted.
(IM vector control : C30-0 = 3, 4)
(PM motor control : C30-0 = 5)
B01-4: Max. speed

C15-4: Zero speed detection level

A03-2: DC braking current

A01-0 A01-1
A03-1: DC braking time
Acceleration time Deceleration time

6 – 41
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

A02-0 Manual torque boost selection

When manual torque boost is selected, the manual torque boost setting will be valid
regardless of the automatic torque boost selection state.

A02-1 Automatic torque boost selection

When automatic torque boost is selected, the R1 drop compensation, slip compensation
and maximum torque boost functions will be valid.

(Note 1) To validate only the slip compensation function when manual torque boost is
selected, set all settings other than the slip compensation function (A02-5) to 0
(set A02-3, 4, 6 to 0).
(Note 2) The square reduction torque setting is always valid regardless of the torque
boost selection state.
To invalidate the square reduction torque setting, set (A02-3) to 0.

Torque boost selection block diagram

Automatic torque
boost selection
(A02-1)
Slip compensation
setting
(A02-5)
2:ON
1:OFF +
+ Overload limit Frequency
Set frequency function command
Manual torque
boost selection
Manual torque boost
(A02-0) + Voltage
setting V/f command
(A02-2)
2:ON + + +
1:OFF
Square reduction torque
setting
− +
(A02-3)

R1 drop compensation Automatic torque

setting boost selection
(A02-1)
(A02-4) +

Maximum torque boost + 2:ON

setting 1:OFF
(A02-6)

6 – 42
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

• Automatic torque boost function

The automatic torque boost function carries out voltage boosting and slip compensation using the
current detection value. This allows the torque to be improved when starting and at low speed
regions. By carrying out automatic turning, the gain, etc., for the automatic torque boost function will
be automatically adjusted. Using this function, a 200% starting torque can be output with the
Meidensha standard 3-phase induction motor during a 150% output current. Even with a motor that
cannot output a 200% torque due to design, the maximum torque of the motor can be output. The
main characteristics with the Meidensha standard 3-phase induction motor are shown below.

200
150
Output torque [%]

100
50
0
-50
-100
-150
-200
0 25 50 75 100
Motor speed [%]

<Meidensha standard 3-phase induction motor 1.5kW-4P>

CAUTION
• When using only manual torque boost, carry out automatic tuning (B19-0 = 1).
• When using automatic torque boost, always carry out automatic tuning (B19-0 = 2).
• The maximum torque is not output instantly. It takes approx. 3 seconds for the maximum torque to
be reached.
• If the motor vibrates abnormally, etc., the automatic torque boost cannot be used.
• If the parameters automatically set with automatic tuning are set manually, the motor rotation could
become unstable.
• With a motor with which the base frequency greatly exceeds the commercial frequency, or with a
motor with a large constant output range, the rotation may be unstable and a sufficient torque may
not be output.
• When outputting the maximum torque continuously, consider the heat generated on the motor side,
etc.

A02-2 Manual torque boost setting [%]

This is automatically set by automatic tuning.

When setting manually, set the boost voltage at 0Hz as a percentage in respect to the
rated output voltage (B00-3).

6 – 43
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

A02-3 Square reduction torque setting [%]

Set the reduction torque at the Voltage with no torque boost

base frequency (B00-5)/2 as a Voltage with manual torque boost
percentage in respect to the Voltage Voltage at square reduction torque
Added voltage
rated output voltage (B00-3).

A02-3

A02-2
Frequency
Base frequency/2 Base frequency
(B00-5)

(Note) When both A02-2 and A02-3 are set, the voltage will be added as shown below.

A02-4 R1 drop compensation gain [%]

Set how much to compensate the voltage drop caused by R1 (B02-0, 1: Motor primary
resistance value) measured with automatic tuning. Normally set 100% of the default value.

(Note 1) If set too low, the sufficient torque may not be attained.

A02-5 Slip compensation gain [%]

This is automatically set by

auto-matic tuning.
Output frequency
When setting manually, set the
slip frequency for the motor rated
load as a percentage in respect
to the base frequency (B00-5).
The output frequency changes
according to the motor rated Load torque
torque as shown below.

Time

(Note 1) The output frequency will respond with a time constant of approx. 500ms in
respect to the changes in the load torque.
(Note 2) When set too high, the motor rotation could become instable.

A02-6 Maximum torque boost gain [%]

This is automatically set by automatic tuning.

The optimum boost value for outputting the maximum torque is set as a percentage in
respect to the rated output voltage (B00-3).
Normally, a value of 10 to 30% is set by automatic tuning.

(Note 1) When adjusted manually, the sufficient torque may not be attained.
(Note 2) If set too high, the rotation may become unstable and may trip.

6 – 44
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

A04-0~7 Custom parameters

C10-0~7: The parameters selected with the custom parameter selection can be displayed.
Refer to section 4-7 for details.

A05-0~2 Block B, C parameter skip

The parameter display is skipped for each function in the extended functions, software
option functions and hardware option functions.
Unnecessary displays can be reduced with this parameter, allowing operation to be
simplified.
All displays are set to skip as the default.

A10-0 ASR response

This is used to calculate the gain of the ASR.

ASR gain :
Machine time constant (A10-1 or B15-0) [ms]
Kp = ASR response (A10-0) [rad/s] × 1000
ASR integral time constant :
4 Compensation coefficient (A10-0)[%]
Ti = ASR response (A10-0) [rad/s] × 100

A10-1 Machine constant − 1

This is used to calculate the ASR gain. This is valid when the sequence input machine
time constant changeover is OFF (MCH = OFF).
Tm : Machine time constant
10.97ｘJ [kgm2]ｘ(Nbase[min−1])2 J : Total inertia (=1/4ＸGD2[kgfm2])
Tm [msec] = Power [W] Nbase : Base speed
Power : Motor rated output

A10-3 ASR drive torque limiter

A10-4 ASR regenerative torque limiter
A10-5 Emergency stop regenerative torque limiter
A11-2 ACR drive torque limiter
A11-3 ACR regenerative torque limiter

The output current is limited by the overcurrent limit value (B18-0) so the torque may not
be generated to the value set with this parameter.

√(Exciting current) ＋ (Torque current)

2 2

× 100 ≤ B18-0
Motor rated current (B01-6)

6 – 45
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B00-7
Carrier frequency
B01-7

The PWM carrier frequency and control method can be changed to change the tone of
the magnetic sound generated from the motor. The relation of the setting range and
control method is shown below.

1) For 0P4H∼045H, 0P4L∼037L

1.0 to 15.0 : Mono sound method (Actual carrier frequency: 1.0 to 15.0kHz)
15.1 to 18.0 : Soft sound method 1 (Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)
18.1 to 21.0 : Soft sound method 2 (Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)

2) For 055H and larger, 045L and larger

1.0 to 8.0 : Mono sound method (Actual carrier frequency: 1.0 to 8.0kHz)
8.1 to 11.0 : Soft sound method 1 (Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)
11.1 to 14.0 : Soft sound method 2 (Basic carrier frequency: 2.1 to 5.0kHz)

[Mono sound method]

This control method has a constant PWM carrier frequency. When a low carrier
frequency is set, an annoying magnetic sound may be generated.

[Soft sound method]

This control method changes the PWM carrier frequency at a set cycle. As the frequency
elements of the magnetic sound is dispersed, the tone is similar to a cicada. If the beat
sound that is generated due to the operation frequency is annoying, there may be cases
when the beat sound can be suppressed by changing between method 1 and 2.

(Note 1) There are cases when the setting value and actual carrier frequency (reference
carrier frequency for soft sound method) differ. Confirm the actual carrier
frequency with D03-3.
(Note 2) There are cases when the effect of noise onto the inverter's peripheral devices
can be reduced by lowering the carrier frequency.
(Note 3) If set to higher than the specified carrier frequency, the output current must be
deleted. Refer to Fig. 1-2 and Fig. 1-3 in Appendix 1 for details.
(Note 4) For 0P4H~7P5H, 0P4L~7P5L
If the heat sink temperature 115°C is exceeded, the carrier frequency will
automatically change to 3.1kHz.

For 011H~045H, 011L~037L

If the heat sink temperature 85°C is exceeded, the carrier frequency will
automatically change to 3.1kHz.

For 055H or more, 045L or more

If the heat sink temperature 75°C is exceeded and the output current exceeds
110% or if the heat sink temperature 85°C is exceeded, the carrier frequency
will automatically change to 3.1kHz.

6 – 46
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B02-0~9 Motor circuit constant (IM)

R1 l1 l2 R1 Lσ

M' = M2/(l2 + M)
Rm
V1 R2 V1 M' R2' Lσ = (l1 + M)−M2/(l2 + M)
S S M 2
M R2' = • R2
l2 +
M

T-type equivalence circuit T-I type equivalence circuit

B03-0~4 Motor circuit constant (PM)

Refer to section 6-9-3 for details.

B05-0~5 Frequency skip

By setting this parameter, the motor's mechanical resonance point at a specific frequency
can be skipped.
Valid only during V/f control.

B05-4 B05-5
Operation frequency

B05-2 B05-3

B05-0 B05-1

Setting frequency

(Note) This function controls the frequency setting, so the above skip frequency area
will be passed with a ramp function.

6 – 47
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B06-0~6 Ratio interlock setting

The ratio interlock operation executes the following expression and corresponds to each
speed setting input signal.

Y = AX + B + C
X: Frequency (speed) setting input A: Coefficient (B06-0)
Y: Frequency (speed) command B: Bias (B06-1, 4 where B" = 0)
(operation results) C: Bias (C07-3)

(C07-3) Upper/lower limit

Bias IPASS
FSV B06-2,5 ON Frequency
FSI (X) (C)
(speed)
PC, serial Input command
interface
option OFF
B06-3,6
(A)
(B)
(B") IVLM Bias BUP
Coefficient increace/
(B06-0) decreace BDW
(B') buffer

Sequence input
Bias IPASS : Ratio interlock bypass (C03-7)
(B06-1, 4) BUP : Ratio interlock bias increase (C05-3)
BDW : Ratio interlock bias decrease (C05-4)
IVLM : Ratio interlock bias increase/decrease
Bias increace/ Currently valid selection (C05-5)
decreace buffer ramp
value (B") acceleration rate
Currently valid
ramp
deceleration rate

0 clear

0 Time

BUP

BDW

IVLM

(Ratio interlock bias increace/decreace function)

• When IVLM turns ON, the bias value increaced or decreaced by BUP/BDW is added to
the ratio interlock bias value (B’) as the above (B").
• If BUP turns ON while IVLM is ON, the bias increace/decreace buffer value (B") increaces
with the currently valid acceleration ramp rate. When BDV turns ON, the bias
increace/decreace buffer value (B") decreaces with the currently valid deceleration ramp
rate.
• If both BUP and BDW turn OFF while IVLM is ON, the current bias increace/decreace
buffer value (B") is held.
• If IVLM turns OFF, the current bias increace/decreace buffer value(B") is cleared to zero,
and the BUP and BDW operations are ignored.
• Even when the operation command (RUN) turns OFF, the current bias
increace/decreace buffer value (B") is cleared to zero. The BUP and BDW operations
are also ignored in this case.

6 – 48
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B10-0 Acceleration ramp time –2

B10-1 Deceleration ramp time –2
B10-2 Acceleration ramp time for jogging
B10-3 Deceleration ramp time for jogging

The ramp up/down time can be switched by turning the sequence command CSEL ON.
Set the CSEL command input terminal with C03-6.
The ramp time for jogging can be set independently with B10-2 and -3.

CSEL = OFF
Deceleration −1
Output frequency

CSEL = OFF
B10-2
Acceleration −1 (A01-1)
Motor speed

B10-3 (A01-0)
CSEL = ON
Deceleration −2
(B10-1)
Time

F·JOG

RUN

EMS·CSEL
(C03-6 = 14)

The above run example shows the case when the sequence command CSEL is
connected to the EMS terminal (C03-6=14), and the run is decelerated with ramp down
time −2 during emergency stop.

(Note) The ramp time is set as the acceleration/deceleration time for 0Hz ↔ maximum
frequency (B00-4) and 0 ↔ maximum speed (B01-4) in either case.

6 – 49
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B10-4 S-shape characteristics

Acceleration/deceleration with the S-shape pattern is possible by setting this parameter.

Output frequency

Time
ts ts
ta tb
B10-4
B10-4 A01-0, B10-0 A01-1, B10-1
B41-0~7 B42-0~7

This parameter indicates the time of the section shown with ts above.
The total acceleration/deceleration times ta and tb will not change.
When this parameter is set, all acceleration and deceleration will be as shown above.

(Note) Set so that the relation of the B10-4 setting and acceleration/deceleration time is
as shown below.
B10-4 Setting value (ts) × 2 ≤ acceleration/deceleration time (ta, tb)

B10-5 Time unit multiplier

The acceleration/deceleration time setting unit can be changed when an acceleration/

deceleration time in a wider range is to be set.

B10-5 = 1 (standard): × 1
2 : × 0.1
3 : × 10

This parameter will affect all acceleration/deceleration time parameters.

B10-6 S-shape cushion pass function

By enabling this parameter even when B10-4 is set to other than 0, the S-shape is
passed, and normal cushion operation is performed when performing a certain operation.
=1 Not used
=2 S-shape is passed when the currently selected frequency setting at the program
frequency (B11-0~7) is 0.
=3 S-shape is performed when accelerating at the start of operation, and for
frequency change acceleration/deceleration. S-shape is passed in all other cased.

This parameter becomes effective only when selection of an external brake function is
turned ON by B46-0.

6 – 50
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B11-0~7 Program frequency (speed) setting

B11-8 Selection mode setting

This is the frequency (speed) setting for when running program run (multi-step frequency
(speed) setting) by turning the sequence command PROG ON. Set using the maximum
frequency (B00-4,B20-2) and maximum speed (B01-4) as 100%.The following program
frequency settings can be selected with the sequence commands S0, S1, S2, S3, SE and
selection mode setting (B11-8) as shown below.

(1) For binary mode (2) For direct select mode

Sequence command Selected Sequence command Selected
SE S3 S2 S1 S0 frequency SE S3 S2 S1 S0 frequency
OFF OFF OFF B11-0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Previous values
OFF OFF ON B11-1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON B11-0
OFF ON OFF B11-2 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF B11-1
OFF ON ON B11-3 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF B11-2
* * ON OFF OFF B11-4 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF B11-3
ON OFF ON B11-5 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Previous values
ON ON OFF B11-6 ON OFF OFF OFF ON B11-4
ON ON ON B11-7 ON OFF OFF ON OFF B11-5
: SE and S3 are not used. ON OFF ON OFF OFF B11-6
* ON ON OFF OFF OFF B11-7
When S0 to S3 are all OFF, or when two or more are set
between S0 and S3, the previous values will be held.
If there are no previous values because the power has been
turned ON, etc., "0" will be set.
Output frequency (Speed)

B11-7
B11-6 B11-6
B11-5
(A00-2) B11-4 (A00-2)
A00-0 B11-3 A00-0
B11-2
B11-1
B11-0
Time

PROG
(C04-4)
S0
For binary (C04-6)
S1
mode (C04-7)
(B11-8=1) S2
(C04-8)
S0
(C04-6)
S1
For direct (C04-7)
select mode S2
(B11-8=2) (C04-8)
S3
(C04-9)
SE
(C05-0)

Program run example

(When RUN is ON)

Set the PROG command input terminal with C04-4. Set the S0, S1, S2, S3 and SE input
terminals with C04-6~C05-0.

6 – 51
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B13-0 Torque setting

Refer to section 5-9-2 for details on selecting the torque setting.

B13-1 Torque ratio 1 setting

Refer to section 5-9-5 for details on selecting the torque ratio 1 setting.

B13-2 Torque bias 1 setting

Refer to section 5-9-3 for details on selecting the torque bias 1 setting.

B13-3 Torque ratio 2 setting

Refer to section 5-9-6 for details on selecting the torque ratio 2 setting.

B13-4 Double rating speed ratio setting

Refer to section 5-9-4 for details.

B13-5 Drooping setting

Set the drooping value within the range of the following expression. If it becomes
unstable, adjust the drooping setting value or the related parameters.
Drooping setting value (B13-5) [%]
100 [%] × ASR response (A10-0) [rad/s] ×
Machine time constant (A10-1 or B15-0) [ms]
< 0.5
1000

Motor speed [min−1]

Drooping setting value (B13-5) [%]

× Base speed (B01-5) [min−1]
100%
Set speed

Torque command
−100% 100% value

6 – 52
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B13-6 ASR gain compensation in constant power range

B13-7 ACR gain compensation in constant power range

Increase or decrease each ASR gain and ACR gain in power constant speed range.

ASR gain

B13-6
B13-7
100%

Motor speed
Base speed Max speed
(B01-5) (B01-4)

B14-0 ASR dead band setting

Refer to Fig. 5-1 for details.

B15-0 Machine time constant 2

This is used to calculate the ASR gain. This is valid when the sequence input machine
time constant changeover is ON (MCH = ON).
Tm : Machine time constant
10.97ｘJ [kgm2]ｘ(Nbase[min−1])2 J : Total inertia (=1/4ＸGD2[kgfm2])
Tm [msec] = Power [W] Nbase : Base speed
Power : Motor rated output
Machine time constant-1 (A10-1) is selected when MCH=OFF.

B16-0~C Automatic torque bias control

This function is used to apply torque bias from the start of operation based on the load
feedback prior to operation. This prevents rotation due caused by the load that results
when releasing the elevator brake. Either analog or digital load feedback can be selected.
Auto torque bias control calculates the torque bias value from the load feedback
(digital/analog). The torque bias is then fixed when performing operation. The torque bias
does not vary during operation, and is revised gradually during stoppage.
The torque bias direction can be selected using B16-6. Set B16-6=1 for clockwise
elevation, and B16-6=2 for reverse elevation.

(1) Automatic digital torque bias

Digital torque bias is used in the case where limit switches and so forth are used to
achieve a digital value for the load feedback. The output torque bias is determined
based on the sequence command digital input (S5~S7).
S5: Select an input terminal using C06-A.
S7 S6 S5
S6: Select an input terminal using C06-B. 0 0 0 Setting 0
S7: Select an input terminal using C06-C. 0 0 1 Setting 1
0 1 0 Setting 2
0 1 1 Setting 3
1 x x Setting 4
x: Status is irrelevant
6 – 53
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

(2) Automaric analog torque bias

The analog bias is used to achieve the load feedback as an analog value. Set analog
input terminal at C07-A to achieve the torque bias values below.

Torque bias amount

Torque bias amount

B16-C with full load

Analog input
value

B16-B

Torque bias amount B16-8 B16-9 B16-A

with no load

Analog input and torque bias amount example

B17-0~3 V/f middle point

A V/f characteristic as shown on the Voltage

right can be obtained for motors
having special V/f characteristics.
100%
(Note) Set so that F1 ≤ F2 ≤ Base B17-1 (F2, V2)
frequency (B00-5) and V1 ≤ B17-3
(F1, V1)
2.

Frequency
B17-2 B17-0 B00-5
Base
frequency

6 – 54
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B18-0 Over current limit

B18-3 Over current limit function gain
B18-4 Current stabilization gain
B18-5 Over current stall prevention gain
B18-6 Over current stall prevention time constant

The over current limit is a function that lowers the output frequency and suppresses the
current so that the motor current does not exceed this parameter setting value during
starting or constant running. The setting uses the motor rated current (B00-6) as 100%.

(Note) Set a value larger than the motor no-load current.

The overcurrent limit function is configured of the following three control blocks.

(1) Overcurrent vector limit function

This uses the overcurrent as a vector, and generates a
suppressing voltage vector instantly to suppress the
(1) Overcurrent vector current. The response is adjusted with the over current
limit function limit gain (B18-3).
Normally, set the default value (0.25).
If the setting value is increased, the response will
become faster, but the operation may become unstable.
Overcurrent limit
function (2) Current stabilization control
This suppresses the sudden changes in the current
phase during overcurrent suppression by controlling the
output frequency. The response is adjusted with the
(3) Frequency over current stabilization gain (B18-4).
(2) Current stabilization
control compensation Normally, set the default value (0.25).
control If the setting value is increased, the torque vibration will
be reduced, but the operation may become unstable.

(3) Frequency compensation control

This feeds back the voltage suppressed with the
overcurrent vector limit function to the frequency
command and prevents stall. The response is adjusted
with the over current stall prevention gain (B18-5) and
over current stall prevention time constant (B18-6).
Normally, set the default value (B18-5 = 100, B18-6 =
100).
If the gain setting value (B18-5) is increased or the time
constant value (B18-6) is decreased, the response will
become faster, but the operation may become unstable.

(Note) The overcurrent limit function is valid at all times regardless of whether
automatic tuning has been executed.

6 – 55
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B18-1 Regenerative current limit

The regenerative torque to deceleration running is limited. Set to 10% when not using the
DB option. When using the DB option, calculate the value with the following formula and
set.
V2
B18-1 setting value = [ ( DBR resistance value ) /Motor capacity [kW] ] × 100 [%]

where V2=148.2 for the 200V system and V2=593 for the 400V system.

B18-2 Torque stabilization gain

This function suppresses the hunting phenomenon that causes the current to abnormally
vibrate during motor operation.
Normally, the default value (1.00) is set, and the setting value is increased appropriately
according to the hunting.
Please return to regulated value (1.00) of a set value once, and reduce it by carving
about 0.05 when the hunting phenomenon is not controlled even in case of maximum
value (4.00) .
Note that the hunting phenomenon occurs easily in the following cases.

• During a light load or no load

• When the system inertia is low
• When the motor's secondary time constant is high (high-efficiency motor)
• When carrier frequency is high
(Note) The hunting phenomenon at a frequency exceeding 66Hz cannot be
suppressed.

B19-0 Automatic tuning function

Refer to section 3-6 for details.

B26-0~6 Power outage deceleration function

Set B26-0=2 to enable the power outage deceleration function.

This function performs the following operations automatically.
1) Operation is commenced when a power outage occurs, and the DC voltage
reaches or falls below the value (%) set at B26-1.
2) The output frequency is set in the value achieved by subtracting the value set at
B26-4, B27-2 (auxilary drive) from the output frequency at the time of the power
outage.
3) However, no subtraction is made if the output frequency at the time of the power
outage is the same or lower than the value set at B26-5, B27-3 (auxilary drive).
4) Deceleration is performed for the length of time specified at B26-2, B27-0
(auxilary drive), until the frequency reaches the value set at B26-6, B27-4
(auxilary drive).
5) The motor decelerates for the length of time set at B26-3, B27-1 (auxilary drive),
and then stops.
6) However, if the frequency set at B26-6, B27-4 (auxilary drive) is the same or
lower than the stoppage frequency, the motor decelerates for the length of time
specified at B26-2, B27-0 (auxilary drive), and then stops.

6 – 56
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

(Note1) Once this operation is commenced, VT230SE continues with the operation even
after turning the power back ON.
(Note2) If restarting after a stoppage, clear the operation command.
(Note3) The “FWD”, “REV”, and “STOP” commands are disabled both at the operation
panel and at the sequence terminal block input side during operation.
The “EMS” command is enabled.
(Note 4) Use this function with V/f control (C30-0=1, 2) only.

Deceleration cushion time-1 Deceleration cushion time-2

B26-2, B27-0 (support drive) B26-3, B27-1 (support drive)
Output frequency

Subtraction frequency
B26-4,B27-2 (support drive)

Switching frequency
B26-6, B27-4 (support drive)

Time

B35-0 Demagnetizing control operation voltage allowance (PM motor control)

B35-1 Demagnetizing current limit value (PM motor control)
B35-2 Demagnetizing current control proportional gain (PM motor control)
B35-3 Demagnetizing current control integral time constant (PM motor

Refer to section 6-9-5 for details.

B35-4 Flux temperature fluctuation compensation range (PM motor control)

Flux temperature fluctuation compensation time constant
B35-5
(PM motor control)

Refer to section 6-9-6 for details.

B36-0~4 Demagnetizing current table 0 to 4 (PM motor control)

Refer to section 6-9-4 for details.

6 – 57
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B40-0~1 Software option function

The program cushion, pattern operation, traverse operation, PID and multi-pump
functions can be selected as the software option functions.
The validity of these functions is selected with B40-0, 1. Two or more functions cannot be
used simultaneously. Select one function from B40-0 to 1.

B40-0 = 1: The following functions are not used.

2: Program ramp function use (B41-0~B42-7)
3: Pattern run function use (B50-0~B59-3)
4: Traverse function use (B45-0~6)

B40-1 = 1: The following functions are not used.

2: PID use (B43-0~4)
3: Multi-pump control with no PID, or main pump rotation (B43-0~B44-5)
4: Multi-pump control with PID, and main pump rotation (B43-0~B44-5)

The parameters related to each function are shown in parentheses.

6 – 58
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B41-0~7 Program ramp − acceleration

B42-0~7 Program ramp − deceleration

The motor can be run with program frequency (speed) setting 0 to 7 using the sequence
commands PROG and S0, S1, S2, S3, SE and selection mode setting (B11-8). The
program ramp time can also be switched at this time and the motor run.
If PROG is OFF, only the program ramp time can be changed with S0, S1, S2, S3 and
SE.
The ramp time selected with S0, S1, S2, S3 and SE is as shown below.

(1) For binary mode (B11-8 = 1)

Sequence command Selected
(2) For direct select mode (B11-8 = 2)
SE S3 S2 S1 S0 frequency Sequence command Selected
B41-0 SE S3 S2 S1 S0 frequency
OFF OFF OFF
B42-0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Previous values
OFF OFF ON B41-1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON B41-0
B42-1 B42-0
OFF ON OFF B41-2 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF B41-1
B42-2 B42-1
OFF ON ON B41-3 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF B41-2
B42-3 B42-2
* * ON OFF OFF B41-4 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF B41-3
B42-4 B42-3
ON OFF ON B41-5 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Previous values
B42-5
ON OFF OFF OFF ON B41-4
ON ON OFF B41-6 B42-4
B42-6
ON OFF OFF ON OFF B41-5
ON ON ON B41-7 B42-5
B42-7
ON OFF ON OFF OFF B41-6
B42-6
* : SE and S3 are not used. ON ON OFF OFF OFF B41-7
B42-7
When S0 to S3 are all OFF, or when two or more are set
between S0 and S3, the previous values will be held.
If there are no previous values because the power has been
turned ON, etc., "0" will be set.

An example of combination with the program frequency (speed) setting is shown below.

Program frequency - 2
(B11-2)
B41-2 B42-2

Program frequency - 1
(B11-1)
B41-1 B42-1

Program frequency - 0
(B11-0) B42-0

B41-0 Time

RUN

PROG
S0
For binary
mode S1
(B11-8=1)
S2 (OFF)

S0
For direct S1
select mode
(B11-8=2)
S2

SE (OFF)

(Note) The acceleration/deceleration ramp time-2 (B10-0, 1) will be selected by turning the
sequence command CSEL ON even when using the program ramp (B40-0=2).

6 – 59
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B43-0~A PID control

1) Basic PID control operation

The foiiowing type of feedback loop can be configured by using the analog input
(FSV, FSI, AUX) for feedback.

VT230SE

FSV(FSI) Cushion Speed sensor

+
PID M Pump
–

0-10V
(4-20mA) C12-4

AUX

0-10V
Converter

Example of PID control configuration

(Note 1) PID control functions only in the remote mode (LCL OFF). It does not function
during the local mode (LCL ON). In this case, the normal operation mode is
entered.
(Note 2) PID control is divided into a mode operated by the sequence command RUN,
and a mode operated by PIDEN only. The mode can be selected at B43-9.
(Note 3) PID control functions in respect to the sequence command RUN. It does not
function in respect to the sequence commands JOG or BRAKE.

The PID operation block is shown below.

Max. frequency (B00-4,B20-2)

[Max. speed (B01-4)］
Limit

FSV(FSI) + 0 to 100%
PID Frequency (speed) setting
–

Upper limit (B43-3)

Lower limit (B43-4)
AUX
Differential time constant (B43-2)
Integral time constant (B43-1)
Proportional gain (B43-0)

(1) To validate or invalidate PID control during operation, turn the sequence input
command PIDEN ON or OFF. The sequence input command PIDEN is assigned to
the sequence input terminals with C03-8.
(2) Refer to Fig. 5-9 and select the setting input. The setting input can be changed
between the parameter setting and sequence input.
If the setting value is a Hz unit, the percentage conversion value using the maximum
frequency (B00-4, B20-2) as 100% will be input.
(3) Set the analog input to be used as the feedback input with C07-5.
Also set the level of the analog input to be used with C12-0 to 4.
When using the AUX input, set the feedback input between 0 and 10V when C12-2
is 1, and between 0 and 5V when C12-2 is 2.
6 – 60
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

(4) The internal signal (lower limit over: LLMT, upper limit over: ULMT), which indicates
that the feedback value has exceeded the upper limit (B43-3) and lower limit (B43-4)
can be output as a sequence. Set either 23 or 24 for C13-2 to 5.

2) Detected error determination

If PID detection is defective, an error is determined and a breakdown stop (10-C)
occurs.
An error is determined if when the command value is the same or higher than the
error determination start level (B43-5), the detected value is the same or lower than
the detected error level (B43-6), and the error condition continues for just the
detected error determination time (B43-7), and a breakdown stop occurs.

3) Polarity invert flag

The PID input polarity can be inverted using B43-8. The normal PID input is the
command value – the detected value, however, this changes to detected value –
command value when the polarity is inverted.

4) PID operation selection method

The PID operation conditions can be changed using B43-9 f0.
f0=1: PID operates when PIDEN=ON and RUN=ON.
f0=2: PID operates when PIDEN only is ON.
(PID operation continues even during stop)
PID output based operation/stop can be performed using B43-9 f1.
f1=1: Normal operation (Operation stop not performed by PID)
f1=2: PID output is used to stop operation.
Stop occurs when the PID output reaches the lower limiter.
Stop occurs when the PID output reaches the lower limitter in the case when
B43-9=21. Set RUN=OFF and then RUN=ON once again in order to restart
operation.
Stop occurs automatically when the PID output reaches the lower limitter in the case
when B43-9=22. Furthermore, operation is restarted when the PID output exceeds
the lower limitter + hysteresis (B43-A). Set RUN=OFF to completely stop the motor.

6 – 61
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B44-0~5 Multi-pump control (No main pump rotation function)

Multi-pump controls refers to operating up to six pumps (one variable speed control pump,
and up to five ON/OFF control pumps) in parallel using five relay outputs provided in the
inside of one VT230SE and VT230SE. The pressure in the flow passage is controlled to
be constant.
The pressure step of the ON/OFF controlled pumps is interpolated by a pump that is
variable-speed controlled by the VT230SE, which has the PID control function. This
maintains the pressure's continuation.
The relay outputs used for the pump's ON/OFF control are the VT230SE standard relay
output PSO1 to 3 (open collector output) and the relay interface option (V23-RY0) relay
output PSO4 to 5 (contact output). The system configuration is shown below.

VT230SE
Cushion
FSV(FSI)
+ U∼W
PID M P
–

0∼10V PSO1
(4∼20mA) Pump 1
Pump PSO2 M P
ON/OFF
command Pump 2
PSO3 M P
Limiter Pump 3
monitor PSO4 M P
Pump 4
PSO5 M P
V23-RY0
Pump 5 Pressure
M P sensor

Relay output section

AUX

0∼10V
Pressure feedback
Converter

Example of system configuration

(When operating five ON/OFF control pumps)

6 – 62
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

1) Multi-pump control operation

An example of actual operation for the multi-pump control is shown below.

T1

ULT
T2

PID output

LLT
T1 T1 (4)
Time
ON
PSO1
(Pump 1) OFF

(1) ON (2)
OFF
PSO2
(Pump 2) ON
PSO3 (3)
Sequence (Pump 3)
output OFF
ON
PSO4 T3 (5)
(Pump 4)
OFF
OFF ON
PSO5
(Pump 5)

ON/OFF control pump changeover operation (when operating five pumps)

ULT : PID output upper limit value in VT230SE.

LLT : PID output lower limit value in VT230SE.
T1 : Pump start holding time
T2 : Pump stop holding time
T3 : Continuous operation limit time
T4 : Changeover time

The ON/OFF control of multiple pumps is carried out so that the operation time of
each pump is equal.
(1) When the PID output reaches ULT and T1 is passed, the pump 2 (PSO2) with the
shortest operation time turns ON.
(2) When the PID output reaches LLT and T2 is passed, the pump 1 (PSO1) with the
longest operation time turns OFF.
(3) Following (2), when the PID output matches LLT for the time of T2, the pump 3
(PSO3) with the longest operation time turns OFF.
(4) When the time that the PID output and LLT match dose not reach T2, the pump
OFF control will not be carried out.
(5) If the time that the pump's ON/OFF control is not carried out reaches T3, the
pump 4 (PS04) with the longest operation time will turn OFF, and the pump 5
(PSO5) with the shortest operation time will turn ON after T4.

6 – 63
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Other restrictions related to the pump's ON/OFF control are given below.
(6) When the PID output reaches ULT, the pumps turn ON in order of the shortest
running time upwards based on the regulation in (1), however, when all pumps
are ON, and the minor fault turns ON as an upper limit alert when the pump
operation start maintain time has been exceeded. This displays at D05-0 as a
monitor.
(7) When the PID output reaches LLT, the pumps will sequentially turn OFF from the
pump having the longest operation time following the restriction (2) in the
previous page. However, if there are no pumps to turn OFF, the VT230SE will
stop. When the PID output rises and leaves LLT, the VT230SE will resume
operation.
The FWD and REV LEDs will flicker during the automatic stop operation.
Furthermore, the minor fault turns ON as a lower limit alert during automatic stop,
and this displays at D05-0 as a monitor.

PID output

(6)
LLT
T1 T1 T1 T1
Time

ON
PSO1 (Pump 1)

ON
PSO2 (Pump 2)

PSO3 (Pump 3) ON

Operation Restart
VT230SE Stop

VT230SE automatic operation/stop (when there are three ON/OFF control pumps)

(8) When B43-9: f0=1 (PID operation method = PIDEN + RUN), all commands to
the pump are turned OFF at the same time the operation command (RUN) to
the inverter is turned OFF.
(9) When B43-9: f0=2 (PID operation method = PIDEN only), only the INV drive
pump stops, even when the operation command (RUN) to the inverter is turned
OFF, and the control pump continues to turn ON and OFF with PID output.
(10) The following operations are performed when a fault occurs at the inverter.
When B43-9: f0=1 (PID operation method = PIDEN + RUN):
• The pump ON/OFF commands are maintained provided that the operation
command (RUN) ON status is maintained.
The control pump is not turned ON and OFF, and neither is pump switching
performed as time passes.
• When the operation command (RUN) is turned OFF, all commands to the
pump are turned OFF.
When B43-9: f0=2 (PID operation method = PIDEN):
• The pump ON/OFF commands are maintained regardless of whether the
operation command (RUN) is turned ON or OFF, and the control pump
continues to turn ON and OFF with PID output.
• All commands to the pump are turned OFF when PIDEN is turned OFF.
(11) When the inverter's power is turned OFF, the operation time history for each
pump will be lost.

6 – 64
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

2) Preparation for operation

(1) Set the number of pumps to be ON/OFF controlled in parameter B44-0.
One to five pumps can be set. The relation of the pump No. recognized in the
inverter and the relay output terminals is as follows.

Pump No. Relay output terminals

1 PSO1
2 Standard PSO2
3 PSO3
4 PSO4
Option
5 PSO5

The pumps are turned on in the order of pump No. 1 to 5.

The relay outputs not being used for ON/OFF control can be used as normal
programmable outputs, and the internal status signal of the VT230SE can be
output. (C13-3 to 5,C33-0 to 1)
If there are for to five pumps, V23-RY0 must be used.
Refer to the Instruction Manual (ST-3302) for details on V23-RY0.

(2) The PID control function is used with the multi-pump control.
• Refer to the explanation on B43-0 to 4 for details on setting the PID control related
parameters (B43-0 to 4), selecting the pressure command input, and selecting the
feedback input.
• Set B40-1=3 to enable multi-pump control (no main pump rotation function).
• Multi-pump control is always carried out in the remote mode (LCL OFF).
• The operating command is issued from the external sequence input terminal
(RUN).
• Do not perform operation from R.RUN, F.JOG, R.JOG.
• If enabled, operation is possible as PID, however, relay output for all pumps is
turned OFF.
• Turn the sequence input command PIDEN ON to validate PID control.
(3) Refer to the operation explanation drawing in section (1) and set the parameters
B44-1 to 3.
(4) By using the setting interlock function (C20 = 0 to 3), the VT230SE run/stop can
be controlled by the pressure command input (FSV, FSI). In this case, the
operation command (RUN, R·RUN) is always ON.
Refer to the explanation on C20-0 to 3.

6 – 65
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B44-0~5 Multi-pump control (With main pump rotation function)

Multi-pump control using a dedicated relay interface option (V23-RY1) uses one
VT230SE unit and the relay output from the maximum ten relays in the VT230SE and
attached to the dedicated option (V23-RY1) to operate a maximum of 5 pumps in parallel
(max. 5 ON/OFF control pumps), and perform fixed control for the flow path pressure.
The pressure step of the ON/OFF controlled pumps is interpolated by a pump that is
variable-speed controlled by the VT230SE, which has the PID control function. This
maintains the pressure's continuation.
The relay outputs used for the pump's ON/OFF control are the VT230SE standard relay
output PSO1 to 2 (open collector output) and the dedicated option (V23-RY1) relay
output MP1_1 to MP4_2 (contact output). The system configuration is shown below.
Power
supply
SW0
∼
SW1 Ｍ Ｐ

VT230SE Pump 1
FSV/FSI U to W
SW2
+
PID
– Ｍ Ｐ
SW3
Pump 2
0 to 10V
(4 to 20mA)
Pump MP1_1
ON/OFF SW4
command
MP1_2
MP2_1
V23- MP2_2 Ｍ Ｐ
SW5
RY1 MP3_1 Pump 3
MP3_2
Limiter MP4_1
monitor MP4_2
SW6

Terminal Ｍ Ｐ
PSO1
block SW7
PSO2 Pump 4
PSO output PSO3

SW8
AUX

(0 to 10V) SW9 Ｍ Ｐ
Pump 5

Converter
Pressure feedback Pressure
sensor

Example of system configuration

(When operating five ON/OFF control pumps)

6 – 66
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

1) Multi-pump control operation

A specific example of general operation for multi-pump control with dedicated option
(V23-RY1) is shown below.

T1 T1

ULT

PID output
T3

LLT
T2 (3) Time

Pump 1 (4)
(INV) OFF

Pump 2 (2)

ON OFF

Pump 3 (1)

ON
Pump 4 (1)

O
T4
N
Pump 5 (4)
(INV)

ON/OFF control pump changeover operation (when operating five pumps)

ULT : PID output upper limit value in VT230SE.

LLT : PID output lower limit value in VT230SE.
T1 : Pump start maintain time
T2 : Pump stop maintain time
T3 : Continuous operation limit time
T4 : Changeover time
INV : INV drive pump at that time

The ON/OFF control of multiple pumps is carried out so that the operation time of
each pump is equal.
(1) After the PID output reaches ULT, the pump with the shortest operation time
from the pumps operated by the main power after T1 turns ON.
(2) After the PID output reaches LLT, the pump with the longest operation time from
the pumps operated by the main power after T2 turns OFF.
(3) When the time that the PID output and LLT match dose not reach T2, the pump
OFF control will not be carried out.
This is the same for the case where the time that the PID output and ULT match
does not reach T1.

6 – 67
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

(4) When the time that pump ON/OFF control is not performed reaches T3, if the
pump with the longest running time is the INV drive pump (pump 1), the INV is
turned OFF.
Following that, at the point when T4 is passed, the pump with shortest running
time from among the pumps that are not operating is turned ON as the INV drive
pump.
Until this point, pump 1 that was the INV drive pump was operating as a main
power driven pump.

Other restrictions related to the pump's ON/OFF control are given below.
(5) The INV drive pump is always set as pump 1 when the power is turned ON.
(6) When B43-9: f0=1 (PID operation method = PIDEN + RUN):
The operation command is turned OFF, and a search is performed for the pump
with the shortest running time when all pumps are OFF. When identified, that
pump is changed to the INV drive pump.
When B43-9: f0=2 (PID operation method = PIDEN):
No change is made to the INV drive pump even when the operation command is
OFF + all pumps are OFF.
The change is only made in the case where regulation (4) is satisfied during
operation, or if the multi-pump is disabled and then reenabled.
(7) When PID reached ULT, pumps are turned ON one by one in the order of the
shortest running time upwards based on regulation (1). If this situation continues,
the minor fault turns ON as the upper limit alarm when the all pumps ON + T1:
pump operation start maintain time has passed. D05-0: pump control upper limit
displays as the monitor.
(8) When PID reached LLT, pumps are turned OFF one by one in the order of the
longest running time downwards based on regulation (2), however, in the case
where no pumps are OFF, the INV drive pump (VT230SE main unit) is
automatically stopped. VT230SE is restarted in the case where the PID output
rises and to a level different from LLT.
The FWD and REV LEDs will flicker during the automatic stop operation.

PID output

(6)
LLT
T2 T2 T2 T2
Time

ON
Pump 1

ON
Pump 2

Pump 3 ON

Pump 4 Operation Restart

(INV) Stop

VT230SE automatic operation/stop (when there are four ON/OFF control pumps)

Furthermore, the minor fault flag turns ON as a lower limit alert when an auto
stop has occurred at the VT230SE main unit. D05-0: pump control lower limit
displays as the monitor.

6 – 68
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

(9) In the case where the INV driven pump changes to the main power driven pump,
or the main power driven pump changes to the INV driven pump, dead time is
set to avoid current reverse flow from the motor. The main power relay contact
at both sides of the division turns OFF.
The dead time division can be set at B44-5.
(10) When switching when the T3 time has elapsed as in (4) above, switching is not
performed when the main power driven pumps are all ON, and the machine
waits for ten minutes.
If there are any pumps that have not been driven after the waiting time has
elapsed, switching is performed with the pump that has been run the longest.
If none, the machine waits for a further ten minutes.
(11) When B43-9: f0=1 (PID operation method = PIDEN + RUN), the commands to
the pumps are all turned OFF at the same time that the operation command
(RUN) to the inverter is turned OFF.
(12) When B43-9: f0=2 (PID operation method = PIDEN only), only the INV drive
pump stops, even when the operation command (RUN) to the inverter is turned
OFF, and the drive pump continues to turn ON and OFF with PID output.
(13) The following operations are performed when a breakdown occurs at the
inverter.
When B43-9: f0=1 (PID operation method = PIDEN + RUN):
• The pump ON/OFF commands are maintained provided that the operation
command (RUN) ON status is maintained.
The main power driven pump is not turned ON and OFF, and neither is pump
switching performed as time passes.
• When the operation command (RUN) is turned OFF, all commands to the
pump are turned OFF.
When B43-9: f0=2 (PID operation method = PIDEN):
• The pump ON/OFF commands are maintained regardless of whether the
operation command (RUN) is turned ON or OFF, and the main power driven
pump continues to turn ON and OFF with PID output.
• All commands to the pump are turned OFF when PIDEN is turned OFF.
(14) When the inverter's power is turned OFF, the operation time history for each
pump will be lost.

2) Preparation for operation

(1) Set the number of pumps to be ON/OFF controlled in parameter B44-0.
One to five pumps can be set. The relation of the pump No. recognized in the
inverter and the relay output terminals is as follows.

Relay output
Pump No. Application
terminals
INV/main switching MP1_1
1
Main shutoff MP1_2
INV/main switching MP2_1
2
Main shutoff MP2_2
INV/main switching MP3_1
3
Main shutoff MP3_2
INV/main switching MP4_1
4
Main shutoff MP4_2
INV/main switching PSO1
5
Main shutoff PSO2
Pump number, and application and number for each terminal

6 – 69
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

The pumps are turned on in the order of pump No. 1 to 5.

Relay output that is not used for ON/OFF control can be used as programmable
output for the VT230SE terminals only, and the VT230SE internal status signal
can be output. (C13-3~5)

(2) The PID control function is used with the multi-pump control.
• Refer to the explanation on B43-0 to 4 for details on setting the PID control related
parameters (B43-0 to 4), selecting the pressure command input, and selecting the
feedback input.
• Set B40-1=4 to enable multi-pump control (with main pump rotation function).
• Multi-pump control is always carried out in the remote mode (LCL OFF).
• The operating command is issued from the external sequence input terminal
(RUN).
• Operation from R.RUN, F.JOG, R.JOG is not possible.
If enabled, operation is possible as PID, however, relay output for all pumps is
turned OFF.
• Turn the sequence input command PIDEN ON to validate PID control.
(3) Refer to the operation explanation drawing in section (1) and set the parameters
B44-1 to 5.
(4) By using the setting interlock function (C20 = 0 to 3), the VT230SE run/stop can
be controlled by the pressure command input (FSV, FSI). In this case, the
operation command (RUN) is always ON.
Refer to the explanation on C20-0 to 3.

(Note) When the main pump rotation is enabled (B40-1=4) ,and the relay interface option
(V23-RY0) is used instead of the dedicated relay interface option (V23-RY1), one of the
auxiliary pump relay outputs may turn ON. Always use the dedicated relay interface
option (V23-RY1) when the main pump rotation is enabled (B40-1=4).

B44-6 Multi-pump control:INV control method at lower limit selection

Select whether to stop the INV or continue operation when the PID output lower limit
state contimues.
When B44-6=2:Contimue is selected, the INV will continue operation without stopping in
the "VT230SE automatic operation/STOP" state shown in the previous figure.

6 – 70
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B45-0~6 Traverse run

Traverse is operation in which the frequency fluctuates with the pattern shown below.
This is effective for evenly winding up the thread on a bobbin in a weaving system.

Traverse run
Center frequency (speed)

D (B45-2)
A (B45-1)

FH (B45-0)
A (B45-1)
D (B45-2)

B (B45-3) C (B45-4)

0
RUN ON
OFF
PROG ON
OFF

Traverse operation
(Note) When main pump rotation is enabled (B40-1=4), a relay interface option
(V23-RY0), not the dedicated relay interface option (V23-RY1), is used to there
are times when one of the support drive pump relay outputs turn ON. Ensure to
use the dedicated relay interface option (V23-RY1) when selecting main pump
rotation (B40-1=4).
1) Traverse run
(1) To carry out traverse run, turn the sequence command PROG ON. (Normal
operation will take place if PROG is OFF.)
(2) If the sequence command RUN or R RUN is turned ON, first, the frequency
(speed) will increased as high as the center frequency (speed) in ramp
mode(A01-0) at the center frequency (speed), and then traverse run will start.
(3) When RUN (or R RUN) is turned OFF, the frequency(speed) will decreased to a
stop in ramp mode (A01-1) .
(4) During traverse operation, overcurrent limit (OCL) and overvoltage limit (OVL)
will not function. However, these will function while accelerating or decelerating
during start or stop.
(5) The traverse center frequency (rotation speed) input point can be selected with
C02-1.
C02-1 = 1: Analog fixed (C07-4)
= 2: Panel fixed (B45-0)
= 3: Sequence (S0, S1)
When using traverse run, set B11-8 to 1 (selection mode setting: binary mode).
If C02-1 is set to 1, the setting from an external source selected with C07-4 will
be the center frequency (speed).
When C02-1 is set to 3, and traverse run is being carried out by turning the
PROG command ON, the following operations 2) and 3) will take place when the
sequence command S0 and S1 signals are input.

6 – 71
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

2) Deviated traverse X, Y operation

The deviated traverse operation shown below takes place with the sequence
commands S0 (X) and S1 (Y) when carrying out traverse operation with the PROG
command ON.

Center frequency (speed)

X (B45-5)
FH (B45-0)
Y (B45-6)

0
ON
S0(X) OFF
ON
S1(Y) OFF

The center frequency (speed) rises by X (B45-5) only while S0 (X) is ON.
The center frequency (speed) lowers by X (B45-6) only while S1 (Y) is ON.
The rising and lowering timing is the traverse rising and lowering extension operation
as shown above.
Deviated traverse (X, Y) operation

3) Changing the center frequency (speed) with settings from an external source
While the PROG command is ON and the traverse operation is taking place, when
the sequence commands S0 and S1 both turn ON, the center frequency value
(speed) value will be the value set from an external source selected with C07-4.
If only S0 or S1 is ON, the deviated traverse X, Y operation explained in section 2)
will take place.
If both S0 and S1 are turned ON, the center frequency (speed) will be the value set
from the external terminal. However, the frequency will first return to the center
frequency (speed) before rising or lowering to the newly set value. After that, the
same operation will take place even when the setting value is changed from an
external source.
4) Precautions for application

(1) If the parameter No. B45-0 to 6 setting data is changed during traverse operation,
the output frequency (speed) will return to the center frequency (speed) once.
Then, traverse operation based on the newly set data will take place.
When returning to the center frequency (speed), the output frequency (speed) will
change in ramp mode (A01-0, 1).
(2) The overcurrent limit (OCL) and overvoltage limit (OVL) functions will not activate
during traverse operation, so carefully consider the inverter capacity, motor
capacity and traverse related setting values when designing the system.
(3) The output frequency (speed) is limited between 5.00 and 100.00% during
traverse operation.
(4) When carrying out deviated traverse, take care not to turn the S0(X) and S1(Y)
commands ON simultaneously.
If turned ON simultaneously, the 3) center frequency (speed) will change.

6 – 72
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B50-0
~B59-3
Pattern run function

The frequency (speed), run direction and time can be changed automatically with the
pattern run function.

B51-1
B50-1
Frequency (speed)

B54-1

Time

B52-1

Step-0 Step-1 Step-2 Step-3 Step-4

B50-2 B51-2 B52-2 B53-2 B54-2

RUN

(1) A max. of ten patterns can be set. Program in the B50-B59 blocks as shown below.
The speed setting input point is selected with C02-0 = 4 (sequence).
n is the step No. from 0 to 9.
B5n-0: Run mode
= 0: Stop
= 1: Forward run
= 2: Reverse run
= 3: Final step (set when repeating before B59)
B5n-1: Run frequency (speed) [%]
B5n-2: Run time [sec.]
B5n-3: Return destination step
=0~8
(Set the No. of the step to be executed next when B5n-0 = 3.)

6 – 73
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

(2) The sequence command functions will be as shown below during pattern running.
RUN: Pattern run starts when this turns ON, and operation starts from the run
frequency (speed) and operation time applied when the operation was
previously stopped. The inverter will stop when this is turned OFF.

(Note 1) The pattern running operates with the remote mode (LCL OFF).
(Note 2) The R.RUN, F.JOG, and R.JOG commands are invalid during pattern
running.

S0: Proceeds to the next step at the edge from OFF to ON. (Skip)
By turning this signal ON/OFF with S1 ON (hold), the step can be proceeded in
synchronization with the peripheral machine regardless of the internal timer.

S1: The internal timer operation will stop when ON. (Hold).
Use this to pause the pattern run.

S2: When this is turned ON, the operation will be reset to step 0.
The S0 and S1 functions are valid only when RUN is ON.
The S2 function is not related to the ON/OFF setting of RUN, and is valid at all
times.
When the mode is changed to the local mode (LCL ON), this will be reset to
step 0.
During pattern run, set B11-8 to 1 (selection mode setting: binary mode).

(3) When using pattern run, the sequence status output (D04-4) ACC and DCC
functions will change as shown below.

ACC: Turns ON when the last step of the pattern run is being executed. (EOS)

DCC: Operates with the reverse logic of the above ACC. (EOS)

B46-0~5 External brake control

The inverter brake can be turned ON and OFF in accordance with the inverter internal
sequence. The external brake function contains all types of waiting time settings and an
interlock function.

RUN
External brake
command (MBRK)
External brake answer
(MBRK_ans)

Output frequency/ B46-1 B46-2 B46-3 B46-4

motor rotation count ( LB) (BL) (DB) RUN error
command ZSP determined

S-shape disabled
Program setting input 0 7 3 0
Internal program settings 0 7 3 0

No change made

External brake sequence example with program settings used (B46-0 f2=1), and
brake answer (B46-5≠0.0)

6 – 74
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

RUN
External brake
command (MBRK)

Output frequency/ B46-1 B46-2 B46-3 B46-4

motor rotation count (LB) (BL) (DB) RUN error
command ZSP determined

S-shape disabled
DC brake ON OFF ON

Normal DC brake time ON

External brake sequence example with DC brake used (B46-0 f2=2), and
no brake answer (B46-5=0.0)

(1) External brake selection

1) Select the external brake function using B46-0 f0.
2) Select the IDET based interlock function using B46-0 f1. If f1=2, a breakdown
stop occurs at 10-C if IDET is not ON at the point the brake is released
(immediately after LB).
3) Set the control mode during acceleration waiting time (LB, BL) using B46-0 f2.
The set frequency/rotation count is output when f2=1.
The mode changes to DC brake mode when f2=2.

(2) All types of waiting time

Set the waiting time when using external brake control.
1) Use B46-1 to set the waiting time (LB) from RUN until the brake is released.
2) Use B46-2 to set the waiting time (BL) from the point the brake is released until
acceleration is commenced. When there is a brake answer (B46-5≠0.0sec), set
the waiting time from after the brake answer, and if there is no brake answer
(B46-5=0), set the waiting time from the point the brake release command is
issued.
In the case of the program frequency/rotation count setting, changes are not
made to the settings during BL, and the settings prior to BL are used.
3) Use B46-3 to set the waiting time (DB) from the point ZSP turns ON until the
brake is engaged.

(3) Error determination

The following error determination can be made in cases other than IDET based
interlock set at B46-0 f1.
1) RUN error determination when engaging brake
In the case where RUN does not turn OFF in the time set at B46-4 from the time
the brake is engaged, a breakdown stop occurs at the end controller due to an
external brake RUN error (I0-D). Set to 0.0 sec to turn the RUN error
determination OFF.
2) Brake answer error determination
In the case where the brake command (MBRK) and brake answer (MBRK_ans)
do not match above the time set at B46-5, an external break answer error (I0-E)
occurs as an external break breakdown, and a breakdown stop occurs. Set to 0.0
sec to turn the brake answer error determination OFF.

(4) S-shape cushion pass function

If the S-shape characteristics (B10-4) have been set, the S-shape characteristics are
applied when engaging the external brake, and therefore there are cases when the
frequency does not drop immediately. In order to avoid this, set B10-6=2 or 3 to
disable the S-shape characteristics when stopping.
B10-6=2: S marking passed when program setting is 0.
B10-6=3: S marking passed when RUN command is OFF.
6 – 75
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B47-0~6 Simple ASR control

If the speed detection option preset board (V23-DN1 or DN2) is installed when V/f control
is selected (C30-0=1, 2), simple ASR can be used. Simple ASR involves comparing the
frequency command value and motor rotation count (frequency calculation value), and
controlling the slippage frequency so that the frequency command matches the motor
rotation count.

Frequency Frequency
setting + + command
-1 -1
Kp (B47-1) – Z Z
+ + +
+ +
×
– +
P variation rate limit + Compensation torque
(B47-3) limitter (B47-4)

0 Fixed output
Ki (B47-1,2) range processing ×

Speed detection
value Integral item set to zero for
Acc/Dcc (when B47-0 f1=2) Slippage compensation
gain (A02-5)

Simple ASR control

(1) Simple ASR control is performed when B47-0 f0=2.

(2) The integral operation is stopped when accelerating if B47-0 f1=2. The overshoot
when the frequency is attained can be curtailed.
(3) Set the proportional gain is set at B47-1. Increase the proportional gain to raise the
motor count compliance, however, motor hunting will occur if increased too much.
(4) Set the integral time constant at B47-2. Shorten the integral time constant to raise
the rotation count compliance when the motor has a load, however, the overshoot
will increase when the frequency is attained.
(5) Set the proportional variation rate control at B47-3. Set a small value in order to
avoid excess proportional rotational variations.
(6) Set the compensating torque limitter at B47-4. Simple ASR output is output in a
simple torque form. Set a small value for the compensating torque limitter to avoid
overcompensating.
(7) Set the simple ASR pole count at B47-5.
(8) Set the simple ASR speed detection unit pulse count a B47-6.
(9) The pick-up operation is required when restarting operation while the motor is
rotating. This differs from vector control in that magnetic flux control is not
performed. In order to pick up, 500msec finishing time is required in addition to
pick-up standby time (C21-2).

(Note 1) Simple ASR differs from vector control in that torque limit control is not possible.
(Note 2) The speed detection value displays at D00-5.

6 – 76
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

B60-0
~B76-6
Spinning frame function

This function is used to perform spinning pattern operation. This differs from the previous
pattern operation in that acceleration/deceleration is performed in a straight line cushion
(auto setting) until the setting point is reached. Set the parameter selection (B60-0) to 1
(selection) to enable the spinning frame function.

(Note 1) The spinning frame function is a V/f control function. Select control mode
selection C30-1=1, 2.

(1) Up to four Speed-Time Patterns (STP) can be set up to a maximum of fifteen steps.
Each step is set at the target frequency and time taken to attain that frequency from
the previous step. Set each STP end step number at B60-1~4.
The time unit can be set at B60-6. This settings is valid for the STP time settings
(B63-0~B64-6, B67-0~B68-6, B71-0~B72-6, B75-0~B76-6) and Doff-End alarm time
(B60-5).

Frequency
… B62-5
B61-2
B62-6

B61-1
B61-0 Normal deceleration cushion

Time

B63-0 B63-1 B63-2 B64-6

When STP0 is selected, and B60-1=14

(2) STP switching can be performed using the external terminal

There are four Speed-Time Patterns (STP), and they are selected at external
terminal input (S0, S1, S2, S3). Use parameters B11-8 to select the binary mode and
direct input mode.

Binary mode (B11-8=*1) Direct input mode (B11-8=*2)

Sequence command Selection Sequence command Selection
S3 S2 S1 S0 STP No. S3 S2 S1 S0 STP No.
OFF OFF STP0 OFF OFF OFF OFF Previous value
OFF ON STP1 OFF OFF OFF ON STP0
* *
ON OFF STP2 OFF OFF ON OFF STP1
ON ON STP3 OFF ON OFF OFF STP2
ON OFF OFF OFF STP3

(Note 2) STP switching cannot be performed during operation. If STP switching is

performed during operation, the current pattern is maintained, and switching is
performed after pattern operation is complete.

6 – 77
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

(3) Speed-Time Pattern (STP) operation

1) STP operation is performed when the sequence command RUN is issued.
(F.JOG, R.JOG inching operation cannot be performed.) Operation is
commenced from the selected STP Step 0.
2) After the pattern has been completed, normal deceleration cushion and free-run
stop can be selected by making the operation stop method (C00-1) setting.
3) If the operation command is turned OFF during STP operation, normal
deceleration cushion or free-run stop is performed. When restarting operation,
after accelerating with the normal acceleration cushion until the previous stop
frequency is reached, STP operation is restarted from the previous stop step and
operation time.
4) When operation is stopped due to a power outage, after resuming the power,
pattern operation is restarted from the frequency and time when the stop
occurred.

Frequency
Frq1 Frq1

Frq0 Frq2 Frq2 … Frq13

Frq14
Normal deceler-
Normal acceler- ation cushion
C01-0: Operation Normal deceler- ation cushion
start frequency ation cushion
FS

A03-1: DC brake time A03-1: DC brake time

RUN
…
Operation

PRST

Doff-End alarm

Time
B60-5：
Doff-End alarm time

(4) Pattern operation can be reset by the external terminal input (PRST).
Select the input terminal by selecting sequence input (C03-9). A stop occurs when
the PRST is turned ON during STP operation. Operation is commenced from STEP0
when restarting operation.

(5) A Doff-End alarm is output at the final stage of the pattern.

By setting the Doff-End alarm time (B60-5), the Doff-End alarm is output from the
point auto stop occurs after completion of the final step to the point going back the
set time.
The final step time is used as a reference when performing a free-run stop.
The Doff-End alarm remains ON even after the pattern is completed. The RUN signal
is not received with the Doff-End alarm ON. The Doff-End alarm is cleared by the
PRST.
The Doff-End alarm signal can be output to RC-RA, and terminals PS01~3. Set at
the terminal output selection (C13-2~5).

(Note 3) Operation is prohibited in all circumstances when the Doff-End alarm is being
output. It is not possible to restart when the Doff-End alarm is being output
even for a manual stop.
(Note 4) Normal acceleration/deceleration cushion switching can be performed using
CSEL.
The Doff-End alarm time and average frequency calculation is always
performed with cushion 1 even if cushion 2 is selected.

6 – 78
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

(6) Spindle average frequency display (D13-3)

The currently selected STP average frequency is displayed at monitor D13-3.
The average frequency is obtained using the following formulae.

(FS [%] + F0 [%]) × T0 [sec]

S0 =
2
(Fn−1[%] + Fn [%]) × Tn [sec] (n: Step no.)
Sn =
2
Fn [%] × TD [sec]
SD =
2

1) Operation stop method (C00-1) =1: Free-run stop

S0 + S1 + ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ + Sn + SD
Average frequency = × FMAX [Hz]
T0 [sec] + T1[sec] + ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ + Tn [sec] + TD [sec]

2) Operation stop method (C00-1) =2: Deceleration stop

S0 + S1 + ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ + Sn
Average frequency = × FMAX [Hz]
T0 [sec] + T1[sec] + ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ + Tn [sec]

Frequency Fn-1
F2
…
Fn
Normal deceleration cushion

F1
F0
Sn
S2
S1 SD
FS S0
Fs: Operation start
frequency Time
T0 T1 T2 Tn TD

(7) Hank count display (D13-4)

The current Hank count displays at monitor D13-3. The Hank count is obtained using
the following formula.

1
HC = FAVG × TRUN × × Gain
840
FAVG [Hz]: Average frequency TRUN [sec]: Operation time
840: 1 Hank = 840 yard

It is necessary to set the gain (B60-7, B60-8) in order to display the Hank count
correctly. The gain is obtained using the following formula.

2 1
Gain = 2π × R S × × ×KC
Pole GR

RS: Spindle radius [yard] Pole: Motor pole count

N
GR: Gear ratio = 2 (N1: Motor gear count, N2: Spindle gear count)
N1
KC: Compensation coefficient (Compensate slippage etc.)

(Note 5) The Hank count calculation is continued during operation, however, is reset to
zero when the power is turned OFF.
6 – 79
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C00-0 Run command method

= 1: F·RUN, R·RUN

Forward run

RUN
Output frequency
Motor speed
Reverse run

PSI1 (R·RUN)
(C03-0=1) RUN

RY0
R·RUN

= 2: RUN, REV

Run

RUN Output frequency

Motor speed
Reverse

PSI1 (R·RUN) F·RUN

(C03-0=1) (RUN)

RY0 R·RUN
(REV)

= 3: Self hold

Forward run

RUN

Output frequency
Reverse run
Motor speed

PSI1 (R·RUN)
(C03-0=1)
F·RUN
Stop

PSI4 (HOLD) R·RUN

(C03-3=4)
RY0 HOLD

6 – 80
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C00-1 RUN/STOP methods

C00-2 Jog stop method

= 1: Coast to stop
= 2: Deceleration stop

Coast to stop refers to stopping by turning the output OFF simultaneously with the stop
command (RUN and R·RUN OFF).
Deceleration stop refers to stopping by decelerating to the stopping frequency with the
ramp down after the stop command, and then applying the DC-brake to stop.

Motor speed during

coast to stop

Output frequency Output frequency Ramp down to stop

Motor speed during coast to
stop DC brake

RUN

(Note) To restart after coast to stop, confirm that the motor has stopped. The inverter
may trip if attempted when the motor is running. (For V/f control)

C00-3 Emergency stop (EMS) input logic

= 1: Close to stop (when a contact is connected)

= 2: Open to stop (when b contact is connected)

EMS

RY0

C00-4 Emergency stop (EMS) mode

= 1: Coast to stop, without fault output

= 2: Coast to stop, with fault output (When the EMS signal turns ON, the output will be
shut off, and FLT will be output.)
= 3: Ramp down to stop (without fault output)

6 – 81
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C00-5 Control source switchover method (J1 setting)

J1 setting =1: OFF =2: ON

Select whether to use the terminal block input signals with the local operation mode.
Refer to section 5-5 for details.

C00-6 Control source switchover method (J2 setting)

J2 setting =1: OFF =2: ON

Select the auxiliary command input when the COP command is ON.
Refer to section 5-5 for details.

C02-0~8 Various setting input selection

Refer to section 5-9 for details.

C03-0~9 Sequence input terminal function − 1

C04-0~9 Sequence input terminal function − 2
C05-0~9 Sequence input terminal function − 3
C06-0~C Sequence input terminal function − 4

Refer to section 5-3, 5-6 for details. Refer to the explanation for B06-0 to 6 (ratio interlock
bias increace/decreace function) for details on C03-7 and C05-3 to 4.

C07-0~A Analog input terminal function

Refer to section 5-7 for details.

6 – 82
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C08-0 Automatic start setting

= 1: OFF (runs with the run command ON after pre-charging)

= 2: ON without pick-up
If the run command is ON when the power is turned on, run will start after the
inverter is charged.

ON

Power supply

Pre-charging
(internal RDY)

RUN

Output frequency
Motor speed

= 3: ON with pick-up
If the run command turns ON when the power turns ON, pick-up will start when the
inverter charging is completed, and then operation will start.
Set this when using momentary restart.
The speed can be detected with the IM vector control with sensor and PM motor
control (C30-0 = 4, 5). As pickup operation is not carried out, set C08-0 to 2.

Power supply

Pre-charging
(internal RDY)

F·RUN

Output frequency
Motor speed
Motor speed

Motor speed search

(For V/f control, IM speed sensor-less vector control C30-0=1,2,3)

(Note) If auto start is used, undervoltage fault will not be detected. However, EC0~3 will
output the undervoltage code.

6 – 83
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C09-0 Parameter protection

Set this parameter to prevent unintentional operations from operation panel.

Changing of the data can be protected per function group with the setting value as shown
below.

Block Block B, C
value
A Basic Extn. S/W H/W
: Unprotected 1
(changeable) 2 × × × × ×
× : Protected
(unchangeable) 3 × × × ×
4 × × ×
5 × ×
6
7~8 × × × × ×
9

(Note 1) Set 2 to prohibit all changes.

(Note 2) Set 1 to allow all changes. The 9 setting is for maker maintenance, so do not
set it.

C09-1 Operation panel lock

FWD , REV , STOP key operations are protected.

= 1: All operation possible
= 2: All operation prohibited
Note, the motor will stop when the STOP key is pressed for two seconds
= 3: Only STOP key can be operated.

C09-2 LCL switchover protection

= 1: LCL mode switchover ( STOP + LCL ) during running disabled

(Note) Even when stopped, if the terminal block's RUN, R.RUN, F.JOG or R JOG is ON,
switchover to remote is not possible.
= 2: LCL mode switchover ( STOP + LCL ) during running enabled

C09-6 Fault history buffer clear

The fault history details can be cleared by setting the value to 1 and then pressing SET
key. This setting will not be registered in the internal memory. Thus, this parameter must
be set each time.
Nothing will occur if set to a value other than 1.
Use this before handing the unit over to the final user.
(Note) Setting for 2000 and over are maker maintenance code, so do not set it.

6 – 84
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C09-7 Default value load

All values per function group are changed to the default values.

9: All default values load (excluding maintenance)

10: Parameter A
11: Parameters B, C basic functions
12: Parameters B, C extended functions
13: Parameter B software option function
Parameter C hardware option function
14: Parameters B basic functions
15: Parameters B extended functions
16: Parameter B software option function
17: Parameters C basic functions
18: Parameters C extended functions
19: Parameter C hardware option function

Nothing will occur when values other than the above are set.
This parameter setting value will not be registered in the internal memory.

(Note) The setting values exceeding 2000 are codes for maker maintenance, so do not
set. If set, the following inverter operation may be abnormal.

C10-0~7 Custom parameter register

Set the No. of Block B, C parameter to be displayed on A04-0~7.
To set block B parameter B10-1, set as 0.10.1.
To set block C parameter C14-0, set as 1.14.0.
Refer to section 4-7 for details.

C12-0 FSV terminal input mode

C12-1 FS1 terminal input mode
C12-2 AUX terminal input mode
C12-3 Filter time constant for FSV/FSI and AUX input
As an example, the relation of the analog input value and speed setting value when using
FSV, FSI and AUX as the speed setting 1 (C07-0 = 2 to 4) is shown below. Refer to
Table 5-5 for the relation of the analog input value and each setting value when using as
the torque setting or ratio interlock bias setting, etc.

C12-0 = 1: 0~10V C12-1 = 1: 4~20mA

= 2: 0~5V = 2: 0~20mA
= 3: 1~5V
Setting frequency/Setting speed
Setting frequency/Setting speed

Max. frequency Max. frequency

(B00-4,B20-2) Max. speed
Max. speed (B01-4) C12-1=2
C12-0=1, 2

C12-1=1
C12-0=3
0 4mA 20mA
0 1V 5V FSI input current
(0) (10V)
FSV input voltage

6 – 85
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C12-2 = 1: 0~±10V
= 2: 0~±5V
= 3: 1~5V

Setting frequency/Setting speed

(Forward run)

Max. frequency
Max. speed

When running with

sequence
command RUN

(−10V) C12-2=3
−5V
1V +5V
(+10V)

When running with

sequence
command R·RUN
C12-2=1, 2
Max. frequency
Max. speed
Reverse run

C12-3 = 1: 8ms
= 2: 32ms

Fluctuation of the setting value caused by noise, etc., can be suppressed by increasing
the time constant.

C12-5 Program setting filter

Program settings are made at S0~SE, however, if these input terminals are changed,
there is a possibility that chattering may occur. In order to avoid this, batch filter
processing is performed for S0~SE.
If the same value is achieved when the S0~SE input terminal is the same as the set time
or longer, the input is enabled, and therefore program settings are not changed from the
time the input is changed until the set time is reached. It is therefore necessary to set a
time equal to or above the time for which there is a possibility that chattering will occur,
and equal to or below the setting delay tolerance time.

C13-2~5 PSO output terminal parameter

Refer to section 5-6-2 for details.

6 – 86
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C14-0 Output gain for FM

C14-1 Output gain for AM

(Note 1)
FM
Output frequency
0V

C14-0

(Note 1)
AM
Output current
0V

C14-1

(Note 1) The maximum output voltage of the FM and AM outputs is approx. 11V.
Thus, even if a large value is set in C14-0 and 1, a voltage exceeding 11V will
not be output.

C14-3~4 FM/AM output offset

By offsetting the following parameters with symbols, it is possible to attach a plus and
minus division. (The value is the setting value set at C13.)
0. Output frequency 11. Torque current
1. Setting frequency/rotation count 13. Actual motor rotation speed
10. Motor rotation speed 14. Namp output
The output is as shown below when a 5V offset is set.
Meter output Meter output

10V 10V

5V
Parameter value 0V Parameter value

–100% 0V 100% –100% 100%

Previous (C14-3=0V, C14-0=1.0) Output frequency example for
output frequency example C14-3=5V, C14-0=0.5

(Note 1) It should be noted that when plus/minus is displayed using an offset, no analog
output is made to the meter when shutting off the power, and the output
becomes 0V (–100% in above example).

6 – 87
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C15-0 Attainment (ATN) detection width C15-0

Setting frequency
(Setting speed)
The attained output ATN operation width is
set. Output
Set with a percentage to the max. frequency frequency
(B00-4) or max. speed (B01-4). (Motor
speed)

ON ON Time
ATN

C15-1 Current (IDET) detection level

Output current
The current detection (IDET) operation level
is set. Set with a percentage of the rated
5%
current (B00-6, B01-6). C15-1
A 5% hysteresis will occur with the IDET
operation.

Time
ON
IDET

C15-2 Speed detection (SPD 1) level − 1

C15-3 Speed detection (SPD 2) level − 2
Output frequency
The speed detection SPD 1 and 2 operation
level is set. 1%
Set with a percentage to the max. frequency C15-2
(B00-4) or max. speed (B01-4). 1%
The output frequency or the motor speed will C15-3
be the comparison target.
A 1% hysteresis will occur with SPD1 and 2
operation.

Time
SPD1

SPD2

C15-4 Zero speed detection (ZSP) level

Output frequency
The zero speed detection ZSP operation (Motor speed)
level is set.
Set with a percentage to the max. frequency
(B00-4) or max. speed (B01-4). 1%
The output frequency or the motor speed will
C15-4
be the comparison target.
A 1% hysteresis will occur with ZSP operation.
Time

ZSP
6 – 88
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C15-5 RDELAY output delay time setting

Set the delay time from sequence output RUN OFF to RDELAY OFF in the sequence
output RDELAY.
Set the time with a 0.1 sec unit.

C16-0 PL0 input selection

C16-1 PL1 input selection
C16-2 PL2 input selection
C16-3 PL3 input selection

The input setting 10 to 13 in the C03 to C06 sequence input are the program output.
This function allows the sequence input to be turned ON when the sequence output is
ON. The sequence output set with this paramater is the target of this function.

C20-0 Start/stop frequencies (speeds)

C20-1 Start/stop frequency (speed) hysteresis
C20-2 Interlock frequency (speed)
C20-3 Run delay timer

The following types of interlock can be obtained for the run RUN and R·RUN commands.

(3)
RUN RUN X
R·RUN RUN Y
ON delay timer
C20-3
(1)
Hysteresis comparator
Frequency (speed)
setting
C20-0
Hysteresis
C20-1
RUNX
(2)

C20-2

(1) Setting start/stop function

The motor will run when the frequency (speed) setting is higher than the C20-0
setting value, and will stop when lower.
Starting and stopping with the setter is possible with this function.
(2) Start interlock
If the frequency (speed) setting value is larger than C20-2 when the run command
(RUN X) is ON, the motor will not start.
Use this function when the frequency setting is to be lowered when starting for safety
purposes.
(Note) When using the set operation start/stop and set interlock function together,
set a higher interlock frequency value than that for the set operation
start/stop frequency.

6 – 89
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

(3) Run delay timer

The motor will be delayed from the run command (RUN X) by the time set in C20-3.

ON
RUN
ON
RUNY

tDLY
C20-3

This is used for synchronization with peripheral machines such as mechanical brakes.
The run delay timer will not function in the jogging or local modes.

(Note 1) Set the parameter setting values to 0 when not using (1), (2) or (3).
(Note 2) The (1), (2) and (3) functions will not function during jogging run.
(Note 3) The (3) function will not function during the local mode.
(Note 4) When interlock is applied on (1), (2) or (3), the FWD and REV LED will flicker.

C21-0 Number of retries

C21-1 Retry wait time

Retry is a function that performs its own fault reset and restarts with pick-up. Set the
number of retries, and the wait time (tRW). If pick-up is not possible within the number of
set times, an IO-4 fault will occur.
The errors that are targets of retry are power module ( ), overcurrent ( ),
overvoltage ( )Note 3), overload ( ), overheat ( ), and ground fault
( ).

OC OC (1) Waiting after trip due to

Output frequency

OC .
(2) (3) Retry with pick up.
(4) Successful pick-up, and
completion of retry.
Motor speed

tRW (2) (3) (4)

(1)
C21-1

Internal n=1 n=2 n=3

FLT

(Note 1) If C21-0=0, retry will not function.

(Note 2) The FA-FC relay output will stay open during retry, but will not function.
(Note 3) OVT retry may not function correctly if the DC voltage drop is slow.
(Note 4) If the run command turns OFF during retry, the retry will be canceled, and the
FA-FC relay contact will turn ON.
(Note 5) The pickup operation is not carried out during vector control with IM sensor and
PM motor control (C30-0 = 4, 5).

CAUTION
When a fault occurs on an extremely rare case, this function automatically resets the fault and restarts
the operation.
If the fault occurs frequently, the inverter could be damaged, so first remove the cause of the fault.

6 – 90
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C21-2 Pick-up wait time

The wait time tPW after the output is cut off to when the pick-up operation is started is set.
Set the time to when the motor residual voltage is abated for this parameter. (The
residual voltage is a voltage generated by the motor after the inverter output turns OFF,
and will be abated in approx. 1 to 3 seconds. This abatement time will take longer if the
motor capacity is large.)

C21-3 Pick-up current limit value

The current limit value during pick-up is set. This setting value is applied only during
pick-up.
Normally, set 100% and use.
Adjust within the following range only when the output torque at restart is to be limited.
C21-3 Setting value ≥ Applicable motor excitation current (%) +10%
(Normally 30 to 40%)

<Pick-up operation (When V/f control is selected)>

Pick-up starts when F.RUN or R.RUN is ON in the PICK ON state or when the power is turned on when
auto start with pick-up is selected (C08-0=3).
The pick-up operation is carried out with the overcurrent limit function as shown below.

Max.
Output frequency frequency

Setting frequency

Motor speed

Motor current

B18-0 (150%)
C21-3 (100%)

Output voltage

tPW
C21-2 Pick-up V/f Re-acceleration
current match after V/f match
limit

6 – 91
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C22-0 Motor overload reference (L0)

C22-1 0Hz overload (L2)
C22-2 0.7 Fbase freq. overload (L1)
C22-5 Motor overload breakdown reference

The operation reference for overload (OLT) is set.

(1) Unit overload (OLT-1) Trip time

(minute) C22-0=50%
Overload protection is performed under C22-0=100%
the following conditions based on the
machine rated current reference.
C30-0=1, 3, 4, 5 (constant torque) 2
150% 1 minute, 170% 2.5 sec.
C30-0=2 (reduced torque)
120% 1 minute, 125% 7.5 sec.
1
However, the overload reference is reduced
by 50% at an output frequency of 1Hz.
The machine overload can be monitored
at D02-2. Furthermore, analog output is
possible if the setting value 8 is selected at 50% 100% 150%
C13-0, 1. Output current
Overload reference
(2) Motor overload (OLT-3)
(L0)
Use the C22-5 setting to set the trip C22-0
breakdown reference current for one C22-2
(L1)
minute in the case of a motor rated current
(B00-6, B01-6) of 100%. When C22-5 is C22-1
(L2)
set to 120% for example, if C22-0 is 100%,
and 120% of the motor rated current is
output, a breakdown stop will occur due to
a motor overload after one minute.
As shown in the diagram on the right, the Base freq. × 0.7 Base freq.
(B00-5, B01-5)
counterclockwise limit characteristics
Output frequency
change by setting C22-0. The diagram on
the right is an example with C22 set to
100% and 50% when C22-5=150%.
For the self-cooling motor, when operating at low speed, set C22-1 and C22-2 to
meet the motor characteristics. These characteristics are as shown in the diagram
on the right.
The motor overload can be monitored at D02-6. Furthermore, select setting value 15
at C13-0, 1 to enable analog output.

C22-4 Motor power loss braking setting

When the motor loss braking function is activated, set the voltage to increase with the
base frequency as a percentage in respect to the rated output voltage (B00-3). Normally,
50% of the default value is set.
When the DC voltage attempts to rise due to deceleration operation or a regenerative
load, the motor loss braking function raises the inverter output voltage and decreases the
motor efficiency to prevent tripping by an overvoltage. This function is valid only when the
motor loss braking is selected with the DBR option selection (C31-0 = 3, 4, 7, 8) in the V/f
control mode (C30-0 = 1, 2).

(Note 1) Take care to motor heating.

(Note 2) If the normal V/f setting is inappropriate, the motor efficiency will increase when
the voltage is increased and thus tripping by the overvoltage could occur
easily.
6 – 92
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C24-0 Overspeed protection level

Set the overspeed protection level. Set as a percentage in respect to the maximum
frequency (B00-4) or maximum speed (B01-4). The output frequency or motor speed is
the target for comparison.

Output frequency
Motor speed

C24-0

Motor coasting

Time

FLT
(overspeed)

C24-1 Control mode changeover during speed detection error

This is valid when vector control with IM sensor (C30-0=4) or PM motor control (C30-4=5)
is selected.
= 1: The speed detection error is not monitored.
= 2: The speed detection error is monitored, and if an error occurs, a fault (FLT) is output.
The motor then coasts to a stop.
= 3: The speed detection error is monitored, and if an error occurs, a minor fault (ALM) is
output. The control changes from the vector control with IM speed sensor to the IM
speed sensor-less vector control, and the operation is continued. When the speed
detection returns to the normal state, the control changes again from the
sensor-less vector control to the vector control with sensor, and the minor fault
output is cleared. The presence of a minor fault due to a speed detection error can
be confirmed with the minor fault monitor (D05-0). This is available only during
vector control with IM sensor.

C24-2 Speed detection error level

C24-3 Speed detection error recovery level

This is valid when C24-1 = 3.

Set as a percentage in respect to the maximum speed (B01-4).
If the deflection of the speed detection value per 2ms increases above the value set with
C24-2, it is judged as a speed detection error, and the control changes from the vector
control with sensor to the sensor-less vector control. After changing, when the deflection
of the speed estimated value for sensor-less vector control and the speed detection value
drops to below the value set with C24-3, it will be judged that the speed detection has
returned to the normal state. The control changes again from the sensor-less vector
control to the vector control with sensor.

6 – 93
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C24-4~6 Speed deviation error

A speed deviation error occurs when the speed command and speed detection difference
is the same or higher than the speed deviation error level (C24-5), and this situation
continues for longer than the speed deviation error judging time (C24-6).

C25-0 High-efficiency operation Voltage reduction time [sec]

This setting value is the time to Output voltage

reduce the output voltage from the
V/f setting value to 0V after the
V/f setting voltage 100%
output frequency reaches the set
frequency.
Normally, the default value (10.0)
is set. When using for loads with
C25-1
sudden torque fluctuations, and Reduced voltage
(50~100)
the output frequency drops Time
remarkably with the overcurrent
C25-0
limit function, set an appropriately (0.1~30.0)
low value. If the rotation becomes
unstable during the voltage
reduction or recovery operations causing a trip, set an appropriately high value.
The high-efficiency operation function is valid when V/f control is selected (C30-0 = 1, 2)
or auxiliary drive is selected.

C25-1 High-efficiency operation Voltage lower limit setting value [%]

Set a value between 50 and 99 while Output voltage

the inverter is stopped to select the 100%
high-efficiency operation function.
V/f setting voltage
When not using the high-efficiency
operation function, set 100 while the Range of output voltage fluctuation with
frequency f
inverter is stopped. C25-1
This setting value is the lower limit of (10~100)
the output voltage reduced when the
Lower limit for reduced output voltage
high-efficiency operation function is
Frequency
selected, and uses the V/f setting f

voltage (output voltage when not

using high-efficiency operation) as the reference.
Normally, the minimum value (50) is set. When using for loads with sudden torque
fluctuations, and the output frequency drops remarkably with the overcurrent limit function,
set an appropriately high value.

(Note) Slipping will increase during high-efficiency operation, so it is recommended to

execute automatic tuning before operation and set the automatic torque boost
selection to valid (A02-1 =2).

<Operation of high-efficiency operation>

Normally for the V/f constant operation, the no-load loss is large with a light load, and the
motor efficiency drops remarkably. Thus, according to the load, the output voltage is
reduced using the C25-1 setting value as the lower limit in respect to the voltage set with
V/f, and the motor efficiency is improved.

6 – 94
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C31-0 DB option selection

Select the usage of the motor loss braking and DBR resistor (built-in or external).
Refer to the explanation on the motor loss braking setting (C22-4) for details on the motor
loss braking function.
The motor loss braking function is valid when V/f control is selected (C30-0 = 1, 2) or
auxiliary drive is selected.

C50-1 Encoder output pulse No. selection

The No. of encoder pulses (2-phase or 1-phase) is set.

The function to convert a 1-phase pulse signal from a proximity sensor, etc., into a
2-phase pulse is validated or invalidated.

A-IN
A-IN1
B-IN
1 B-IN1
2
C50-1

2-phase oscillator

=1: This is set when using an encoder that outputs a 2-phase pulse having a 90° phase
difference.
The rotation direction can be judged, and the speed can be stably controlled even at
low speeds.
Set the No. of pulses for one phase in the No. of encoder pulses (B01-8).

=2: This is set when using an encoder that outputs a 1-phase pulse.
Connect the input pulse to only the A phase, and always leave the B phase
disconnected.
With the 1-phase pulse mode, the rotation direction is recognized as the operating
command direction. The forward run and reverse run directions are not judged.
A speed detection error could occur due to the effect of chattering in low speed
areas, so use a 2-phase encoder when carrying out low-speed run or
forward/reverse run.

(Note 1) The 1-phase pulse mode cannot be used with the PM control mode.
(Note 2) The speed detection direction (symbol) when 1-phase input is selected is
determined based on the movement direction.
(Note 3) In the case where ACR control is performed using vector control with an IM
speed sensor when 1-phase input is selected, this is identified as the rotation
direction outlined in Note 2. Exercise due caution with regards to the
acceleration direction.

C50-2 Encoder ABZ pulse type selection

When using the 2-phase pulse, the rotation direction is judged by the advance and delay
of the 2-phase pulse phase. With the VT230SE, the encoder pulse is defined as shown
below during forward run. (The Z-phase pulse is the zero point position detection and is
used only for PM motor control.) When using an encoder with different signal
specifications, use this setting to invert the signal or convert the signal using the
interchange function.

6 – 95
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Non invert / Invert

A-IN1
AB interchangeable
A
B-IN1
B
Z-IN Z
During CCW rotation t

Pulse conversion circuit Definition of VT230SE encoder

Following the set No., the signal conversion circuit functions with the following combination.

Setting A-IN1 B-IN1 Z-IN AB

No. Non invert Non invert Non invert inter-ch
/ Invert / Invert / Invert ange
0 – – –
1 Invert – –
2 – Invert –
3 Invert Invert – No
inter-
4 – – Invert change
5 Invert – Invert
6 – Invert Invert
7 Invert Invert Invert
8 – – –
9 Invert – –
10 – Invert –
11 Invert Invert – AB
inter-
12 – – Invert change
13 Invert – Invert
14 – Invert Invert
15 Invert Invert Invert

C51-0 Encoder UVW pulse type selection (PM motor control)

A positional encoder outputting a rectangular wave at an electric angle of 180° in 3

phases is used for the purpose of PM motor initial position detection. The encoder signal
clockwise/counterclockwise direction can be set individually for the 3 phases.
With the VT230SE, the position detection signal is defined as shown below. If the polarity is
different from this, apply the internal conversion function to match the VT230SE
specifications.

Invert
U-IN
u

V-IN v

W-IN w
During CCW rotation t

U-IN V-IN W-IN

Setting Non invert Non invert
Non
No. / Invert / Invert invert
/ Invert
0 – – –
1 Invert – –
2 – Invert –
3 Invert Invert –
4 – – Invert
5 Invert – Invert
6 – Invert Invert
7 Invert Invert Invert

6 – 96
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

C51-1 Z-IN → U phase winding phase angle (PM motor control)

C51-2 Z-IN → U pulse angle (PM motor control)

The PM motor control requires position detection, so the following two types of encoder
signals must be used.

(a) A phase and B phase 90° phase difference 2-phase pulse and Z phase zero point
detection pulse signal
(b) U, V, W phase electrical 180° pulse 3-phase pulse

The PM motor magnetic pole position and the above (a), (b) of position relations are set
in (C51-1) and (C51-2).
During forward direction rotation (CCW), observe the waveform between the lines of the
encoder Z-IN pulse and motor terminal's UV voltage. Then, from the following relation
obtain and set the (C51-1) phase angle (electrical angle) using the Z-IN pulse as a
reference. For the phase angle of the Z-IN pulse and u pulse, set the phase difference
using the Z-IN pulse as a reference in (C51-2).

C51-1 Forward run (CCW) time

Z-IN

180°
C51-2
u
v 60°
w

Vuv

Vu Vv
time

30°

Encoder phase angle adjustment (PM motor control)

6 – 97
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-7 Application to square low variable torque load

6-7-1 Specifications for square low variable torque load

A load having characteristics in which the load torque variable with the reduction of the speed, etc.,
such as in a fan or pump, is called a square law variable torque load. The load curves of the constant
torque load and square torque load are shown below.

CAUTION
The variable torque specifications must be applied to square variable loads such as fans and pumps.
The constant torque specifications must be applied for all other types of loads.
Load

Constant torque load

Square law variable torque load

(fan, pump)

Speed

Load curve

The specifications for when the constant torque load and the square law variable torque load are
applied are shown in Appendix 1.
Hereafter, the square law variable torque load characteristics will be called the variable torque.

6 – 98
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-7-2 Selection of load characteristics

Select the load characteristics by setting the following parameters.

Default Min. Max.

No. Name Unit Function
value value value
C30 - Control mode selection
0 Control mode selection — 1. 4. — = 1: V/f control (constant
torque: overload
characteristics 150%
for one minute.)
= 2: V/f control (variable
torque: overload
characteristics 120%
for one minute.) (Note 3)

(1) For the default setting, = 1: constant torque load characteristics is selected, so change the setting
according to the application. When this parameter is selected, there are parameters with setting
values and setting ranges that also fluctuate, so this parameter must be set before the other
parameters.
(2) This parameter is not affected by C09-7: default value load.
If the default value is executed, the values set by the user will be held.
(3) The parameters with setting values and setting ranges that fluctuate when this parameter is
selected are shown below.

Default Min. Max.

No. Name Unit Function
value value value
A02 - Torque boost
Manual torque boost Setting of torque boost at
2 (Note 1) 0.0 20.0 %
setting 0Hz.
A03 - DC brake
2 DC braking voltage (Note 1) 0.1 20.0 %
B00 - Output rating
Constant torque
Motor rated current rated current
Constant torque (Note 2) Overcurrent limit OLT,
× 0.3~1.0
6 Inverter A current % display, meter
Variable torque output reference value
rating
Variable torque rated current
× 0.3~1.0
B18 - Overcurrent limit
Over current limit
Constant torque 150. 50. 300.
0 %
Variable torque 105. 50. 120.

(Note 1) The default value differs according to the inverter capacity and load characteristics
selection.
(Note 2) For the inverter rating value, the constant torque rated current value and variable torque
rated current values given in Appendix 1 will apply.

6 – 99
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

Default Min. Max.

No. Name Unit Function
value value value
C22 - Overload
Overload setting The C22-1, 2 data will be
0 Constant torque 100. 50. 105. % limited by this value when
Variable torque 100. 50. 105. this value is changed.
0Hz overload
The max. value is the value
1 Constant torque 100. 20. 105. %
of C22-2.
Variable torque 100. 20. 100.
0.7 Base freq. overload
The max. value is the value
2 Constant torque 100. 50. 105. %
of C22-1.
Variable torque 100. 50. 100.
Motor overload A breakdown stop (OLT-3)
breakdown reference occurs with the motor rated
5 Constant torque %
150. 110. 300. reference current at this value
Variable torque 120. 110. 300. after 1 minute.

(Note 3) When the load characteristics are changed, the above parameters will be forcibly set to the
default values, so reset them when necessary.
(Note 4) For parameters other than above, the default value and setting range will not change when
the load characteristics are selected.

6-7-3 Overload characteristics

(1) Machine overload (OLT-1)
The machine overload detection curve links to the load characteristics selection and is changed.
The machine overload characteristics are shown below.
The machine rated current is the reference for the current value (%).

Trip time (min.)

When variable torque load

characteristics (C30-0=2) are
selected
2

When constant torque load

characteristics (C30-0=1) are
selected

(Note 1)
(Note 2)

0
0 50 100 150 (%) Output current

Overload characteristics

(Note 1) When the constant torque load characteristics are selected, the 150%, 60s inverse time
characteristics apply.
Note that if 155% of the constant torque's rated current is exceeded, a trip will occur at the
160%, 10s, 170%, 2.5s inverter time characteristics. When 1.0Hz or less, a trip will occur at
the constant torque rated current 75%, 60s inverse time characteristics.
6 – 100
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

(Note 2) When the variable torque load characteristics are selected, the 120%, 60s inverse time
characteristics apply.
Note that if 120% of the variable torque load characteristics are exceeded, a trip will occur
at the 125%, 7.5s inverse time characteristics. When 1.0Hz or less, a trip will occur at the
variable torque load characteristics 75%, 24s inverse time characteristics.
(Refer to Note 3 on the previous page.)

(2) Motor overload (OLT-3)

The motor overload is the counterclockwise limit characteristic determined based on the motor
overload reference (C22-0) and motor overload breakdown reference (C22-5).
For example, if C22-0=100% and C22-5=120%, the motor is tripped at the motor rated current
120%/60 sec. counterclockwise limit characteristic.
Refer to C22-0~2, 5 in item 6-6 for further details.

(Note 3) If changes are made to the load characteristics selection, the motor overload breakdown
reference (C22-5) is forcibly set at 150% when the constant torque load is selected, and
120% when the variable torque load is selected.

6 – 101
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-8 Adjusting the IM vector control speed control related parameters

With the VT230SE, ASR operation is possible by executing automatic tuning and setting simple speed
control parameters. However, when carrying out high-response or high-accuracy control, the
parameters must be adjusted in detail. In this section, the configuration of the speed control system is
explained, and the adjustment parameters that need to be adjusted are indicated.

6-8-1 Speed control system of IM vector control

The speed control system of IM vector control is configured of blocks as shown below. Automatic
tuning is used for adjusting the exciting current control, current regulator, flux observer and speed
estimation mechanism, so these parameters often do not need to be adjusted. However, the
parameters related to the speed regulator, torque limiter, load torque observer, various low path filters,
etc., must be adjusted according to the user's system. Thus, these cannot be simply adjusted with
automatic tuning. The final user of the system must adjust these parameters to match the system.
Adjustments are carried out while referring to the block diagram below.

ACR
ASR A11-0 B13-7
P Control A10-0 B13-6 Torque Torque A11-1 B32-4
Dictated Gain Limiter →Current
A10-1 B30-2
Speed
LPF LPF
＋ ＋ ＋ ＋ M PP
− ＋ ＋ −
B30-3 A10-3 A11-2 B30-7
1/s A10-4 A11-3
LPF ＋
I Control A10-5 − Current Speed
Gain A10-0 A10-2
B30-5 Torque Detection Detection
Command

Load torque
Observer
Detected
B30-0 B30-1 Motor Speed

Exciter
Current
LPF Control Estimated Flux B31-0
Motor Speed Observer
B30-6 B32-0 B33-x & Speed B31-1
Sensor-less Estimation
B32-2 B34-x Vector Control B31-2
Motor
Speed
LPF
Vector Control
with sensor B30-4

IM speed control system block diagram

(Note) The related parameter Nos. are indicated in the above function blocks.

6 – 102
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-8-2 IM motor speed regulator

The IM motor speed regulator (ASR) is configured of PI control, and has the following parameters.

Parameter
Parameter Function
No.
A10-0 ASR response The required ASR response radian frequency is set.
The time to accelerate the motor and load’s torque inertia
A10-1 Machine time constant−1
to the base speed at the rated torque is set.
Integral time constant The compensation coefficient applied on the integral time
A10-2
compensation coefficient constant of the speed regulator (ASR) is set.
This sets the ASR P gain compensation value at the max.
speed.
ASR gain compensation in By adjusting this parameter, the ASR P can be
B13-6
constant power range compensated in the constant power range.
If ASR hunting occurs in the sensor-less control's
constant output range, set a smaller value.
If the speed setting value or motor speed change
ASR proportional item
B30-2 suddenly, this will prevent the ASR's P item from
change rate limit
suddenly changing.

6-8-3 IM motor torque limiter

The output torque is limited. Set an appropriate value for protecting the load side.

Drive torque limiter) Set this to a large value to increase the torque during driving. Note that
output torque control is performed even by the output current limiter
(B18-0), so when set excessively, the set torque may not be attained.

Regenerative torque limiter) Set this to a large value to increase the torque during regeneration.
Note that output torque control is performed even by the output current
limiter (B18-0), so when set excessively, the set torque may not be
attained. If the DBR or PWM converter, etc., are not provided and an
excessively large setting is made, an overvoltage trip could occur during
regeneration. In this case, lower the regeneration torque limiter setting.

Parameter
Parameter Function
No.
A10-3 ASR drive torque limiter The limit value for the ASR drive side is set.
ASR regenerative torque
A10-4 The limit value for the ASR regenerative side is set.
limiter
Emergency stop The ASR regenerative side limit value applied during the
A10-5
regenerative torque limiter emergency stop mode is set.
A11-2 ACR drive torque limiter The ACR drive side limit value is set.
ACR regenerative torque
A11-3 The ACR regenerative side limit value is set.
limiter

6 – 103
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-8-4 IM motor exciting current control

The exciting current is controlled to establish the secondary flux. A current reduction process in the
constant output range or during voltage saturation, and high-speed magnetizing control to raise the
secondary flux at a high speed are also carried out.

Parameter
Parameter Function
No.
This is the control gain used for high-speed control of the
secondary flux when starting operation.
Use this to control the secondary flux at a high speed at
B32-0 Speed flux control gain the start of operation or during operation in a constant
output range.
High speed control is possible by increasing the gain, but
if increased too high, the magnetizing current may hunt.
If the output voltage in control is larger than the voltage
that can be output by the inverter, select this control to
limit the exciting current to prevent the current or torque
from hunting.
Select this when raising the output voltage to near the
Voltage saturation
B32-2 input voltage, or when the input voltage changes.
compensation selection
Note that if voltage saturation occurs, some torque ripple
will occur. In this case, lower the B01-9 no-load voltage
setting to avoid voltage saturation. In this case, care
should be taken because a comparison is made with the
voltage and the output is also reduced.
This is the table reference speed used to perform
B33-x Table reference speed
excitation inductance variation compensation.
This compensates the exciting inductance fluctuation
according to the B33 table reference speed.
M fluctuation The compensation table is set in the constant output
B34-x range in order that the output voltage when operation is
compensation
performed with no load becomes constant.
* This is adjusted by the automatic tuning mode 4. (B19-0)

<Setting the table reference speed>

When all of B34 is set to the default value (=100%), B33 will be automatically set as shown below
when adjusted with automatic tuning mode 4 (B19-0=4).
When set manually and the motor largely fluctuates immediately after M' enters the constant output
range, the voltage error can be reduced by setting the base speed carefully.

M’ variation B33-0 = Base speed/2

compensation B33-1 = Base speed
coefficient B33-7 = Base speed
B33-2 to 6 are assigned at
uniform intervals.

Rotation
speed

B33-0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7
Uniform interval Uniform interval

Operation range

Table reference speed setting method

6 – 104
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-8-5 IM motor current regulator

The current regulator (ACR) is configured of PI control, and has the following parameters.

Parameter
Parameter Function
No.
The ACR response radian frequency is set.
If the response is too low or too high, the current will
A11-0 ACR response
become unstable, and the over current protection will
function.
The ACR time constant is set.
If the time constant is too long or too short, the current
A11-1 ACR time constant
will become unstable, and the over current protection will
function.
ACR gain compensation in This sets the ACR P gain compensation value at the max.
B13-7
constant power range speed.
The voltage fluctuation caused by the leakage inductance
is feed forward controlled.
ACR voltage model FF
B32-4 The current regulator (ACR) response speed will be
selection
increased. Select this if the current hunts in the
high-speed operation range during sensor-less control.

6-8-6 IM motor flux observer and speed estimation mechanism

These are parameters used with speed sensor-less vector control.

Parameter
Parameter Function
No.
This is the feedback gain for the flux observer.
If hunting occurs at the estimated speed in the
B31-0 Flux observer gain
high-speed operation range, adjust within the range of
1.2 to 0.9.
This is the proportional gain for the adaptive speed
Speed estimated estimation mechanism. To increase the speed estimation
B31-1
proportional gain response, set a large value. Note that if the value is too
high, the speed estimation value will hunt.
This is the integral gain for the adaptive speed estimation
Speed estimated integral mechanism. To increase the speed estimation response,
B31-2
gain set a large value. Note that if the value is too high, the
speed estimation value will hunt.

6 – 105
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-8-7 IM motor load torque observer

The disturbance load applied on the motor is calculated and the torque command is compensated.
To increase the response toward disturbance, use the load torque observer.
By setting the speed regulator (ASR) to P and using the load torque observer, overshooting can be
suppressed.

Parameter
Parameter Function
No.
Set the observer gain for the load torque observer.
To increase the responsiveness of the external
disturbance response characteristics, set a large gain.
B30-0 Load torque observer gain Note that if the gain is set too high, the output torque
could hunt.
When set to zero, the load torque observer will not
function.
Model machine time Set the model machine time constant used by the load
B30-1
constant torque observer.

6-8-8 IM motor various low path filters

The time constants of the low path filters used for speed detection, speed commands or torque current
commands, etc., are set.
By adjusting these time constants, vibration caused by noise and overshooting can be suppressed.
Note that if an excessively high value is set, the control performance could drop.

Parameter
Parameter Function
No.
Speed setting LPF time Overshooting can be suppressed by setting this to the
B30-3
constant filter time constant equivalent to the speed response.
Speed detection LPF time
B30-4 The speed detection noise is cut.
constant
Speed detection LPF time Set the low path filter time constant used for the speed
B30-5
constant for ASR detection value input into the speed regulator.
Set the low path filter time constant used for the speed
Speed detection LPF time
B30-6 detection value for constant output range compensation
constant for compensation
or iron loss compensation, etc.
Torque current command Set the low path filter time constant used for the torque
B30-7
setting LPF time constant current command.
LPF time constant for Set the low pass filter time constant applied on the
B30-8
drooping dropping value input into the speed regulator.

6 – 106
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-9 Adjusting the PM motor control system parameters

With the VT230SE, the PM motor can be controlled by using the position detection option dedicated
for the PM motor. The PM motor control has basically the same torque control functions as the IM
vector control with sensor, so either ASR operation or ACR operation is possible.
The differences with the IM vector control are listed below.

IM vector control with sensor PM motor vector control

Only the speed detection is required. Position detection is required.
The 3 phase (U, V, W) signal for operation starts
position detection and the A, B, and Z phases for
fine position detection are required.
Operation with V/F control is also possible. With the PM motor, operation with V/F control is
not possible as the motor could easily pull out
because of load disturbance.
By controlling the exciting current, the induced As the flux of the permanent magnets is always
electromotive force can be controlled. constant, the terminal voltage can be controlled
only by the inductance voltage drop amount by
passing the demagnetizing current. Thus, the
constant output range is narrow compared to the
induction motor control.
DC braking is possible. When exciting the direct current, rotational angle
Even when rotating with the load external force, torque corresponding to the load torque will
the machine will stop at the position after occur, and when the load is removed, the
movement. machine will return to the original phase position.
The 3-phase inductance is equivalent. The d axis and q axis inductance differs.
During a no-load, the exciting current element During a no-load, the current is zero.
current flows. (When the demagnetizing current control is not
functioning.)
There is a time constant from the exciting current The torque can be output simultaneously with the
to the secondary flux generation, so the torque current generation at starting.
generation at starting is delayed.
Even during the motor is running, the terminal While the motor is rotating, an induced
voltage stays at zero even when the gate is cut electromotive force is generated at the terminal
off. even if the gate is cut off. When an overspeed is
reached, a regenerative current is generated to
the inverter and can cause an overvoltage.
When a speed detection error occurs, the Speed sensorless operation is not supported,
operation can be switched to the speed and therefore it is not possible to switch to the
sensor-less operation. sensorless vector.

Precautions for using PM motor

(a) The current is approximately zero during the no-load. It cannot be determined that "the inverter is
stopped because the ammeter reading is zero."
(b) Even if the inverter “CHARGE” LED is not illuminated, motor terminal induced electromotive force
occurs while the motor is rotating. There is a possibility of electric shock, and therefore always
connect cables after the motor has come to a complete stop. Furthermore, if the speed is
significantly higher than the base speed even when performing idle operation, power will be
regenerated from the motor, the inverter DC voltage will be raised, a voltage overload will occur,
and the motor will breakdown. A mechanical brake or other such protective device is required
when external operational torque is applied.

6 – 107
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-9-1 Initializing the parameters

Refer to the PM motor data sheet and set the parameters required for the PM motor control from the
panel. Other settings shall follow the vector control with sensor.

No. Parameter Unit No. Parameter Unit

A20 – ACR control constant (PM) B35 – PM Voltage control constant (PM)
0 ACR response (PM) rad/s Demagnetizing control operation
0 %
1 ACR time constant (PM) ms voltage allowance
1 Demagnetizing current limit value %
2 d axis current command ramp time ms/I1
Demagnetizing current control
3 q axis current command ramp time ms/I1 2 times
proportional gain
B01 – Motor rating Demagnetizing current control integral
3 ms
1 Motor rated output kW time constant
2 No. of motor poles Pole Flux temperature fluctuation
4 %
compensation range
3 Rated output voltage V
–1 Flux temperature fluctuation
4 Max. speed min 5 s
compensation time constant
–1
5 Base speed min B36 – Demagnetizing current table (PM)
6 Motor rated current A Demagnetizing current table 0
0
7 Carrier frequency (at torque command 25%)
8 No. of encoder pulses P/R Demagnetizing current table 1
1
(at torque command 50%)
9 No-load output voltage V
Demagnetizing current table 2
B03 – Motor circuit constant (PM) 2 %/I1
(at torque command 75%)
R1: PM motor primary Demagnetizing current table 3
0 resistance mΩ 3
(at torque command 100%)
(Mantissa section) Demagnetizing current table 4
4
R1: PM motor primary (at torque command 150%)
1 resistance C50 – Encoder setting
(Exponent section)
2 Encoder ABZ pulse type selection
Ld: PM motor d axis
2 inductance mH C51 – Encoder setting
(Mantissa section) 0 Encoder UVW pulse type selection –
Lq: PM motor q axis 1 Z-IN → U-IN winding phase angle deg
3 inductance mH
(Mantissa section) 2 Z-IN → U-IN signal phase angle deg
Ld, Lq: PM motor
4 inductance
(Exponent section)
B13 – Local setting
ACR gain compensation in constant
7 %
power range

6-9-2 PM motor control speed control system

The PM motor control speed control system is configured of the following types of blocks. Of these
blocks, the speed control system and Load torque observer section operate as the same functions as
the IM vector control. The sections unique to the PM motor control are the demagnetizing current
control and current control sections following the torque command. These are adjusted by setting the
parameter sheet data enclosed with the motor from the panel.
Note that as with the IM, the parameters related to the speed regulator, torque limiter, load torque
observer and various low path filters differ according to the user's system, and ultimately must be
adjusted according to the system in use.

6 – 108
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

PM speed control system block

ASR ACR
Torque A20-0 B13-7
P control A10-0 B13-6 command B30-7 Flux current A20-1 B32-4
Dictated gain Torque limiter
A10-1 B30-2 product
Speed ＋ ＋ Torque ＋
current
LPF ＋ LPF operation
− ＋ ＋ B36-x A20-3
− PM PP
B30-3 A10-3 A11-2 ＋ M

current operation
1/s

Demagnetizing
A10-4 A11-3
LPF I control gain A10-0 A10-2 A10-5 A20-2 −
Current Position
B30-5 detection detection

B30-10 B35-0 B35-2

Load torque C50-2
observer B35-1 B35-3
C51-0∼2
Voltage
saturation
B30-0 B30-1 prevention
control

Temperature Motor position

fluctuation
compensation
Speed
detection
B35-4 B35-5
Motor speed

Motor speed
LPF

B30-4

(Note) The numbers of the related parameters are indicated in the above function blocks.

6-9-3 Setting the PM motor circuit constants

The resistance and inductance elements are set as the PM motor circuit constants.
(1) Set the value of one phase converted into a 3-phase & Y connection.
(2) For the inductance element, set the value including the leakage inductance.
(3) If the wiring path is long, add the wiring path element to the motor constant.

In the following wiring example, the set constants are calculated with the following expressions.

(B03-0,1) = R LINE + R1
(B03-2,4) = l LINE + l a + Md
(B03-3,4) = l LINE + l a + Mq
Motor PM motor
Wiring path impedance
resistance Motor leakage
VT230S R LINE l LINE R1 l a inductance
E
U phase

V phase

Md N Mq
S N
S
W phase

PM motor and wiring path circuit constants

6 – 109
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-9-4 Setting the PM motor demagnetizing current pattern

The permanent magnet's flux is generated in the d axis direction, so the torque can be generated by
flowing a q axis current that intersects with this flux. However, with the PM motor, which is an IPM with
permanent magnets embedded in the iron core, the inductance creates a reverse salient relation of Ld
< Lq. Thus, by flowing a demagnetizing current (d axis negative direction current element), a
reactance torque can be generated. By effectively using this reactance torque, more torque can be
generated with less current.
The VT230SE has a function to generate the demagnetizing current according to the torque command,
and the characteristics can be set as table data (B36-0 to 4).
This setting value differs according to the motor design, so set a value that matches the motor. If the
characteristics of the motor are unclear, set all to zero when driving the motor.
Set the demagnetizing current table from the panel with positive values. Even if the setting is a
positive value, it will be internally converted into the d axis negative current command.
This table setting is valid only when the voltage saturation control is not functioning. During the voltage
saturation, explained in the next section, the voltage control function activates to increase the
demagnetizing current, so a demagnetizing current larger than these setting characteristics will be
generated.
Torque command

Trq=150%

q axis current
Iq
Trq=100%
Trq=100%

Trq=75%
Trq=75%

Trq=50%
Trq=50%

Trq=25%
d axis current
Id d-axis current
Ｏ
O Id
Id(100%)
Id(150%) Id(100%)
Id(75%) Id(75%) Id(25%)
Id(50%) Id(25%) Id(50%)

Relation of current vector and torque contour line Demagnetizing table to be set

6-9-5 Differences of constant output range demagnetizing operation

between IM motor and PM motor
When the PM motor's rotation speed is increased, the terminal voltage will rise and reach the
inverter's maximum output voltage. This phenomenon is called voltage saturation, but when the
voltage allowance is eliminated, the current cannot be controlled. Thus, the voltage saturation
prevention function activates to suppress the terminal voltage by passing a demagnetizing current
having the reverse polarity of the flux generated by the magnets.
The following settings are required to use this function effectively.
(B35-0) : Set the voltage allowance to the voltage saturation as a percentage of the rated
voltage.
When the voltage rises and the voltage allowance drops to below this setting value,
the demagnetizing current will flow.
(B35-1) : Set the maximum limit value of the demagnetizing current generated to suppress
voltage saturation.
If the demagnetizing current is too large, the magnet could be demagnetized
(non-reversibly demagnetized).
To prevent this, set a limit for the demagnetizing current.

6 – 110
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

(B35-2, 3) : Set the proportional gain and time constant of the demagnetizing current control.

Voltage
For PM motor control

Output voltage limit Voltage

allowance setting
Motor rated voltage (B35-0)

For IM control
Constant power range

Speed
Base speed

Constant output range operation for IM and PM

6-9-6 Setting the PM motor flux temperature compensation

When the temperature changes, the amount of flux in the permanent magnet fluctuates. Thus, even if
the same current is flowed, the generated torque will differ according to the temperature. The function
that estimates the temperature fluctuation and improves the torque accuracy is the flux temperature
compensation function. This control uses the output voltage information, so during low speed
operation, the voltage element will be too small, and the function will stop. To reduce the effect of
disturbances, such as voltage noise, set the control time constant (B35-5) to a long time (60sec or
more) which is approximately the same as the temperature time constant.
To prevent locking at an abnormal level because of malfunctioning, a limiter (B35-4) is provided for the
compensation amount. In the normal usage state, the drift value by the temperature fluctuation is
approximately 10%, so normally set 10% or more. The temperature compensation function can be
turned OFF by setting this to 0.

(B35-4) : Set the value to limit the fluctuation width for carrying out flux compensation. This
value is normally set to 10% or less. If 0 is set (B35-4 = 0), the flux fluctuation
compensation function will be invalidated.
(B35-5) : Normally, a time constant of one hour or more is provided as the motor's temperature
characteristics. However, depending on the temperature, the flux fluctuation will
fluctuate at a time constant approximate to this. This will cause the temperature
compensation control and response to be delayed, so set a time constant equivalent
to several seconds.

6-9-7 Setting the PM motor encoder phase angle

The PM motor control requires position detection, so the following encoder pulses must be used.

(a) A phase and B phase 90° phase difference 2-phase pulse and Z phase zero point detection
pulse.
(b) U, V, W phase electrical 180° pulse 3-phase pulse.

The signal specifications of this position sensor do not follow a unified standard, and will differ
according to the maker or model. Thus, if the specifications differ from the signal specifications
defined for the VT230SE, the signal waveform must be compensated.
If the zero point position and winding phase relation are not set correctly, an error will occur in the
torque control, so settings must also be made for the encoder signals.

Refer to the parameters C50-2, C51-0~2 for details

6 – 111
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-10 Operating the auxiliary drive motor

With the VT230SE, by switching the internal control with the external sequence input AUXDV
(auxiliary drive selection), the main motor operated with the parameter C30-0 control mode and an
auxiliary drive motor operated with V/F control can be operated.

6-10-1 Switching the main and auxiliary drive motor control

The inverter's internal main drive motor control and auxiliary drive motor control is switched with the
external sequence input AUXDV. However, the control must be switched while the motor is stopped.
The switch will be invalid if carried out while the motor is running.
When switching the control, the sequence output RDY1 and RDY2 (READY) turn OFF, and the
inverter operation is prohibited. The state of the inverter internal control switching can be confirmed
with the sequence output AUXDV (auxiliary drive selection).

VT230SE
Power IM Main drive
supply Input Output or
OFF Main drive control
PM motor
selection

(Selected with C30-0)

Control

ON
Auxiliary drive control IM Auxiliary
AUXDV (V/F control) drive motor

Sequence input Sequence output

Control switching Control switching

command confirmation
(AUXDV) (AUXDV)

Inverter operation state Running Stopped Running

(Note) (Note)

Sequence input AUXDV OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Sequence output AUXDV OFF ON

Sequence output RDY1, RDY2 ON Approx. 0.1s ON

OFF

Inverter internal control Main drive motor control valid (Follows C30-0) Auxiliary drive motor control valid (V/F control)

(Note) The main and auxiliary drive motor control cannot be switched while the inverter is running.

Switching of main drive motor control and auxiliary drive motor control

6 – 112
 6. Control Functions and Parameter Settings

6-10-2 Auxiliary drive motor control related parameters

The dedicated parameters for auxiliary drive motor control are shown below. These differ from the V/F
control (C30-0 = 1, 2) for the main drive motor control, and some functions cannot be used during
auxiliary drive motor control.

Dedicated parameters for auxiliary drive motor

No. Parameter
B20-0~5 Output rating
B21-0~1 Frequency setting
B22-0~3 Acceleration/deceleration time
B23-0~1 Torque boost
B24-0~1 DC brake
Over current limit (The parameters B18-3~6
B25-0~2
are shared with the main drive motor control)
B27-0~4 Power outage deceleration setting
C23-0~4 Start/stop frequency, overload

The below some functions can not be used during auxiliary drive motor control.

Functions, settings and sequence inputs that cannot be used

during auxiliary drive motor control
Function and setting Related parameter and
that cannot be used sequence input
Automatic torque boost A02-4~6
Frequency skip B05-0~5
Ratio interlock B06-0~3
V/F middle point B17-0~3
Frequency increment/
C05-1~2 (Sequence input FUP/FDW)
decrement
Interlock ratio bias
C05-3~4 (Sequence input BUP/BDW)
increment/decrement
Automatic tuning B19-0
Primary resistance B02-0~1 (Dedicated for main drive motor)
Control mode selection C30-0 (Dedicated for main drive motor)
Serial/parallel speed (Forcibly set to 0Hz during auxiliary drive
setting operation)

6 – 113
 7. Options

Chapter 7 Options
7-1 Outline of options
The VT230SE Series options include those shown below. This chapter will focus on the stand-alone
options and main circuit wiring devices.
Stand-alone option

DCL
DB unit
Main circuit wiring device
Power
supply MCCB or MC Noise filter
ACL Inverter unit
Fuse

Built-in PCB option

Fig. 7-1 Option configurations

Table 7-1
Item Type Function
Main circuit wiring devices
Breaker for Select a device that Always install this device to protect the wiring of the inverter
wiring matches the inverter and peripheral devices.
(MCCB) or rating.
Fuse (Refer to Table 7-2.)
Magnetic Select a device that Install this device to provide an operation interlock.
contactor matches the inverter When using the DB unit, always install this device to protect
(MC) rating. the DBR. (Refer to Fig. 2-4.)
(Refer to Table 7-2.)
Stand-alone options
ACL V21-ACL- If the capacity of the inverter's power supply transformer
(Refer to Table 7-2.) exceeds 10 times the inverter unit capacity, always install
this device to protect the inverter. (Balance with power
supply) This is also effective in improving the power factor of
the inverter input and in suppressing the current high
harmonics. The power factor will be approx. 0.9.
DCL V21-DCL- Install this device to improve the power factor of the inverter
(Refer to Table 7-2.) input.
This is also effective in creating a balance with the power
supply as the ACL. The power factor will be approx. 0.9.
Noise filter RS - This device suppresses the electromagnetic noise
(Refer to Table 9-2-1. generated by the inverter.
to Table 9-2-3) The electromagnetic noise is the radiation of
electromagnetic waves in the radio frequency bands and
that conveyed to the power supply wires. Mounting of this
device is recommended for creating a balance with the
peripheral devices of the inverter.
DB unit V23-DBU- This is used when the motor is to be stopped with dynamic
(Refer to Table 7-2.) braking.

7–1
 7. Options

Table 7-1 (continued)

Built-in PCB options (These are built-in type options mounted on the basic PCB of the inverter.)
Indication
Type
of rating
Item (Instruction Function
nameplate
manual)
(Note 1)
Speed detection 1 V23-DN1 This is a speed detection PCB for the IM vector control
(complimentary (ST-3299) with speed sensor, and is compatible with the
compatible) complimentary output type encoder. I V
Response frequency: Change between 60±10kHz
and 20kHz.
Speed detection 2 V23-DN2 This is a speed detection PCB for the IM vector control
(line driver (ST-3300) with speed sensor, and is compatible with the line
compatible) driver output type encoder. I W
Response frequency: 250kHz (signal: A, B, Z
phase)
Speed detection 3 V23-DN3 This is a speed (pole position) detection PCB for the
(PM compatible) (ST-3301) PM drive control, and is compatible with the line driver
output type encoder. I Y
Response frequency: 250kHz (signal: A, B, Z, U, V,
W phase)
Relay interface V23-RY0 This is used to expand the contact input/output points.
(ST-3302) Relay input : 4 points (PSI6 to 9) III R
1c contact output : 2 points (PSO4, 5)
Multi-pump V23-RY1 This is used when performing main pump rotation by
dedicated relay (ST-3437) multi-pump control. III 8
interface 1C contact output: 8 contacts (MP1-1~MP4-2)
PC interface V23-PI0 This is used to receive parallel settings from the PLC.
(ST-3303) Parallel data input : 16 bits
Data length : 16, 12, 8 bits selective III P
Format : Binary or BCD selective
Open collector output : 2 points (PSO4, 5)
Serial interface V23-SL0 This is used to make a connection with serial
(ST-3304) transmission to the personal computer, etc.
Transmission : RS-232C,
III S
RS-422/485Multi-drop is
possible for up to 32 units.
Baud rate : 1200~9600 bps
Profibus interface V23-SL6 This is used to make a connection with the network on
(ST-3307) the Profibus DP communication protocol.
III Q
Baud rate : 12Mbps
No. of stations : 126 stations
CANopen V23-SL7 This is used to make a connection with the CANopen
interface (ST-3433) network.
Certification Transmission speed: 125kbps, 250kbps, 500kbps,
III 3
tests under 1Mbps
(DIP switch settings can be made.)
No. of stations : 128 stations
Device net V23-SL8 This is used to make a connection with the device net
interface (ST-3431) network.
Transmission speed: 125kbps, 250kbps, 500kbps III 4
(DIP switch settings can be made.)
No. of stations : 64 stations
CC-Link interface V23-SL9 This is used to make a connection with the CC-Link
(ST-3435) network.
Transmission speed: 156kbps, 625kbps, 2.5Mbps,
III 5
5Mbps, 10Mbps
(DIP switch settings can be made.)
No. of stations : 64 stations

(Note 1) "0" indicates that the optional PCB is not installed.

7–2
 7. Options

Table 7-2 Main circuit wiring device ratings and stand-alone option types
MCCB MC
Inverter type Fuse trip rated DB unit
ACL DCL Noise filter
(Note 2) current current (Refer to 7-3)
Constant Reduction
torque torque (A) (A)
0P4L — 20 5 20 V21-ACL-LA4T V21-DCL-LA3 NF3005A-MJ
0P7L 0P4L 20 5 20 V21-ACL-LA4T V21-DCL-LA6 NF3005A-MJ
1P5L 0P7L 50 10 20 V21-ACL-LA8T V21-DCL-LA10 NF3010A-MJ
2P2L 1P5L 60 15 20 V21-ACL-LA12T V21-DCL-LA15 NF3010A-MJ The DB
transmission
4P0L 2P2L 110 20 20 V21-ACL-LA18T V21-DCL-LA22 NF3020A-MJ is built in.
5P5L 4P0L 125 30 32 V21-ACL-LA27 V21-DCL-LA32 NF3030A-MJ
7P5L 5P5L 225 40 50 V21-ACL-LA35 V21-DCL-LA45 NF3040A-MJ
- 7P5L 225 75 60 V21-ACL-LA55 V21-DCL-LA60 NF3050A-MJ
011L - 225 75 60 V21-ACL-LA55 V21-DCL-LA60 NF3050A-MJ
015L 011L 250 75 80 V21-ACL-LA70 V21-DCL-LA80 NF3060A-MJ V23-DBU-L1
018L 015L 400 100 100 V21-ACL-LA70 V21-DCL-LA100 NF3080A-MJ
022L 018L 500 150 100 V21-ACL-LA90 V21-DCL-LA120 NF3100A-MJ
V23-DBU-L2
030L 022L 500 150 135 V21-ACL-LA140 V21-DCL-LA150 NF3150A-MJ
037L 030L 600 200 200 V21-ACL-LA180 V21-DCL-LA180 NF3150A-MJ
V23-DBU-L3
045L 037L 600 200 200 V21-ACL-LA200 V21-DCL-LA220 NF3200A-MJ
055L 045L 800 300 260 V21-ACL-LA260 V21-DCL-LA270 NF3250A-CD
075L 055L 1000 400 350 V21-ACL-LA320 V21-DCL-LA350 NF3300A-CD V23-DBU-L4
— 075L 1200 500 400 V21-ACL-LA400 V21-DCL-LA410 NF3400A-CD
0P4H — 10 5 20 V21-ACL-HA3T V21-DCL-HA2 NF3005C-MJ
0P7H 0P4H 10 5 20 V21-ACL-HA3T V21-DCL-HA3 NF3005C-MJ
1P5H 0P7H 20 5 20 V21-ACL-HA4T V21-DCL-HA5 NF3005C-MJ
2P2H 1P5H 30 5 20 V21-ACL-HA6T V21-DCL-HA8 NF3005C-MJ The DB
transmission
4P0H 2P2H 50 15 20 V21-ACL-HA10T V21-DCL-HA12 NF3010C-MJ is built in.
5P5H 4P0H 60 20 20 V21-ACL-HA14T V21-DCL-HA18 NF3015C-MJ
7P5H 5P5H 90 30 20 V21-ACL-HA18T V21-DCL-HA25 NF3020C-MJ
- 7P5H 110 40 32 V21-ACL-HA27 V21-DCL-HA32 NF3030C-MJ
011H - 110 40 32 V21-ACL-HA27 V21-DCL-HA32 NF3030C-MJ
015H 011H 125 40 50 V21-ACL-HA35 V21-DCL-HA40 NF3030C-MJ V23-DBU-H1
018H 015H 175 50 50 V21-ACL-HA35 V21-DCL-HA50 NF3040C-MJ
022H 018H 225 50 50 V21-ACL-HA45 V21-DCL-HA60 NF3050C-MJ
V23-DBU-H2
030H 022H 250 75 80 V21-ACL-HA70 V21-DCL-HA80 NF3060C-MJ
037H 030H 300 100 100 V21-ACL-HA90 V21-DCL-HA90 NF3080C-MJ
V23-DBU-H3
045H 037H 400 100 135 V21-ACL-HA90 V21-DCL-HA110 NF3100C-MJ
055H 045H 400 150 135 V21-ACL-HA110 V21-DCL-HA140 NF3150C-MJ
075H 055H 500 200 170 V21-ACL-HA150 V21-DCL-HA180 NF3150C-CD
090H 075H 700 300 200 V21-ACL-HA180 V21-DCL-HA210 NF3200C-CD
110H 090H 800 300 260 V21-ACL-HA210 V21-DCL-HA270 NF3250C-CD V23-DBU-H4
132H 110H 800 350 350 V21-ACL-HA300 V21-DCL-HA310 NF3300C-CD
160H 132H 1200 400 350 V21-ACL-HA360 V21-DCL-HA400 NF3400C-CD
200H 160H 1600 500 500 V21-ACL-HA460 V21-DCL-HA540 NF3400C-CD
250H 200H 2000 700 660 V21-ACL-HA520 V21-DCL-HA650 NF3500C-CD
V23-DBU-H4
315H 250H 2000 800 660 V21-ACL-HA580 V21-DCL-HA740 NF3600C-CD
x2 units
370H 315H 3000 900 800 V21-ACL-HA700 V21-DCL-HA820 NF3800C-CD
550H 370H 4000 1400 1000 V23-ACL-HA900 V21-DCL-HA970 —
V23-DBU-H4
660H 550H 4000 1600 1400 V23-ACL-HA1300 V23-DCL-HA1400 —
x3 units
- 660H 4000 1600 1400 V23-ACL-HA1300 V23-DCL-HA1400 —
7–3
 7. Options

(Note 1) Device selection conditions

• The input current is calculated as follows: I = (IMkW)/ηIM/ηINV/COSø/voltage/√3
• The ηIM (motor efficiency) is 0.85 for 11kW or less, 0.9 for 15kW or more.
• The ηINV (inverter efficiency) is 0.95.
• COSø (input power factor) is 0.9.
• The power supply voltage is 220V/440V. (If the power supply voltage differs, recalculate and
select.)
(Note 2) Use the rated current fuse shown in item 9-1-3 for the 400V Series when conforming to UL standards.
Use a rated voltage 600V, Class J UL recognized fuse. (does not include 055H and above)
(Note 3) When using with the IM sensor-less vector control , the IM vector control with sensor, or PM motor
control, use the constant torque inverter type.

7–4
 7. Options

7-2 Built-in PCB option

This is a built-in type option mounted on the VT230SE control PCB.
One type can be selected from option I, option II and option III. UP to three types of PCB options can
be mounted at once.
These PCB options are connected to the connector on the VT230SE control PCB, and can be easily
mounted even after purchasing the VT230SE.
* The PCB option cover is required when the PCB option is mounted.
Refer to each instruction manual for details on the PCB options.

7-2-1 Option classes

(1) Option I
This is a PCB option for speed detection during IM vector control with speed sensor and PM
motor control. The mounting position is fixed.

(2) Option II
There is currently no applicable PCB option.

(3) Option III

This is the PCB option for the relay interface, etc.

Refer to Table 7-1 for the detailed option classes.

Option II

Option III
Control PCB cover

Option I

Option cover

Built-in PCB option mounting drawing

7–5
 7. Options

7-3 Dynamic braking (DB) option

The VT230SE has a dynamic braking option.
Note) When Unit built-in DBR is used, set C22-3 : (DBR overload protection parameter) to less than
the actual used %ED. When the external DB unit is used, set C22-3 to 0.0.

7-3-1 7P5H and smaller, and 7P5L and smaller

The DBR transistor is built in as a standard. Note that DB resistor is an option. The DB is required to
use dynamic braking.
When using the DB, use at 10%ED or less as shown in Fig. 7-2.
When using the dynamic braking option, set parameter B18-1: Regenerative current limit and C31-0:
DB option selection.

t1 t2

Speed
T ≥ 10min
t = t1 + t2 + ···tn ≤ 1min
t1, t2, ···tn≤ 10sec

Fig. 7-2

(1) Unit built-in DBR

The DBR built into the unit is shown in Fig. 7-3. If these resistors are applied, use within t(sec)
shown in Table 7-3. These resistors can be installed easily even after the unit is purchased. If
designated when ordered, they will be built in.
Designation method
VT230SE-7P5HB000X001

Main circuit option A: Standard (No DBR)

B: With DBR (The resistor shown in Table 7-3 is built in.)

Table 7-3
Resistance Resistance Braking Max. t Resistance Resistance Braking Max. t
Device Device
capacity value torque (SEC) capacity value torque (SEC)
type type
(W) (Ω) (%)(Note 1) (Note 2) (W) (Ω) (%)(Note 1) (Note 2)
0P4L 120 220 200 30 0P4H 120 430 340 10
0P7L 120 220 110 30 0P7H 120 430 220 10
1P5L 120 220 55 30 1P5H 120 430 130 10
2P2L 120 180 45 20 2P2H 120 430 75 10
4P0L 120 110 45 10 4P0H 120 430 45 10
5P5L 120 91 35 10 5P5H 120 430 30 10
7P5L 120 91 25 10 7P5H 120 430 20 10

(Note 1) The case for the constant torque is shown. When using the square reduction torque, the
control torque for one capacity higher will apply.
(Note 2) Set C22-3 to [ t / 600sec] X 100%.

7–6
 7. Options

(2) External DB resistor

If the braking torque is insufficient with the above built-in resistor, provide an external DB resistor
with a circuit as shown in Fig. 7-3. When using an external DB resistor, remove the built-in DB
resistor. The resistance value and usable minimum resistance value to obtain a 100% braking
torque is shown in Table 7-4.
When using the external DB resistor, use of a burning prevention circuit, including the thermal
relay (76D) shown in Fig. 7-3 is recommended.

External DB resistor

L+1 2 MC control
sequence circuit

MC ON

OFF
DBR Transistor
76D
THRY

MC

Fig. 7-3 DB circuit

Table 7-4
100% braking 100% braking
Min. Applicable Min. Applicable
Device resistance Device resistance
resistance wire size resistance wire size
type value [Ω] 2 type value [Ω] 2
value [Ω] [mm ] value [Ω] [mm ]
(Note 1) (Note 1)
0P4L 145 450 2.0 0P4H 200 1830 2.0
0P7L 145 240 2.0 0P7H 200 970 2.0
1P5L 80 120 2.0 1P5H 200 480 2.0
2P2L 50 80 2.0 2P2H 200 330 2.0
4P0L 30 45 2.0 4P0H 120 195 2.0
5P5L 20 30 2.0 5P5H 60 130 2.0
7P5L 15 20 2.0 7P5H 60 95 2.0

(Note 1) The 100% braking resistance value (Ω) for the constant torque is shown. When using a
square reduction torque, the 100% braking resistance value for one capacity higher will
apply.

7-3-2 011H and larger, and 011L and larger

When carrying out dynamic braking with the 011H and larger, and 011L and larger unit, use the DB
unit.
Connect the DB unit as shown in Fig. 7-4. When carrying out dynamic braking with one DB unit, use at
10%ED or less as shown in Fig. 7-2. If the braking torque is insufficient with one unit, connect a DB
unit in parallel. Refer to V23-DBU Instruction Manual (ST-3296) for details.

7–7
 7. Options

DB unit No. 1 DB unit No. 2

MC control (V23-DBU- ) (V23-DBU- )
sequence circuit DB
DB resistor
B resistor B
MC ON
L+ L- L+ L-
OFF

DB unit
Fault

MC

L+1 L+2 L–
MC
L1 VT230SE U
L2 V M
L3 W

Fig. 7-4 DB unit connection

The resistance value and usable minimum resistance value to obtain a 100% braking torque is shown
in Table 7-5.

Table 7-5
100% 100% Min.
DB unit DB unit
braking Applicable Min. braking Applicable resistance
Device type Device type
resistance wire size resistance resistance wire size
type V23-DBU- 2 type V23-DBU- 2 value [Ω]
value [Ω] [mm ] value [Ω] value [Ω] [mm ]
(Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 3)

011L L1 15.6 2.0 9.3 011H H1 62 2.0 37

015L L1 11.5 3.5 9.3 015H H1 46 2.0 37
018L L2 9.3 5.5 9.3 018H H2 37 2.0 37
022L L2 7.8 5.5 5.7 022H H2 31 3.5 23
030L L3 5.7 14.0 5.7 030H H3 23 5.5 23
037L L3 4.6 14.0 3.8 037H H3 18 14.0 15
045L L4 4.1 14.0 1.5 045H H4 15 14.0 15
055L L4 3.4 14.0 1.5 055H H4 13 14.0 3.3
075L L4 2.5 3.3 1.5 075H H4 9.9 14.0 3.3
090H H4 8.2 14.0 3.3
110H H4 6.7 14.0 3.3
132H H4 5.6 14.0 3.3
160H H4 4.6 14.0 3.3
200H H4 3.7 22.0 3.3
250H H4 × 2 sets 6.0 22.0 3.3
315H H4 × 2 sets 4.8 22.0 3.3
370H H4 × 2 sets 4.0 22.0 3.3
550H H4 × 3 sets 4.0 22.0 3.3
660H H4 × 3 sets 3.4 22.0 3.3

(Note 2) The 100% braking resistance value (Ω) for the constant torque is shown. When using
Variable torque, the 100% braking resistance value for one capacity higher will apply.
(Note 3) The value a unit is indicated.

7–8
 7. Options

(1) Set the following parameters when using DB unit.

C31-0 = 2 ; Without motor power loss braking, With DB

= 4 ; With motor power loss braking, With DB
B18-1 = 100% ; Regenerative current limit
B25-1 = 100% ; Regenerative current limit
(Auxiliary drive)
Set this to 10% when not using the DBR

When limiting the regenerative torque at the full speed range, set the value obtained with the following
expression.
B18-1 = Regenerative current limit ｘ 1.1
B25-1 = Regenerative current limit ｘ 1.1 (Auxiliary drive)

(2) Obtain the power generation capacity and DBR resistance value with the following expressions.

Regenerative torque
Power generation capacity (kW) = × 0.8 × Motor capacity (kW)
Motor rated torque

K
DBR resistance value =
Power generation capacity

Note that for the 200V Series, K = 148.2

For the 400V Series, K = 593

Please consult our company when you use the DB resistance more than the parallel four.

7–9
 7. Options

7-4 ACL and DCL

Select the ACL and DCL according to the Table 7-2 inverter type. Refer to Table 7-6, Table 7-7 for the
outline dimension. The ACL is equivalent to a 3% impedance of the inverter capacity.

Ｎ端子
max Ｆ

Ｂ max Ｃ
Ａ Ｅ Ｄ
4-øG installation hole 4-øG installation hole
(1) (2)

Fig. 7-8-1 Outline of ACL

Table 7-6 Outline dimensions of ACL (Outline : Fig. 7-8-1)

ACL type Dimensions (mm) Weight Shape
V21-ACL- A B C D E F G I J N (kg) class

LA4T 170 100 70 85 2 150 8 – – M4 4

LA8T 170 100 70 85 2 160 8 – – M4 4
(1)
LA12T 170 100 70 85 2 165 8 – – M4 5
LA18T 170 100 70 85 2 175 8 – – M4 5
LA27 170 100 70 85 50 130 8 35 60 5.3 6
LA35 170 100 70 85 50 130 8 35 60 6.4 6
LA55 190 100 75 105 60 155 8 40 70 6.4 10
LA70 190 100 75 105 80 180 8 40 80 6.4 11
LA90 220 150 90 115 80 180 8 50 80 8.4 13
LA140 220 150 90 115 80 210 8 50 100 10.5 18 (2)
LA180 270 200 110 150 80 240 11 50 100 10.5 25
LA200 270 200 110 150 100 260 11 50 110 10.5 28
LA260 270 200 110 150 100 270 11 50 120 10.5 30
LA320 300 200 140 180 120 290 11 60 120 13 45
LA400 300 200 140 180 120 300 11 60 120 13 46

7 – 10
 7. Options

Table 7-6 (continued) Outline dimensions of ACL (Outline : Fig. 7-8-1)

ACL type Dimensions (mm) Weight Shape
V21-ACL- A B C D E F G I J N (kg) class

HA3T 170 100 70 85 2 150 8 – – M4 4

HA4T 170 100 70 85 2 155 8 – – M4 4
HA6T 170 100 70 85 2 165 8 – – M4 4
(1)
HA10T 170 100 75 95 2 170 8 – – M4 6
HA14T 170 100 75 95 2 175 8 – – M4 6
HA18T 170 100 75 95 2 190 8 – – M4 6
HA27 190 100 75 105 50 160 8 40 75 5.3 9
HA35 190 100 75 105 50 160 8 40 70 6.4 9
HA45 220 150 90 115 50 160 8 50 75 6.4 13
HA70 220 150 90 115 80 185 8 50 90 6.4 16
HA90 270 200 110 150 80 240 11 50 95 8.4 25
HA110 270 200 110 150 80 240 11 50 95 8.4 27
HA150 300 200 140 180 80 260 11 60 95 10.5 43
(2)
HA180 300 200 140 180 80 280 11 65 105 10.5 45
HA210 330 200 140 180 110 270 11 65 100 10.5 50
HA300 350 240 160 210 120 310 15 65 110 13 65
HA360 350 240 160 210 150 320 15 65 120 13 70
HA460 370 280 160 210 150 370 15 70 170 13 100
HA520 370 280 160 210 150 390 15 70 190 13 100
HA580 370 280 160 210 150 410 15 70 210 17 110

Max E

Fig. 7-8-2 Outline of ACL

Table 7-7 Outline dimensions of ACL (Outline : Fig. 7-8-2)

ACL type Dimensions (mm) Weight
V23-ACL- A B L H h C D E F G I (kg)
HA700 500 350 150 410 450 20 75 440 300 262 51 165
HA900 500 350 150 430 460 20 75 440 300 262 51 170
HA1300 500 350 150 475 515 30 100 440 340 292 42 215

7 – 11
 7. Options

H
K L

F
C

MaxG

(1)

L
L

(2-1) (2-2)

(3)

Fig. 7-9 Outline of DCL (4)

7 – 12
 7. Options

261

(5)

Terminal detail drawing

Caution
nameplate

Specifications
nameplate

2-M10 Eyebolts

4-ø10 Mounting holes

M6 Earth

(6)

Fig. 7-9 Outline of DCL (continued)

7 – 13
 7. Options

Table 7-8 Outline dimensions of DCL (Outline : Fig. 7-9 )

DCL type Dimensions (mm) Weight Shape
V21-DCL- A B C D E F G H I J N (kg) class

LA32 65 130 195 45 110 – 50 M6 150 7 – 4.5

LA45 65 130 220 45 110 – 50 M6 180 7 – 5.6 (2-1)
LA60 65 130 225 45 110 – 50 M6 180 7 – 6.1
LA80 65 130 240 45 110 – 80 M6 196 7 – 6.8
LA100 65 130 240 45 110 – 90 M8 196 7 – 7.2
LA120 65 130 253 45 110 – 110 M8 210 7 – 8.2
LA150 75 140 246 55 120 – 100 M8 203 7 – 9 (2-2)
LA180 75 140 247 55 120 – 120 M10 204 7 – 10
LA220 75 140 265 55 120 – 120 M10 222 7 – 11
LA270 75 140 307 55 120 – 120 M12 254 7 – 15
LA350 120 140 303 100 120 – 135 M12 240 7 – 21
(3)
LA410 120 140 321 100 120 – 150 M12 256 7 – 25

DCL type Dimensions (mm) Weight Shape

V21-DCL- (kg) class
A B C D E F G H I J N
HA18 105 109 88 88 95 32 20 M4 – 7 – 3.7 (1)
HA25 65 130 232 45 110 – 50 M6 190 7 – 5.5
HA32 65 130 235 45 110 – 50 M6 191 7 – 6.4
HA40 65 130 250 45 110 – 65 M6 205 7 – 7.3
(2-2)
HA50 65 130 240 45 110 – 65 M6 196 7 – 7.5
HA60 65 130 240 45 110 – 70 M6 198 7 – 7.9
HA80 65 130 247 45 110 – 70 M6 204 7 – 8.2
HA90 65 130 249 45 110 – 90 M8 206 7 – 9
(2-1)
HA110 65 130 265 45 110 – 100 M8 222 7 – 10
HA140 75 140 289 55 120 – 100 M8 236 7 – 12 (2-2)
HA180 120 140 281 100 120 – 120 M10 228 7 – 18
HA210 120 140 299 100 120 – 120 M10 246 7 – 23
(3)
HA270 120 140 289 100 120 – 120 M12 236 7 – 23
HA310 120 140 333 100 120 – 135 M12 270 7 – 23
HA400 225 225 216 195 195 34 120 M12 – 10 M8 25
HA540 250 250 215 210 210 34 120 M16 – 10 M8 28
HA650 275 275 201 235 235 34 120 M16 – 10 M8 32 (4)
HA740 275 275 236 235 235 34 120 M16 – 10 M8 35
HA820 275 275 262 235 235 34 120 M16 – 10 M8 42

Dimensions (mm) Weight Shape

DCL type
A B C D E F (kg) class
V21-DCL-HA970 300 300 261 260 260 34 50 (5)
V23-DCL-HA1400 325 325 295 285 285 42 80 (6)

7 – 14
 8. Maintenance and Inspection

Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspection

! DANGER

• Always wait at least 20 minutes after turning the input power OFF before starting inspections.
Wait at least 20 minutes after turning the input power OFF before starting work. Make sure that the
displays on the operation panel have gone out before removing the front cover.
Remove the front cover, and confirm that the "CHARGE" LED on the drive PCB or at the side of the
control PCB has gone out. Also check that the voltage between terminals L+1 or L+2 and L– is 15V
or less before starting the inspections.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
• Maintenance, inspections and part replacement must be done by a designated person.
(Remove all metal accessories such as watches, bracelets, etc., before starting the work.)
(Always use an insulation measure tool.)
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks and injuries.
• Always turn the power OFF before inspecting the motor or machine. A potential is applied on the motor
terminal even when the motor is stopped.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks and injuries.
• Do not use parts other than those designated for the replacement parts.
Contact your inverter dealer for replacement parts.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.

CAUTION

• Vacuum the inverter with a vacuum cleaner to clean it. Do not use water or organic solvents.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires or damage.

8-1 Inspection items

The inspections must be carried out periodically according to the working environment and frequency
of use. If there are any abnormalities, the cause must be inspected immediately and countermeasures
taken.

(1) Daily inspections

Table 8-1
Inspection item Inspection details and work
Confirm that the ambient temperature is –10 to 50°C, and that the humidity
Temperature/humidity
is 95% or less with no dew condensation.
Oil mist and dust Confirm that there is no oil mist or dust in the VT230SE.
Abnormal noise and Confirm that there is no abnormal noise or vibration from the installation site
vibration or VT230SE.
Confirm that the input voltage and frequency are within the specifications
Input power source
range.
Confirm that the cooling fan rotates normally and that no lint, etc. is stuck on
Cooling fan
it.
Indicator Confirm that all lamps on the operation panel light properly.

8–1
 8. Maintenance and Inspection

(2) Periodic inspections

Table 8-2
Inspection item Inspection details and work
Check the state of dirt and dust on the vent or heatsink, and clean if
VT230SE appearance
necessary.
Check the state of dirt and dust on the PCB and inside the equipment, and
VT230SE interior
clean if necessary.
Terminal block Tighten the terminal block screws if loose.
Cooling fan Replace the fan every three years.
Confirm that there is no liquid leaking or sheath discoloration.
Please exchange electrolytic capacitors of a main circuit for about five years.
Electrolytic capacitor (When the average temperature is 25℃ or less year. Please consult our
company when it is used in the environment for the average temperature to
exceed 25℃ during year. )
Insulation resistance Do not perform a megger test on the VT230SE. When doing a megger test
inspection on the external circuit, disconnect all wires connected to the VT230SE.
Confirm that there is no looseness or play in the bearings or couplings.
Encoder The bearings are durable parts. This is approx. 10,000 hours at 6000rpm,
and approx. 30,000 hours at 3000rpm.They must be replaced periodically.
In the case of parallel machines (370H and over), ensure that the each
output current phase for both units A and B is balanced. In order to check
the balance, measure the A unit U phase current and B unit U phase
Output current balance current using a moving iron type ammeter, if the difference is 2% or lower
than the inverter rated current, then there is no problem. Use the same
procedure for the V and W phases. Contact Meidensha if the difference is
greater than 2%.

(3) Inspection of spare VT230SE

The inspection shown in Table 8-2 must also be performed for spare VT230SE that are left
connected but are not used in normal operation. The operation of the VT230SE must be checked
every six months by turning the power on.

8-2 Measuring devices

As the voltage and current on the input and output sides include high harmonics, the measured value
will differ according to the measuring device. When measuring with a device for commercial
frequencies, measure with the following circuits and noted measuring devices.

A1 A4
Current

Inverter

A2 A5

A3 A6

V1 ：Moving iron type voltmeter

V2 ：Rectifying voltmeter
W1 ~ W6 ：Electrodynamometer type power meter

A1 ~ A6 ：Moving iron type ammeter

Fig. 8-1 Measurement circuit example

8–2
 8. Maintenance and Inspection

8-3 Protective functions

The VT230SE has the protective functions shown in Table 8-3.

Table 8-3 Protective function

Name Function
Overcurrent trip The output is cut off and the inverter stops if the instantaneous value of the
(OC-1 to 9) output current exceeds the preset value.
Overvoltage trip The output is cut off and the inverter stops if the instantaneous value of the
(OV-1 to 9) DC voltage in the main circuit exceeds the preset value.
Undervoltage trip The output is cut off and the inverter stops if the DC voltage drops to approx.
(UV-1 to 9) 65% or less due to a power failure or voltage drop during operation.
Overcurrent limit If an overload occurs, the output frequency is automatically adjusted so that
the output current is less than the overcurrent limit (150% as a standard) set
with B18-0.
Overvoltage limit If the output frequency is reduced suddenly, the DC voltage will rise in the
main circuit due to the regenerative power. The output frequency will be
automatically adjusted to prevent the DC voltage in the main circuit from
exceeding the preset value.
Overload trip The output will be cut off and the inverter will stop if the overload
(OL-1) characteristics set with C22-0, 1 and 2 are exceeded.
The setting (150% for 1 min. as a standard) can be changed according to the
characteristics of the motor.
Overheat A thermistor is installed to detect temperature rises of the heatsink.
(UOH)
Self-diagnosis The built-in CPU, peripheral circuits and data are tested and monitored for
(IO, dER, CPU) abnormalities.
Grounding trip The output will be cut off and the inverter will stop if a ground fault is
(Grd1 to 9) detected.
Power module fault The operation of the main circuit power module protection function is
(PM-1 to 9) detected, and the inverter will stop if a fault is detected.
Phase failure The output will be cut off and the inverter will stop if a phase failure in the AC
(PHL) input power supply is detected.
Converter fan fault The output will be cut off and the inverter will stop if it is detected that the
(CONV) converter cooling fan has stopped due to trouble. (Only on parallel machines
mounted with a converter fan.)

8–3
 8. Maintenance and Inspection

8-4 Troubleshooting with fault display

The countermeasures for when the inverter stops with a fault code display are shown in Table 8-4.

Table 8-4 Troubleshooting (1)

Display symbol Name Causes and countermeasures

Emergency stop 1. The sequence input EMS has been activated.
Check the signal wiring.

EMS.
Power module 1. Indicates that the short circuit protection circuit activated.
2. The power module in the main circuit may be broken.
3. A short circuit in the load may have occurred

PM-1~PM-9
Overcurrent 1. The power module in the main circuit may be broken.
during stop

OC-1
Overcurrent 1. A sudden change in the load or short circuit may have
during constant occurred.
speed operation Reduce the load fluctuation.

OC-2
Overcurrent 1. Increase the acceleration time setting (A01-0).
during 2. Reduce the torque boost voltage (A02-2).
acceleration 3. An excess GD2, short circuit or rapid fluctuation of the load
may have occurred.
OC-3
Overcurrent 1. Increase the deceleration time setting (A01-1).
during 2. A short circuit or rapid fluctuation of the load may have
deceleration occurred.

OC-4
Overcurrent 1. Reduce the brake voltage setting (A03-0).
during braking 2. A short circuit in the load may have occurred.

OC-5
Overcurrent 1. A short circuit in the load may have occurred.
during ACR

OC-6
Overcurrent
during
pre-excitation

OC-7

8–4
 8. Maintenance and Inspection

Display symbol Name Causes and countermeasures

Overcurrent 1. Increase the acceleration time setting (A01-0).
during automatic 2. Increase the deceleration time setting (A01-1).
tuning 3. A short circuit in the load may have occurred.

OC-9
Overvoltage 1. The power supply voltage may have risen.
during stop Reduce the voltage to within the specified range.

OV-1
Overvoltage 1. The power supply voltage may have risen.
during constant Reduce the voltage to within the specified range.
speed operation 2. The speed may be fluctuating.

OV-2
Overvoltage
during
acceleration

OV-3
Overvoltage 1. The load GD2 may be too large.
during Set the deceleration time (A01-1) according to the load
deceleration GD2.
2. The power supply voltage may have risen.
OV-4 Reduce the voltage to within the specified range.

Overvoltage 1. The power supply voltage may have risen.

during braking Reduce the voltage to within the specified range.

OV-5
Overvoltage
during ACR

OV-6
Overvoltage
during
pre-excitation

OV-7
Overvoltage
during automatic
tuning

OV-9

8–5
 8. Maintenance and Inspection

Display symbol Name Causes and countermeasures

Undervoltage 1. A drop in voltage, phase dropout or power supply failure
may have occurred.
Check the power supply system and correct if necessary.

UV-1~UV-9
Overheat 1. A trouble may have occurred in the cooling fan.
Replace if necessary.
2. The ambient temperature may have risen.
Lower the ambient temperature. (50°C or less)
3. The vent or heatsink may be clogged.
Clean the dirt and dust accumulated in the vent, etc.
UOH.n 4. The carrier frequency may be set too high.
Confirm that the setting is within the range given in
Appendix Table 1 (Note 5).

1. Displays indicating that the motor rotation count exceeded

Overspeed
the overspeed setting value (C24-0).
SP-1

Speed detection 1. The motor rotation count variation rate is abnormal.

error Check the encoder wiring.
SP-2

1. The difference between the motor rotation count command

Speed deviation
value and the detected value is abnormal.
error
Check the encoder wiring.
SP-3

8–6
 8. Maintenance and Inspection

Display symbol Name Causes and countermeasures

Automatic tuning 1. n = 1 The motor may not be connected correctly.
abnormal Check the connection.
completion The B00 and B01 parameters may not be set
correctly.
n: Step No. Check the parameter settings.
2. n = 2 The B00 and B01 parameters may not be set
correctly.
Check the parameter settings.
3. n = 3 The load and machine may not be separated.
Separate the load and machine.
Increase the acceleration time (A01-0).
Increase the deceleration time (A01-1).
If the motor vibrates, increase the torque stabilizing
gain (B18-2).
4. n = 4 The load and machine may not be separated.
Separate the load and machine.
ATT-n
If the motor vibrates, increase the torque stabilizing
gain (B18-2).
5. n = 5 If the motor does not stop.
Increase the acceleration/deceleration time
(A01-0, A01-1).
If the motor is stopped.
The B00 and B01 parameters may not be set
correctly.
Check the parameter settings.
6. n = 6 The B00 and B01 parameters may not be set
correctly.
Check the parameter settings.
Equipment load 1. VT230SE may have overloaded.
Reduce the load or increase the motor and inverter
capacity.
2. If this occurs at a low speed, try lowering the boost (A02-2)
OL-1 or brake voltage (A03-0).

DBR overload 1. The regenerative power may be excessive.

Increase the deceleration time, and reduce the
regenerative power.
2. C22-3: DBR overload may not be set correctly.
OL-2 Set a value appropriate for DBR and the unit.

Motor overload 1. The motor may have overloaded.

Reduce the load or increase the motor and inverter
capacity.
2. If this occurs at a low speed, try lowering the boost (A02-2)
OL-3 or brake voltage (A03-0).

8–7
 8. Maintenance and Inspection

Display symbol Name Causes and countermeasures

Grounding 1. A ground fault may have occurred in the output line or
motor. Restore the grounded point.

GRD.1~GRD.9
I/O error 1. The VT230SE may be malfunctioning due to external
(gate turn-off noise, etc. Look for the noise source and remove the
circuit error) cause.
The control circuit may be faulty.
IO-1
I/O error
(A/D converter
error)

IO-2
I/O error 1. The current detector connectors may be connected
(current detection improperly. Properly connect these.
error) 2. The current detection may be faulty.

IO-3
I/O error 1. Retry has failed. There are no countermeasures for this
(retry time-out) code, so reset the VT230SE.

IO-4
PID error 1. The PID settings or detected input may be incorrect.
Check the settings or detection value.

IO-B

External brake 1. The output current did not reached the current detection
IDET error value (C15-1) when releasing the external brake.
Check that the settings are correct, or that the motor wiring
connections are correct.
IO-C

External brake 1. RUN did not turn OFF after engaging the external brake.
RUN error Check that the settings are correct, or that the RUN
command is OFF within B46-4.

IO-D

External brake 1. The brake command and answer signal from the brake do
answer error not match.
Check the answer signal from the brake.

IO-E

8–8
 8. Maintenance and Inspection

Display symbol Name Causes and countermeasures

I/O error 1. Securely connect the thermistor connector.
(thermistor error)

IO-F
CPU error 1. The unit may be malfunctioning due to external noise, etc.
Look for the noise source and remove the cause.
2. The control circuit may be faulty.
3. For all sub-codes other than 8, turn the power off and on
CPU-1~CPU-8 once.
E2PROM The parameter setting value is incorrect. Correct the
data error parameter setting value with the following procedure.
(1) Select D20-2 with the monitor mode, and press the
set key. The parameter for which an error occurred
will display.
(2) Set the correct parameter in this state.
DER
(3) Display the parameters in order with the knob.

Verify check data An error may have occurred when using verify check in the
error parameter copy function using the operation panel.
Execute the parameter copy function again.

EP.ERR.

Phase failure 1. There may be a phase failure in the AC input power

supply.
Investigate the AC input power supply, and eliminate the
phase failure.
PHL 2. The AC input wiring may be disconnected.
Check the tightening, etc., of the AC input wire.
Converter fan 1. There may be an abnormality in the converter cooling fan.
fault Replace the fan if there is an abnormality.

Conv

8–9
 8. Maintenance and Inspection

8-5 Troubleshooting with no fault display

The causes and countermeasures for errors with no fault display are shown in Table 8-5.

Table 8-5 Troubleshooting

Phenomenon Causes and countermeasures

Motor does not run 1. The input/output wiring may be improper, or phase or power failure
may have occurred.
Inspect and correct the wiring.
2. The motor may be locked or the load excessively heavy.
Reduce the load.
3. The reverse run interlock function (C09-3) may be set or the other
parameters may be incorrect.
Check the parameters.
4. The voltage may not be output to the VT230SE output terminal.
Measure the output voltage, and confirm that the three phases are
balanced.
5. The local/remote setting may be incorrect.
Set according to the required mode.
6. The encoder signal may not be input correctly.
Check the encoder signal.
Motor runs in opposite 1. The output terminals U, V, and W sequence may be incorrect.
direction Interchange the phase sequence.
2. The sequence input wires for forward/reverse run may not be
connected to the specified terminals.
Connect the wires as follows:
Forward run: Short-circuit terminals RUN - RY0
Reverse run: Short-circuit terminals PSI1 - RY0
(When input terminal function setting is
C03-0=1 (default value))
Motor runs but the speed does 1. The load may be too heavy.
not vary Reduce the load.
2. The frequency setting signal level may be too low.
Check the signal level and circuit.
Motor acceleration/ 1. The motor acceleration/deceleration time setting (A01-0, 1) may be
deceleration is not smooth too low.
Increase the acceleration/deceleration time.
Motor speed varies during 1. The load may be fluctuating excessively or the load is too heavy.
constant speed operation Reduce the load or fluctuation.
2. The inverter-motor ratings may not match the load.
Select an inverter-motor set that matches the load.
Motor speed is too high or low 1. The number of poles or voltage may be incorrect.
Check the motor specifications.
2. The maximum frequency (speed) or base frequency [B00-4, 5
(B01-4, 5)] may be incorrect.
3. The motor terminal voltage may be low.
Use a thicker output cable.

8 – 10
 9. EMC Instruction

Chapter 9 EMC Instruction

9-1 Preface
This Instruction details how to meet the EMC directives (89/336/EEC) with VT230SE. It is important to
understand and before installation and operation of drive. The VT230SE designed to meet the EMC
directives and are suitable for use in the Industrial, Residential, Commercial and Light Industrial
Environments. These drives have been tested with the power cables and control leads connected as
shown in Fig. 9-1. If these drives are connected with fewer control leads than these examples, it may
be possible to reduce installation costs by using ordinary cables rather than screened cables which
are recommend in this manual. It is strongly advised however that a compliance test should be
performed under the actual operating conditions to certify that the system complies with the relevant
EMC requirements. If the drives are used with any of the optional cards, you must provide suitable
extra measures and must certify through a test that the product, system or installation complies with
the relevant EMC requirements.

This instruction also details how to use filters for installation: the installation where the drives are
installed as stand-alone equipment without being fitted into any enclosure, and the installation where
the drives are installed inside a metal enclosure.

VT230SE is suitable for use in Industrial Environments and in this case need not necessarily be
installed in metal cabinets for EMC compliance.

VT230SE in size 045H and smaller, 037L and smaller can be used also in Residential, Commercial
and light Industrial Environment if they are properly installed in metal cabinets. See 9-9 for details.

VT230SE in size 055H and larger, 045L and larger have been tested for use in the Industrial
Environment only.

WARNING
1. This manual represents Meidensha's recommendations based on its understanding of the EMC
regulations only and Meidensha cannot accept responsibility for any legal problems arising from or
in connection with the use of its products.
2. Meidensha have made every effort to ensure that their products comply with the directives laid out
in the certificate of conformity which is supplied with each drive. In the case of EMC, the testing has
been carried out using the filters which are recommended for each product. As VT230SE in size up
to 7.5kW are designed to be built into metal cabinets, they are considered to be components.
Therefore, the final responsibility for compliance rests with the system builder.

9-2 Installation environment

Installing VT230SE in size 7P5H and smaller, 7P5L and smaller within a metal structure control cabinet
and 011H ~ 045H, 011L ~ 037L with stand-alone is recommended to use in Residential, Commercial, and
Light Industrial Environment, ensure that the drive is not installed adjacent to devices or equipment, for
instance, measuring devices that are not CE marked.
For VT230SE in size 055H and larger and 045L and larger that are not designed for use in the
Residential, Commercial and Light Industrial Environments, ensure that no device or equipment is
installed adjacent to the drive that is intended for the Residential, Commercial and Light Industrial
Environments only, as interference with such equipment may occur.

9-1
 9. EMC Instruction

9-3 Input filters and their connections

WARNING
1. Electrical shock hazards. The input filter terminals must be fully covered with appropriate insulation
material to avoid electrical shocks.
2. Electrical shock hazards. The input filters must be fully earthed. Otherwise, there may be a risk of
electrical shocks and the effectiveness of filters will be impaired.

In most cases, the input filter should be installed as closely to the drive as possible to ensure its
effectiveness. The following table shows the maximum distance between the filter and the drive. This
may be changed, if, for instance, a complete system is filtered in its entirety. In this case, the whole
system would require testing to ensure EMC compliance.

Table 9-1 Max. distance between drive and filter

Sizes Max. distance

0P4L ~7P5L , 0P4H ~7P5H 0.3 meter
011L ~075L , 011H~315H 0.5 meter

Ensure that the input filter is securely and effectively earthed. If the drive is installed on a metal plate,
install the filter on the same plate and then earth the plate. This is effective to reduce EMI.

9-4 Choosing and installing power cables

9-4-1 Choosing power cables
The input cables to the drive via the filter must be selected from those specified in the drive's manual.
The output cables from the drive must be screened or armoured cables (see Fig. 9-1) and should be
selected from Table 2-1.

9-4-2 Installing power cables

The power cables comprises three sections: one on the primary side of the filter, one between the
filter and the drive and one on the output of the drive. Ensure that these are not installed in parallel to
each other and that these are laid down apart from each other by at least 0.3m. Please also ensure
that the screen of the output cable is earthed at both ends with one end connected to the drive's earth
terminal and the other end to that of the motor. Please arrange the termination at the drive's end
inside the drive enclosure, and if this is not possible and the cable is terminated outside the drive
enclosure, terminate the cables as closely to the drive's conduit hole as possible, i.e., within 0.1 m
from it.
If the screened output cables are over 30 meters, this may cause a problem arising from a floating
capacitance, such as undesirable surge voltage increase at the motor terminals, electrical noises from
the cables when they discharge capacitance, or increase in leakage currents. In this case, Meidensha
recommend the use of output chokes. Please contact your supplier for more information.

9-2
 9. EMC Instruction

AC Supply
L1
L2 EMI FILTER
L3

Earth
E

U Screened or amoured
V motor cable
W
E
Motor
Inverter

EMS
FRUN Screened cable
・
E

FSV
Screened cable
COM

FSI Metal box

Screened cable
COM

FM
COM Screened cable

AM
COM Screened cable

L+
B DBR

Fig.9-1 Installation (Stand-alone)

9-5 Choosing and connecting control leads

Control leads should be selected in accordance with the instructions in the drive's manual and should
be screened if they are used for a speed setting circuitry, analogue signal circuitry for metering, or
relay signal circuitry. The screen should be connected to the drive's earth or COM terminal only (refer
to Fig.9-1) The control leads should be wired away from the power cables. If the control leads must
run across the power cables, cross them at the right angle, and if they are laid down alongside each
other, ensure to separate them by at least 0.3 m. When the section which runs along the power cables
exceeds 10 m, separate them further more. The control leads should not share the same conduit hole
of the drive with the power cables. Separate analogue control leads from relay control leads.

To reduce emission and to increase immunity, ensure that no control leads are connected that are not
used. Also, ensure that control leads are wired in such manner that they are as short as possible.

The relay signal controller and analogue speed setting controller, analog signal meters should be put
in a metal box together.

9-3
 9. EMC Instruction

9-6 Earthing method

Earth the drive, motor and filter in such manner that the earthing cables are as short as possible.
Select and install earthing cables in accordance with local requirements. It is recommendable to use
low impedance earthing cables, i.e. those that can carry as much current as possible. If the motor
does not share the same earth post with the drive and filter, do not connect the screen and earth lead
of the drive's output cable to the motor.

9-7 EMI and EMS

The EMC directives set out immunity requirements for the electrical drive (ability to work properly
without being affected by external electromagnetic disturbance), in addition to the previously enforced
emission requirements (electromagnetic disturbance generated by the electrical drive).

In addition to the radiated noise directly generated from the drive and its connected cables, the
emission requirement includes the conducted noise which is conducted outside the drive through the
input cables.

Immunity is the ability of a drive to operate properly without being affected by an external disturbance.

The EMC compliance is only achieved when the drive's immunity level exceeds its emission level
under its operating environment.

In addition to the immunity against a radiated and conducted disturbance, the EMC directives also
requires of the drive the immunity against static electricity discharges and fast transients.

A human body can easily be charged with static electricity by merely walking on carpet and with a
mere touch on the drive, this static electricity will be discharged through it. A discharging spark can be
at such a magnitude that it can damage the drive.

A drive which is installed near cables connected to a switchable inductive load can often operate
incorrectly due to a fast transient induced on its control leads at a switching of the inductive load.

These are just a few examples of disturbance to which the drive is exposed, and the drive is now
required to operate correctly without being affected by such disturbance.

9-8 Considerations to measuring devices

All the cables and leads connected to the drive or filter should be regarded as active sources of
electrical noise. For inspection or service, use measuring devices or equipment that are CE marked. If
they require an external power supply, use one which is separate or well insulated from that of the
drive system.

Even for a system that comprises CE marked equipment and devices only, an EMC compliance test
may be required if the whole system is exported from one country to another. Ask the local
government for details.

9-4
 9. EMC Instruction

9-9 Installation into a metal cabinet

To clear the levels of the Residential, Commercial, Light Industrial Environments and the Industrial
Environment for the drives up to 7.5kW, the following method of installation is required.

(1) To ensure compliance with international RF emission standards, the drive should be mounted in
metal cabinets with the screens of the output power and the control cables attached to the cabinet
at the point of exit with 360°earth bonds.
When closing the metal cabinet, lock it so that it is completely sealed.

(2) The cabinet is preferably such that its door is connected to the main structure with shielded
gaskets or conductive packing. When fitting these gaskets and packing, remove any paint from
the face area where these materials fitted to the panels to ensure a minimum contact resistance
between them. Use a thick and short cable to earth the door to the main cabinet structure.

(3) To ensure a better electrical contact, remove any point from the area of the cabinet panel where
the filter is mounted.

(4) The controls assembly that attaches to the control cabling should be mounted in a cabinet panel
where the unit with 360°earth bond to screened cable.

Installing the drive, filter, and other equipment in a metal structure control cabinet will reduce the
emission level and will increase the immunity against external disturbance. It may be possible to use
inferior filters to reduce installation costs and yet to meet the relevant EMC compliance.

Even within a control cabinet, install “High-noise cables” and “Low-noise cables” separately and
ensure that they are all segregated.

High-noise cables: Any cables or leads connected to such equipment or devices which produces
electrical noise, for example, ac variable speed drives, and un-suppressed contactor and relay coils.

Low-noise cables: Any cables or leads which are not connected to such equipment or devices that
produces electrical noise, for example, ac variable speed drives, and un-suppressed contactor and
relay coils.

Fig.9-2 shows an example of the installation where a foot-print filter is used.

Metal cabinet
Screened Control box
control cable
Motor

Inverter

Screened motor cable

AC Input
EMI Filter

(Screened cable earthed to cable gland)

Fig. 9-2

9-5
 9. EMC Instruction

9-10 Selecting and fitting of filters and ferrite cores for the
installation
9-10-1 Selecting the filter
The following method of installation is required for compliance with the EMC Directives.

(1) The cables between the filter and the drive should be as short as possible.
(2) For the correct filters, see Table.9-2 and for correctly fitting them.
(3) Filters with current rating exceeding 100A are available for separate-mounting only.

9-10-2 Required input filters to achieve EMC compliance with VT230SE

The following filters have been certified for EMC compliance for use with VT230SE.

Table 9-2-1 Input filters for VT230SE drives up to 045H

Output Output
Series Size current Filter type Series Size current Filter type
*1 *1
(A) (A)
200V 0P4L 5.0 400V 0P4H 2.5
Series 0P7L 8.0 RS 3016-MD1 Series 0P7H 3.6
1P5L 11.0 1P5H 5.5 RS 3016-MD1
2P2L 16.0 RS 3030-MD1 2P2H 8.6
4P0L 22.0 4P0H 13.0
5P5L 33.0 RS 3060-MD2 5P5H 17.0 RS 3032-MD2
7P5L 42.0 7P5H 23.0
011L 61.0 RS 3094-MD3 011H 31.0
015L 76.0 015H 37.0 RS 3058-MD3
018L 86.0 RS 3150-MDN 018H 44.0
022L 108.0 022H 60.0 RS 3096-MD4
030L 134.0 RS 3280-MDN 030H 73.0
037L 161.0 037H 84.0 RS 3150-MDN
045H 108.0
*1 Data of Variable Torque

Table 9-2-2 Input filters for VT230SE drives In size 045L or larger
Output
*2
Series Size current Filter type Ferrite core type
(A)
200V 045L 173 RS3280-MDN/Std OC/4×4 (1)
Constant 055L 210 RS3330-MDN/Std OC/3 (3)
Torque
075L 286 RS3380-MDN/Std F10080G×4 (1)
OC/3 (3)
200V 045L 194 RS3280-MDN/Std OC/4×4 (1)
Variable 055L 270 RS3380-MDN/Std OC/3 (3)
Torque
075L 328 RS3660-MDN/Std F10080G×4 (1)
OC/3 (3)

*2 Top : Ferrite cores for output cables Bottom: Ferrite cores for Control cables
In ( ) : The number of turns required for cables to pass through the output core.
Table 9-2-3 Input filters for VT230SE drives In size 055H or larger

9-6
 9. EMC Instruction

Output
*2
Series Size current Filter type Ferrite core type
(A)
400V OC/4 (2)
Constant 055H 108 RS3180-MDN/Std
OC/3 (3)
Torque 075H 145 RS3280-MDN/Std
090H 173 RS3280-MDN/Std OC/4×4 (1)
110H 214 RS3330-MDN/Std OC/3 (3)
132H 245 RS3380-MDN/Std
160H 321 RS3450-MDN/Std
200H 428 RS3660-MDN/Std F10080G×4 (1)
250H 519 RS3750-MDN/Std OC/3 (3)
315H 590 RS3880-MDN/Std
400V OC/4 (2)
Variable 055H 147 RS3280-MDN/Std OC/3 (3)
Torque 075H 179 RS3280-MDN/Std
O/C4×4 (1)
090H 208 RS3330-MDN/Std
OC/3 (3)
110H 242 RS3380-MDN/Std
132H 293 RS3450-MDN/Std
160H 365 RS3660-MDN/Std
200H 479 RS3750-MDN/Std F10080G×4 (1)
OC/3 (3)
250H 581 RS3880-MDN/Std
315H 661 RS3990-MDN/Std

9-10-3 Insulation test

CAUTION
If an insulation test is performed on a system incorporating VT230SE and filters, do one of the
following.

• Remove the input filters from the system during the test. (For precautions for the drive, see Chapter
2.)
• Perform the test at the maximum voltage of 1500VAC.

9-10-4 Fitting ferrite cores

For VT230SE in size 055H and larger, 045L and larger, Figs.9.3 and 9.4 are examples where ferrite
cores are fitted on the power cables and control leads. When using the filters listed in Tables 9-2-2, 9-2-3
use the ferrite cores as listed for each drive. VT230SE drives are designed to meet the EMC
requirements with these ferrite cores properly fitted. Select the best suitable ferrite cores from the Figs. or
equivalent. The ferrite cores should be closely to the drives as possible.

If VT230SE is operated with Operation Panel using extension cable (See Table.9-4), fitting 2 ferrite cores
(TDK: ZCAT1518-0730) on the cable is required.

Table.9-4 Extension cable

Type Length (m)
V23-W10-1 1
V23-W10-2 2
V23-W10-3 3
9-7
 9. EMC Instruction

M1(2TURNS)

SCREENED
CABLE MOTOR CABLE

SF1(3TURNS)

SEQUENCE CABLE
SCREENED CABLE (CONTACT INPUT/CONTACT OUTPUT)

SCREENED CABLE FREQUENCY SETTING

CABLE(FSV)

VT210S-H750
FREQUENCY SETTING
SCREENED CABLE CABLE(FSI)

VT230SE-055H

SCREENED CABLE F METER CABLE

SCREENED CABLE A METER CABLE

L+2
DBR CABLE
L-

EMI FILTER AC INPUT CABLE

RS3180-MDN/Std
EARTH CABLE

Ferrite Core Type Manufacturer

M1 OC/4 Rasmi Electronics
SF1 OC/3 Rasmi Electronics

Fig. 9.3

9-8
 9. EMC Instruction

M1 M2 M3 M4(1TURN)

SCREENED
MOTOR CABLE
CABLE

SF1(3TURNS)

SEQUENCE CABLE
SCREENED CABLE (CONTACT INPUT/CONTACT OUTPUT)

SCREENED CABLE FREQUENCY SETTING

CABLE(FSV)

VT210S-H4000
FREQUENCY SETTING
SCREENED CABLE CABLE(FSI)

VT230SE-315H

SCREENED CABLE F METER CABLE

SCREENED CABLE A METER CABLE

L+2
DBR CABLE

EMI FILTER AC INPUT CABLE

RS3880-MDN/Std
EARTH CABLE

Ferrite Core Type Manufacturer

M1, M2, M3, M4 F140100 Hitachi Ferrite Electronics
SF1 OC/3 Rasmi Electronics

Fig. 9.4

9-9
 10. UL Instruction

Chapter 10 UL Instruction
10-1 UL instruction
VT230SE-0P4HA to 045HA and -0P4HB to 7P5HB comply with UL508C and CSA C22.2 No. 14-M91.
(Note 1) Always observe the following matters when using the product as a UL Instruction compliant
part.

10-1-1 Registration format

UL registration is indicated in the following manner.
The types for UL Approval are Model VT230SE, followed by 0P4, 0P7, 1P5, 2P2, 4P0, 5P5, 7P5, 011,
015, 018, 022, 030, 037 or 045; followed by H; followed by A or B; followed by any one to seven letters,
numbers or blank.

Example of type indication

VT230SE-2P2 H A RV0 X000

Capacity Meidensha control No.

0P4∼045 are types
of UL certificated. Indicates the control PCB option.

H indicates a type Indicates main circuit options

of UL certificated A : Standard (no options)
and 400V system. B : With dynamic braking
resistor
(Applied only ~7P5)

10-1-2 Indication
The UL and cUL marks are indicated on the rating nameplate for UL compliant parts.

-2P2HBVR0X000
380-480
CT: 5.4A /VT: 8.6A
380-480
CT: 5.5A /VT: 8.6A
0A1234A 1

10-1-3 Matters to observe

Always observe the following matters when using the product as a UL Instruction compliant part.
1) Use a "75ºC CU Class 1" wire with "voltage rating of 600V or more" for the main circuit wire
connected to the inverter.
2) Use the closed-loop crimp terminals indicated in Table 10-1 when wiring the main circuit. Select a
"UL Listed and CSA Certified closed-loop terminal" having a size matching the wire diameter. Use
a maker tool when crimping.
3) When wiring the main circuit, tighten with the torque indicated in Table 10-1.

10 - 1
 10. UL Instruction

Table 10-1 Applicable wires and terminals

Wiring to power supply and motor (L1, L2, L3, U, V, W)
400V ∼ 5P5H 037H
4P0H 011H 015H 018H 022H 030H
Series 7P5H 045H
2
mm 5.5 5.5 14 14 14 22 38 60
Applicable wire
AWG 10 10 6 6 6 4 2 1/0
Max. ring terminal
(mm) d1 8.5 9.5 12 16.5 22
d2

d1
d2 4.3 5.3 6.4 8.4

Terminal screw M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening bolt [N•m] 1.2 2 4.5 9

4) The short-circuit current of the connected power supply must be 10,000A or less and the voltage
must be 480V or less. When connecting to the power supply, use a Class J fuse.
The inverter shall be connect with a Listed Class J Fuse rated 600V with the current rating as
shown in Table 10-2.

Table 10-2 Applicable fuse rated current (A)

Inverter format 0P4H 0P7H 1P5H 2P2H 4P0H 5P5H 7P5H
Constant torque 3 6 6 10 15 20 30
Reduction torque 3 6 10 15 20 25 30

Inverter format 011H 015H 018H 022H 030H 037H 045H

Constant torque 35 50 60 70 90 110 150
Reduction torque 40 45 60 80 90 110 150

5) The inverter must be installed as "open type equipment".

6) The installation environment must have a "pollution degree 2".
7) The inverter has a motor overload protection function. Refer to Chapter 6 and correctly set
parameters C22-0 to 2.
8) Use the control terminals RA/RC, FA/FB/FC at 30VAC/DC or less.

10 - 2
 Appendix

Appendix 1 Type Description System

„ Standard specifications
„ 200V Series VT230SE-0P4L to 037L
Item Specifications
System 200V Series
Type (VT230SE-††††) 0P4L 0P7L 1P5L 2P2L 4P0L 5P5L 7P5L 011L 015L 018L 022L 030L 037L
Rated capacity
1.0 1.7 2.7 3.8 5.5 8.3 11.0 15.0 21.0 26.0 31.0 40.0 49.0
[kVA] (Note 1)
Max. continuous
Constant torque (Note 7)

rated current 3.0 5.0 8.0 11 16 24 33 46 61 76 92 118 144

[A] (Note 2)
Max. applicable
motor 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
[kW] (Note 3)
Working ambient
−10 to 50°C
temperature
Carrier frequency 1~15kHz (Default : Soft sound 4kHz)
(Note 4)
Inverter rating

Overload current
150% for 1min.
rating
Rated capacity
1.2 2.1 3.0 5.1 7.6 11.0 14.0 21.0 26.0 29.0 37.0 46.0 55.0
[kVA] (Note 1)
Max. continuous
rated current 5.0 8.0 11 16 22 33 42 61 76 86 108 134 161
[A] (Note 2)
Variable torque

Max. applicable
motor 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
[kW] (Note 3)
Working ambient
−10 to 50°C
temperature
Carrier frequency 1~15kHz (Default : Soft sound 4kHz)
(Note 4)
Overload current
120% for 1min.
rating
Rated input AC 200~230V ± 10% 200~220V ± 10%/50Hz±5%
Power
voltage: rated
supply
input frequency 50/60Hz ± 5% 200~230V ±10%/60Hz±5%

Rated output
Output voltage 200~230V (Max.) (Note 6)
(Note 8)
Output frequency 0.1~440Hz
Structure Wall-mounted
Enclosure IP20 IP00
Const- Approx. weight
ruction (kg) 3.5 6 13 26 35 40

Cooling method Self-cooling Forced air cooling

Paint color Munsell N4.0
Indoors, Relative humidity: 95%RH or below (no dew condensation), Altitude: 1000m or less,
2
Working environment Vibration: 4.9m/s or less
Freedom from corrosive or explosive gases, steam, dust, oil mist or cotton lint.

A–1
 Appendix

„ 400V Series VT230SE-0P4H to 045H

Item Specifications
System 400V Series
Type (VT230SE-††††) 0P4H 0P7H 1P5H 2P2H 4P0H 5P5H 7P5H 011H 015H 018H 022H 030H 037H 045H
Rated capacity
1.0 1.7 2.5 3.8 5.9 9.0 11.0 15.0 21.0 25.0 30.0 41.0 49.0 60.0
[kVA] (Note 1)
Max. continuous
Constant torque (Note 7)

rated current 1.5 2.5 3.6 5.5 8.6 13 17 23 31 37 44 60 72 87

[A] (Note 2)
Max. applicable
motor 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
[kW] (Note 3)
Working ambient
−10 to 50°C
temperature
Carrier frequency 1~15kHz (Default : Soft sound 4kHz)
(Note 4)
Inverter rating

Overload current
150% for 1min.
rating
Rated capacity
1.7 2.5 3.8 5.9 9.0 11.0 15.0 21.0 25.0 30.0 41.0 50.0 58.0 74.0
[kVA] (Note 1)
Max. continuous
rated current 2.5 3.6 5.5 8.6 13 17 23 31 37 44 60 73 84 108
[A] (Note 2)
Variable torque

Max. applicable
motor 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
[kW] (Note 3)
Working ambient
−10 to 50°C
temperature
Carrier frequency 1~15kHz (Default : Soft sound 4kHz)
(Note 4)
Overload current
120% for 1min.
rating
Rated input AC
Power voltage: rated 380~460V ± 10%, 50/60Hz±5%
supply input frequency 480V − 10%, +5% 50/60Hz±5%
(Note 5)
Rated output
Output voltage 380~480V (Max.) (Note 6)
(Note 8)
Output frequency 0.1~440Hz
Structure Wall-mounted
Enclosure IP20 IP00
Const- Approx. weight
ruction (kg) 3.5 6 13 26 35

Cooling method Self-cooling Forced air cooling

Paint color Munsell N4.0
Indoors, Relative humidity: 95%RH or below (no dew condensation), Altitude: 1000m or less,
2
Working environment Vibration: 4.9m/s or less
Freedom from corrosive or explosive gases, steam, dust, oil mist or cotton lint.

A–2
 Appendix

„ 200V/400V Series VT230SE-045L to 075L, -055H to 315H

Item Specifications
System 200V Series 400V Series
Type (VT230SE-††††) 045L 055L 075L 055H 075H 090H 110H 132H 160H 200H 250H 315H
Rated capacity
60 73 100 75 100 119 148 169 222 296 359 408
[kVA] (Note 1)
Max. continuous
Constant torque (Note 7)

rated current 173 210 286 108 145 173 214 245 321 428 519 590
[A] (Note 2)
Max. applicable
motor 45 55 75 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315
[kW] (Note 3)
Working ambient
−10 to 50°C
temperature
Carrier frequency 1~8kHz (Default : Soft sound 4kHz)
(Note 4)
Inverter rating

Overload current
150% for 1min.
rating
Rated capacity
65 90 110 100 120 144 167 202 252 331 402 457
[kVA] (Note 1)
Max. continuous
rated current 194 270 328 147 179 208 242 293 365 479 581 661
[A] (Note 2)
Variable torque

Max. applicable
motor 55 75 90 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 370
[kW] (Note 3)
Working ambient
−10 to 50°C
temperature
Carrier frequency 1~8kHz (Default : Soft sound 4kHz)
(Note 4)
Overload current
120% for 1min.
rating
Rated input AC 380~460V ± 10%, 50/60Hz±5%
Power 200~230V ± 10%,
voltage: rated
supply 50/60Hz±5% (Note 5)
input frequency
Rated output
Output voltage (Note 6) 200~230V (Max.) 380~460V (Max.)
(Note 8)
Output frequency 0.1~440Hz
Structure Wall-mounted
Enclosure IP00
Const- Approx. weight
ruction (kg) 60 80 100 55 60 65 70 90 100 210 300

Cooling method Forced air cooling

Paint color Munsell 5Y7/1
Indoors, Relative humidity: 95%RH or below (no dew condensation), Altitude: 1000m or less,
2
Working environment Vibration: 4.9m/s or less
Freedom from corrosive or explosive gases, steam, dust, oil mist or cotton lint.

A–3
 Appendix

„ 400V Series VT230SE-370H to 660H

Item Specifications
System 400V Series
Type (VT230SE-††††) 370H 550H 660H
Rated capacity
530 730 820
[kVA] (Note 1)
Max. continuous
Constant torque (Note 8)

rated current 770 1062 1190

[A] (Note 2)
Max. applicable
motor 370 550 660
[kW] (Note 3)
Working ambient
−10 to 50°C
temperature
Carrier frequency 1~8kHz (Default : Soft sound 4kHz)
(Note 5)
Inverter rating

Overload current
150% for 1min.
rating
Rated capacity
600 820
[kVA] (Note 1)
Max. continuous
rated current 820 1190
[A] (Note 2)
Variable torque

Max. applicable
motor 450 660
[kW] (Note 3)
Working ambient −10 to 50°C
temperature
Carrier frequency
1~8kHz (Default : Soft sound 4kHz)
(Note 5)
Overload current
120% for 1min.
rating
Rated input AC 380~460V ± 10%, 50/60Hz±5%
Power
voltage: rated
supply (Note 6)
input frequency
Rated output
Output voltage (Note 7) 380~460V (Max.)
(Note 9)
Output frequency 0.1~440Hz
Structure Standard conversion unit + reverse conversion unit × 2 + output interphase reactor × 3
Enclosure IP00
Const- Approx. weight
ruction (kg) 650 875 875

Cooling method Forced air cooling

Paint color Munsell 5Y7/1
Indoors, Relative humidity: 95%RH or below (no dew condensation), Altitude: 1000m or less,
2
Working environment Vibration: 4.9m/s or less
Freedom from corrosive or explosive gases, steam, dust, oil mist or cotton lint.

A–4
 Appendix

Note 1) The output voltage indicates the output capacity [kVA] at 200V for the 200V series, and
400V for the 400V series.
Note 2) Indicates the total effective value including the higher harmonics.
Note 3) Indicates the case for the MEIDENSHA standard 4-pole squirrel cage motor.

Note 4) The soft sound mode is set as a default. Set as follows to use the mono sound mode.
・030H and smaller and 022L and smaller
If the carrier frequency is set higher than 4kHz on variable torque, derate the output
current by (variable torque rated current - constant torque rated current)/6[A] per 1kHz.
Furthermore, when picking up the 10kHz and using, set 7% of the constant torque’s rated
current per 1kHz as the reduced rating. (refer to Fig. 1-2)
・037H∼045H and 030L∼037L
If 4kHz is exceeded, derate the output current by 7% of the constant torque’s rated
current
per 1kHz as the reduced rating. (refer to Fig. 1-3)
・055H and larger and 045L and larger
If 4kHz is exceeded, derate the output current by 5% of the constant torque’s rated
current
per 1kHz as the reduced rating. (refer to Fig. 1-4)

For 0P4H~7P5H, 0P4L~7P5L

If the heat sink temperature 115°C is exceeded, the carrier frequency will automatically
change to 3.1kHz.

For 011H~045H, 011L~037L

If the heat sink temperature 85°C is exceeded, the carrier frequency will automatically
change to 3.1kHz.

For 055H or more, 045L or more

If the heat sink temperature 75°C is exceeded and the output current exceeds 110% or if
the heat sink temperature 85°C is exceeded, the carrier frequency will automatically
change to 3.1kHz.

A–5
 Appendix

Variable 7% of rated current

torque (Iv-Ic)/6
rated current Rated
Output current (%)

current
(Iv)

Output current (%)

Constant
torque 7%
rated current
Constant
torque
rated current
(Ic)

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Carrier frequency (kHz) Carrier frequency (kHz)

Fig. 1-2 Derating according to carrier

frequency for 030H and smaller and
022L and smaller

5% of rated current

Rated
Output current (%)

current

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Carrier frequency (kHz)

Fig. 1-4 Derating according to carrier

frequency for 055H and larger and
045L and larger

(Note) When changing the carrier frequency, take care to the motor's temperature rise.

Note 5) This inverter is subject to the EC Low Voltage Directives. The rated input voltage will be 380
to 415V to comply with the EC Low Voltage Directives.
Note 6) An output voltage exceeding the input voltage cannot be attained.
Note 7) When using the IM speed sensor-less vector control , the IM vector control with speed
sensor, or the PM motor control, select the applicable motor from the max. continuous rated
current [A] of the constant torque.
Note 8) The rated output voltage for the IM speed sensor-less vector control , the IM vector control
with speed sensor, or the PM motor control is as follows.
200V series : 160V/180V/185V respectively in respect to the input voltage 200V/220V,
230V.
400V series : 300V/320V/360V/370V respectively in respect to the input voltage
380V/400V/440V/460V.

A–6
 Appendix

„ Control specifications table

Speed
V/f control V/f control Vector control PM motor control
sensor-less
(constant (variable with speed
vector
torque) torque) sensor (Note 1) (Note 2)
control
All digital control
Control method
Sine wave approximation PWM
Mono-sound mode : 1 to 15KHz (0.1kHz increments)
(1 to 8kHz for 055H∼, 045L∼)
Frequency control

Transfer frequency Soft sound mode : Average frequency 2.1 to 5kHz

Frequency modulation method
(3 tone modulation, 4 tone modulation)
Output frequency
0.01Hz
resolution
0.01Hz (digital)
Frequency setting
0.025% (analog)
resolution
In respect to maximum frequency
±0.01% (digital) at 25±10°C
Frequency accuracy
±0.1% (analog) at 25±10°C
Select randomly from constant
Voltage/frequency torque, constant output and Select randomly from constant torque and constant
characteristics reduction torque 3 to 440Hz output 150 to 7200min–1 (210Hz) range.
range.
Torque boost Manual/automatic selective —
Max. torque for applicable motor is
Max. torque boost output when used with automatic —
tuning.
Control specifications

Automatic measurement of motor constants

Automatic tuning Automatic measurement of various parameters —
(Measurement time approx. 2 minutes)
Starting frequency Set between 0.1 and 60.0Hz —
200% or more (Note 3)
(Time to reach using Meidensha
Starting torque —
standard motor at 150%A: approx.
3 seconds)
Acceleration/ 0.01 to 60000sec
deceleration time Acceleration/deceleration time × 2, jogging dedicated × 1, program cushion × 8
Acceleration/
Linear/S-character selective
deceleration mode
3 modes selective
• Forward run/reverse run
Operation method
• Run stop/forward run reverse run
• Forward run pulse/reverse run pulse/stop

(Note 1) The IM speed detection option PCB is required.

(Note 2) This is for the Meidensha standard PM motor. The PM speed detection option PCB is required.
(Note 3) It depends on the motor capacity. For 45kW and larger, starting torque is Approx. 150%.

A–7
 Appendix

V/f control V/f control Speed Vector control

PM motor
(constant (variable sensor-less with speed
control
torque) torque) vector control sensor
Stop method Deceleration stop in respect to run, emergency stop and inching, coast to stop selective
Braking start frequency, randomly Braking speed, randomly set between 0.00 and
set between 0.1 and 60.0Hz 50.00%
Braking voltage, randomly set Braking start ,randomly set between 50 and 150%.
Control specifications

DC braking
between 0.1 and 20.0%
Braking time, randomly set between 0.0 and 20.0 seconds
Output frequency 0 to 440Hz 0 to 120Hz 0 to 210Hz

Control range 1 : 100 1 : 1000 1 : 100

— Constant output range Up to 1 : 2 Up to 1 : 4 Up to 1 : 1.2
ASR
Control accuracy
±0.5% ±0.01% ±0.01%
(At Fmax ≥ 50Hz)
Control response 5Hz 30Hz —
Multi-step frequency 8 steps Acceleration/deceleration time
setting as changeable 5-bit non-encode mode
During remote setting mode During remote setting mode
y = Ax + B + C y = Ax + B + C
y: Operation results y: Operation results
x: Operation input x: Operation input
Ratio interlock setting
A: 0.000 to ±10.000 A: 0.000 to ±10.000
B: 0.00 to ±440Hz B: 0 to ±7200min−1 (120Hz)
C: Auxiliary input C: Auxiliary input
With output upper/lower limit With output upper/lower limit
Three places can be set
Frequency jump Width can be varied between 0.0 —
and 10Hz
Setting

Operation/non selective
Slip compensation Slip compensation gain: —
0.0 to 20.0
Automatic run 10-step automatic run function
function Synchronous/asynchronous selective
PID control PID control PID control
Pick-up Pick-up
Automatic start Automatic start Automatic start
Restart after instantaneous power Restart after Restart after instantaneous power
Others failure instantaneous failure
power failure
Reverse run prevention Reverse run Reverse run prevention
prevention
Traverse pattern Traverse pattern Traverse pattern
Display: 7-segment LED × 5 digits and sign Status/unit display LED: 8 points
Operation: Operate with knob and set keys
Standard panel Local/remote changeover operation, forward run/reverse run direct run
operation, all parameter reference/change, others
Control input/output

Unit installation possible (extension cable max. 3m)

Sequence input Fixed: 3 points Programmable: 5 points Sink/source changeable
Relay 1c contact: 1 point (fault) Relay 1a contact: 1 point (programmable)
Open collector: 3 points (programmable)
Sequence output The programmable details can be changed between speed detection, pre-charging
complete, reverse run, speed reached, direction operation, current reached, speed
reached, acceleration, deceleration and fault code
FSV: 0 to 10V/0 to 5V/1 to 5V
Frequency setting FSI: 4 to 20mA/0 to 20mA
AUX: 0 to ±10V/0 to ±5V/1 to 5V (Used for the ratio interlock, operation or PID feedback)

A–8
 Appendix

V/f control V/f control Speed Vector control

PM motor
(constant (variable sensor-less with speed
control
torque) torque) vector control sensor
Control

0 to 10VDC, 1mA (programmable) : 2 points

Meter output
Change between output frequency, output voltage, output current, DC voltage, etc.

Overcurrent limit (drive regeneration limit variable), overvoltage limit, overload warning
Preventive
contact
Overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, IGBT fault, overload, temperature rise, ground
Shut-off
fault, other self-diagnosis
Past four faults are saved.
Fault history Saved details: Primary cause, secondary cause, output current and output frequency
Protection

before shut-off.
Except variable torque
150% for 1 minute, 170% for 2.5 seconds (75% for 1minute in case 1Hz and less)
Inverse time characteristics
Overload withstand
level
Variable torque
120% for 1 minute, 125% for 7.5 seconds (60% for 1minute in case 1Hz and less)
Inverse time characteristics
Retry Randomly set between 0 and 10 times

A–9
 Appendix

Appendix 2 Outline Dimension Drawings

THYFREC
THYFREC VT230SE
VT230SE

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

THYFREC
VT230SE

Fig. 3

Type Dimensions (mm) Main

Weight
200V 400V circuit Fig.
W0 W1 H0 H1 D ød (kg)
Series Series terminal
0P4L 0P4H
0P7L 0P7H
1P5L 1P5H 170 155 243 228 162 6 3.5 Fig. 1
2P2L 2P2H M4
4P0L 4P0H
5P5H
7P5H
216 201 275 260 169 6
5P5L
7P5L
011H 7 M5 Fig. 2
015H
018H 265 245 360 340 228 13
011L
015L M6
022H
018L 030H 310 200 500 480 259 26
022L
10 M8 Fig. 3
037H
045H 35
030L 342 200 590 570 307
037L M10 40

A – 10
 Appendix

Operation panel

2-ød 2-øE
Suspension hole
H0
H1

d d D1
W1 25 D
W0
Main circuit terminal

Fig.4

Type Dimensions (mm) Main

Weight
200V 400V circuit Fig.
W0 W1 H0 H1 D D1 ød øE (kg)
Series Series terminal
055H 55
420 300 690 666 309
045L 075H 60
090H 10 20 65
110H 480 400 740 714 352 12 M10 70
055L 80
Fig.4
132H 90
488 320 980 956 358 13 23
075L 160H 100
200H 680 500 1100 1070 210
250H 379 20 15 23 M16
870 600 1300 1270 300
315H

A – 11
 Appendix

Operation panel (only A unit)

2-ød 2-øE
Suspension hole
H0
H1

d d D1
W1 25 D
W0
Main circuit terminal

Fig. 5-1 Reverse conversion unit A, B

Dimensions (mm) Main Weight

Type circuit (kg) Fig.
W0 W1 H0 H1 D D1 ød øE terminal
370H 680 500 1100 1070 210
Fig.
550H 379 20 15 23 M16
870 600 1300 1270 300 5-1
660H

412.5 376
Φ10
30 160 30 192.5
10

204

11 25
25

333.5

L1
129.5

TBAC 40
L-
37.9

L2 TBDC
790

127
89.3

L+
78.1

TBEC
L3
15
329.5
251.2

10
10

Fig. 5-2 Standard conversion unit

A – 12
 Appendix

Terminal cover

D±2

C±2

G
A E
B F

earth terminal

Fig. 5-3 Output interphase reactor

Used Dimensions (mm)

Type Weight Fig.
Qty A B C D E F G
370H 3 260 300 552 220 260 300 286 60kg × 3
550H Fig. 5-3
3 310 350 548 240 310 350 278 75kg × 3
660H

A – 13
 Appendix

Appendix 3 Fault Codes

Code Display Fault Description Retry
0 ——— No fault No fault recorded. ×
Emergency Indicates that sequence signal EMS has been input in C00-4 = 2 (fault
1 (EmS) ×
stop output at emergency stop) mode.
Power module fault
n: sub-code 1: during stop 2: during operation at
Power the set speed
2 (PM-n) {
Module 3: during acceleration 4: during deceleration
5: during braking 6: during ACR
7: during pre-extension 9: during automatic tuning
The output has risen to or beyond 300%.
n: sub-code 1: during stop 2: during operation at
Over the set speed
3 (OC-n) {
current 3: during acceleration 4: during deceleration
5: during braking 6: during ACR
7: during pre-extension 9: during automatic tuning
The DC voltage has risen to or beyond the preset level. (Vdc ≥ 800 or
400V)
n: sub-code 1: during stop 2: during operation at
Over
4 (OV-n) the set speed {
voltage
3: during acceleration 4: during deceleration
5: during braking 6: during ACR
7: during pre-extension 9: during automatic tuning
While the drive is running, the DC voltage has lowered to or beyond the
preset level (65% of the rating).
n: sub-code 1: during stop 2: during operation at
the set speed
Under 3: during acceleration 4: during deceleration
5 (UV-n) ×
voltage 5: during braking 6: during ACR
7: during pre-extension 9: during automatic tuning
At C08-0 = 2, 3 (automatic start), only the symbol displays, so the FLT
LED and terminal block FA, FB and FC contacts will not operate. EC0 to
3 will operate.
Phase This indicates that there is a phase failure in the AC input power supply.
6 (PHL) ×
failure (Note. 1)
The heatsink temperature has risen.
n: sub-code 1: Detected with thermistor
(∼7P5L,7P5H 120ºC and above)
7 (UOHn) Overheat {
(011L,011H∼ 95ºC and above)
2: Detected with thermostat
(045L,055H∼ 95ºC and above)
This indicates that the motor rotation speed is abnormal.
n: Subc code
8 (SP-n) Speed error 1: Overspeed (C24-0 over) ×
2: Speed detection error
3: Speed deviation error
Converter This indicates that trouble has occurred in the converter cooling fan.
9 (CONV) {
fan fault (Only on parallel machines mounted with a converter fan.) (Note 1)
This indicates that the automatic tuning did not complete normally.
n: sub-code 1: Setting error 2: Calculation operation error
Automatic
(Automatic
tuning
A (ATT-n) tuning step) ×
abnormal
3: Operation error 4: Load error
completion
5: End process error 6: Convergence operation
error
Indicate that the output current exceeded the thermal operation time
having inverse time characteristics. The standard characteristics are
150% for one minute in respect to the motor rated current. At 155% or
B (OL-n) Overload more in respect to the inverter rated current, this will be 170% for 2.5 {
seconds.
n: sub-code 1: Equipment overload 2: DBR overload
3: Motor overload

A – 14
 Appendix

Code Display Fault Description Retry

The Drive has sensed grounded conditions on the output.
n: sub-code 1: during stop 2: during operation at
the set speed
C (GRD. n) Ground {
3: during acceleration 4: during deceleration
5: during braking 6: during ACR
7: during pre-extension 9: during automatic tuning
There has been an error in communications through the I/O port.
n: sub-code
1: Gate Shutdown Circuit error. A feedback signal has disagreed to a
Gate Shutdown command.
2: A/D Convertor error. The A/D Convertor has been jammed.
3: Current Detector Offset. The offset of the Current Detector has
increased to or beyond 0.5V.
4: Retry time out. Indicates that the operation was not successful
within the No. of retries set in C21-0.
D (IO-n) I/O Error 7: This indicates that the PROFIBUS interface option cannot be ×
started up.
8: This indicates that a watch dog error occurred in the PROFIBUS
interface option. (Indicates that an operation delay occurred in the
PROFIBUS interface option.)
B: PID error
C: External brake IDET error
D: External brake RUN error
E: External brake answer error
F: Thermistor fault
There has been an error while the CPU, RAM or ROM is in the
self-diagnosis mode at power-up.
n: sub-code
1: Watch-dog error, indicating that the CPU has been jammed. This
fault may appear during at-speed operation.
2: CPU calculation error.
E (CPU-n) CPU Error 3: CPU RAM error. ×
4: External RAM error.
2
6: E PROM check-sum error.
2
7: E PROM read error.
2
8: E PROM write error. This error is only displayed, and the gate will
not shut down and FLT will not be output.
9: Illegal combination of software version and CPU.
2
Indicates that there is an error in the various data stored in the E PROM.
2 For details, enter the monitor mode: D20-2, and correct the data.
E PROM
F (dEr) Caution) If this appears when starting up, the details will not be stored ×
Data Error
internally. Thus, after starting up normally, these details
cannot be read with the fault history (D20-0).
Verify
This indicates that an error occurred during the verify check in the ×
- (EP.ERR) check data parameter copy function using the operation panel.
error

A – 15
 Appendix

Appendix 4 7-segment LED Display

(1) Numeric

Display
Numerics 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

(2) Alphabet

Display
Alphabet A B (b) C D (d) E F G H I J

Display
Alphabet L M (m) N (n) O P Q (q) R (r) S T (t) U

Display
「 」
Alphabet V (v) Y –
(Brackets)

(3) Message
LOC LOCK Lst LIST
rUn RUN trC TRACE
rty RETRY 。 d.Err Data ERROR
Err ERROR 。 d.End Data END
rmt REMOTE 。 d.CHG Data CHANGE

A – 16
 Revision history

Revision history
CPU ROM
Revision Page Revision details
version version
A iii Add for Warning
vi Add for Caution
2-5 Reviced Fig.2-4 Example of main circuit wiring(continued)
2-7 Reviced (Note4) 045H → 055H
2-12 Reviced terminal block layout 250H,315H
5-7,5-10,6-3 Add for RDELAY control 9319.0 9320.3
6-5,12,14 Add for stop operation of Multi-pump control
6-19~21 Add for PL0~3 control
6-23~26 Add for standard serial communication parameters
6-29,30,32 Add for CC-Link
6-33,36,37,38,70,89 Reviced indicate flags for Multi-pump and Spining frame operation
7-2 Reviced Built-in printed-circuit board option
7-8 Reviced DB unit resistance
A-5 (note 4) Deletion
A-6 The note number is advanced one by one
A-8 Add for PID control specification table
A-10 Reviced D(mm) of 018L 022L 030H 253 → 259

Ｂ 7-2 Reviced V23-RY1 (ST-3436) → (ST-3437)

Reviced V23-SL7 (ST-3432) → (ST-3433)
Reviced V23-SL8 (ST-3430) → (ST-3431)
Reviced V23-SL9 (ST-3434) → (ST-3435)
Reviced 「Under development」 → 「Certification tests under way」 9319.0 9320.3
6-12 Delete B16-7
6-16 Reviced the default value of B31-2
6-34 Reviced the default,minimum and maximum value of C21-2
9-1 Reviced type for EMC instruction

R–1
 Main Products
Power Generating Systems Generators
Substation Systems Compact Substation Equipment
Power Transmission and Distribution Protection Transformers
System Circuit-Breakers
Building Administration System Switchgears
Railway System Surge Arresters
Road Supervisory System Static Power Inverters and Converters
Water Treatment System Electric Motors
Industrial Process and Control System Motor Speed Control Equipment
Variable-Speed Control System Programable Controller
Induction Heating System Palletizing Equipment
Dynamometer Applied System Manipulator for Nuclear Applications
Logistics System Unattended Carriers
Wholesale-Flowermarket Information System Computers
Plant Construction

MEIDENSHA CORPORATION

Riverside Building, 36-2, Nihonbashi Hakozakicho, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 103-8515 Japan

Phone: Tokyo 3-5641-7229 Facsimile: 3-5641-7249

Overseas Offices ＆Affiliates (For inquiries, please contact to the office/company marked ※.)

Hong Kong MEIDEN METAL ENGINEERING The United Kingdom

MEIDEN PACIFIC (CHINA) LTD. SDN. BHD. ※MEIDEN EUROPE LTD.
Unit 01-02A, 16/F, Tower 1, Lot 6, Peringkat 3, New Wave Complex,
Ever Gain Plaza, Kawasan Perindustrian Alor Gajah, Bradbourne Drive,
88 Container Port Road, 78000 Melaka, Malaysia Tilbrook,
Kwai Chung, N.T.,Hong Kong Phone: 6-5568790 ∼2 Milton Keynes MK7 8BN,
Phone: 2503-2468 Facsimile: 6-5568795 England, U.K.
Facsimile: 2887-8046 Phone: 1908-276000
Singapore Facsimile: 1908-276010
Indonesia ※MEIDEN SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
※P.T. MEIDEN ENGINEERING 5, Jalan Pesawat, The United States
INDONESIA Jurong Industrial Estate, ※MEIDENSHA CORPORATION
19th Floor, Summitmas l, Singapore 619363 The American Center Building,
JI. Jenderal Sudirman Kaveling Phone: 6268-8222 Suite 1110
61-62 Facsimile: 6264-4292 27777 Franklin Road,
P.O.BOX 6920/KBY/Summitmas l
Southfield, Michigan 48034,
Jakarta Selatan 12190, Indonesia Thailand U.S.A.
Phone: 21-520-0612/1239 ※THAI MEIDENSHA CO., LTD. Phone: 248-353-2540
Facsimile: 21-520-0240 11th Floor, TST Tower Building, Facsimile: 248-353-3150
21 Viphavadi-Rangsit Road,
Korea Soi Chuei Phung, Jatujak,
※MEIDENSHA CORPORATION Bangkok 10900, Thailand
Royal Building No. 410, Phone: 2-273-8954 ∼61
5 Dangju-Dong, Facsimile: 2-273-8966
Chongro-ku, Seoul, Korea
Phone: 2-736-0232 ∼3 MEIDEN ELECTRIC
Facsimile: 2-736-0234 (THAILAND) LTD .
898 Moo 2,
Malaysia Bangpa-in Industrial Estate,
※MEIDEN ELECTRIC Udomsorayuth Rd.,
ENGINEERING SDN. BHD. Klongjig, Bangpa-in,
G.03, Ground Floor, Wisma Ayudhaya 13160, Thailand
Academy, Phone: 35-258258 ∼262
4A, Jalan 19/1 Facsimile: 35-221388
46300 Petaling Jaya,
Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
Phone: 3-79554646
Facsimile: 3-79546466

Specifications in this catalog are subject to change without notice.